Transmission device and transmission method

ABSTRACT

A transmission device includes: a weighting synthesizer that generates a first precoded signal and a second precoded signal; a first pilot inserter that inserts a pilot signal into the first precoded signal; a phase changer that applies a phase change of i×Δλ to the second precoded signal, where i is a symbol number and an integer that is greater than or equal to 0; an inserter that inserts a pilot signal into the phase-changed second precoded signal; and a phase changer that applies a phase change to the phase-changed and pilot-signal-inserted second precoded signal. Δλ satisfies π/2 radians&lt;Δλ&lt;π radians or π radians&lt;Δλ&lt;3π/2 radians.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.17/500,190, filed Oct. 13, 2021, which is a continuation of U.S.application Ser. No. 16/791,312, filed Feb. 14, 2020, now U.S. Pat. No.11,184,060, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.16/235,236, filed Dec. 28, 2018, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,790,887, which isa U.S. continuation application of PCT International Patent ApplicationNumber PCT/JP2017/022771 filed on Jun. 21, 2017, claiming the benefit ofpriority of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/356,779 filed on Jun.30, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/372,953 filed on Aug. 10,2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/417,699 filed on Nov. 4, 2016,U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/419,166 filed on Nov. 8, 2016, andU.S. Provisional Application No. 62/432,895 filed on Dec. 12, 2016, theentire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.

BACKGROUND 1. Technical Field

The present disclosure relates in particular to transmission devices andreception devices that communicate by using multiple antennas.

2. Description of the Related Art

In a line of sight (LOS) environment in which a direct wave is dominant,one example of a communications method that uses multiple antennas isthe multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communications method, and oneexample of a transmission method for achieving favorable receptionquality is the method disclosed in “MIMO for DVB-NGH, the nextgeneration mobile TV broadcasting,” IEEE Commun. Mag., vol. 57, no. 7,pp. 130-137, July 2013.

FIG. 17 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice based on the Digital Video Broadcasting-Next Generation Handheld(DVB-NGH) standard, in a case where there are two transmitting antennasand two transmission modulated signals (transmission streams). Thisexample is disclosed in “MIMO for DVB-NGH, the next generation mobile TVbroadcasting,” IEEE Commun. Mag., vol. 57, no. 7, pp. 130-137, July2013. In the transmission device, data 003 encoded by encoder 002 issplit into data 005A and data 005B by splitter 004. Data 005A isinterleaved by interleaver 004A and mapped by mapper 006A. Similarly,data 005B is interleaved by interleaver 004B and mapped by mapper 006B.Weighting synthesizers 008A, 008B receive inputs of mapped signals 007A,007B, and weighting synthesize these signals to generate weightingsynthesized signals 009A, 016B. The phase of weighting synthesizedsignal 016B is then changed. Then, radio units 010A, 010B performprocessing related to orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM)and processing such as frequency conversion and/or amplification, andtransmit transmission signal 011A from antenna 012A and transmissionsignal 011B from antenna 012B.

The conventional configuration does not consider transmitting singlestream signals together. In such a case, in particular, it is favorableto implement a new transmission method for improving data receptionquality in the reception device that receives the single stream.

SUMMARY

The present disclosure relates to a transmission method used whentransmitting a combination of single stream signals and multi-streamsignals under the use of a multi-carrier transmission scheme, such asOFDM, and via this, has an object to improve single stream datareception quality and multi-stream data reception quality in apropagation environment including LOS (line of sight).

A transmission device according to the present disclosure includes: aweighting synthesizer that generates a first precoded signal and asecond precoded signal by performing a precoding process on a firstbaseband signal and a second baseband signal, respectively; a firstpilot inserter that inserts a pilot signal into the first precodedsignal; a first phase changer that applies a phase change of i×Δλ to thesecond precoded signal, where i is a symbol number and an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0; a second pilot inserter that inserts apilot signal into the second precoded signal applied with the phasechange; and a second phase changer that applies a phase change to thesecond precoded signal applied with the phase change and inserted withthe pilot signal. Δλ satisfies π/2 radians<Δλ<π radians or πradians<Δλ<3π/2 radians.

A transmission method according to the present disclosure includes:generating a first precoded signal and a second precoded signal byperforming a precoding process on a first baseband signal and a secondbaseband signal, respectively; inserting a pilot signal into the firstprecoded signal; applying a phase change of i×Δλ to the second precodedsignal, where i is a symbol number and an integer that is greater thanor equal to 0; inserting a pilot signal into the second precoded signalapplied with the phase change; and applying a phase change to the secondprecoded signal applied with the phase change and inserted with thepilot signal. Δλ satisfies π/2 radians<Δλ<π radians or π radians<Δλ<3π/2radians.

In this way, according to the present disclosure, it is possible toprovide a high-quality communications service since it is possible toimprove single stream data reception quality and improve multi-streamdata reception quality in a propagation environment including LOS (lineof sight).

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

These and other objects, advantages and features of the disclosure willbecome apparent from the following description thereof taken inconjunction with the accompanying drawings that illustrate a specificembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to an embodiment;

FIG. 2 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of the radio unitillustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 4 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 5 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of a configuration of components relevantto control information generation in FIG. 2 ;

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of the antenna unitillustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception deviceaccording to an embodiment;

FIG. 9 illustrates one example of the relationship between atransmission device and a reception device;

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of the antenna unitillustrated in FIG. 8 ;

FIG. 11 illustrates part of the frame illustrated in FIG. 5 ;

FIG. 12 illustrates one example of a modulation scheme used by themapper illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 13 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 14 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 15 illustrates one example of a configuration used when CDD isused;

FIG. 16 illustrates one example of a carrier arrangement used when OFDMis used;

FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice based on the DVB-NGH standard;

FIG. 18 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 19 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 20 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 21 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 22 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 23 illustrates one example of a configuration of a base station;

FIG. 24 illustrates one example of a configuration of a terminal;

FIG. 25 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal;

FIG. 26 illustrates one example of transmission between a base stationand a terminal;

FIG. 27 illustrates one example of transmission between a base stationand a terminal;

FIG. 28 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 29 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 30 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 31 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 32 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 33 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 34 illustrates one example of the system configuration in a statein which transmission is being performed between a base station and aterminal;

FIG. 35 illustrates one example of communication between a base stationand a terminal;

FIG. 36 illustrates an example of data included in a receptioncapability notification symbol transmitted by the terminal illustratedin FIG. 35 ;

FIG. 37 illustrates an example of data included in a receptioncapability notification symbol transmitted by the terminal illustratedin FIG. 35 ;

FIG. 38 illustrates an example of data included in a receptioncapability notification symbol transmitted by the terminal illustratedin FIG. 35 ;

FIG. 39 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 40 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 41 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception deviceincluded in the terminal in FIG. 24 ;

FIG. 42 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when a basestation or AP uses a multi-carrier transmission scheme and transmits asingle modulated signal;

FIG. 43 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when a basestation or AP uses a single-carrier transmission scheme and transmits asingle modulated signal;

FIG. 44 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice included in, for example, a base station, access point, orbroadcast station;

FIG. 45 illustrates one example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the time axis of a signal;

FIG. 46 illustrates one example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the frequency axis of a signal;

FIG. 47 illustrates one example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the time and frequency axes of a signal;

FIG. 48 illustrates a second example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the time axis of a signal;

FIG. 49 illustrates a second example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the frequency axis of a signal;

FIG. 50 illustrates one example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the time and frequency axes of a signal;

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by a base station or AP;

FIG. 52 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when singlestream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG. 51 is performed;

FIG. 53 illustrates one example of a frame configuration whenmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51 isperformed;

FIG. 54 illustrates one example of a configuration of a signal processorin a transmission device included in a base station;

FIG. 55 illustrates one example of a configuration of a radio unit;

FIG. 56 illustrates one example of a configuration of a signal processorin a transmission device in a base station;

FIG. 57 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by a base station or AP;

FIG. 58 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when singlestream modulated signal transmission 5701 in FIG. 57 is performed;

FIG. 59 illustrates a first example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer;

FIG. 60 illustrates a second example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer;

FIG. 61 illustrates a third example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer;

FIG. 62 illustrates a fourth example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer;

FIG. 63 illustrates a fifth example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer;

FIG. 64 illustrates a sixth example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer;

FIG. 65 illustrates a seventh example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer;

FIG. 66 illustrates an eighth example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer;

FIG. 67 illustrates a ninth example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer;

FIG. 68 illustrates operations performed by the mapper illustrated inFIG. 1 ;

FIG. 69 illustrates an example of a distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-quadrature Q plane when QPSK is used;

FIG. 70 illustrates an example of a distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-quadrature Q plane when QPSK is used;

FIG. 71 illustrates an example of a distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-quadrature Q plane when QPSK is used;

FIG. 72 illustrates an example of a distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-quadrature Q plane when QPSK is used;

FIG. 73 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice in a base station or AP;

FIG. 74 illustrates operations performed by the mapper illustrated inFIG. 73 ;

FIG. 75 illustrates operations performed by the mapper illustrated inFIG. 73 ;

FIG. 76 illustrates operations performed by the mapper illustrated inFIG. 1 ;

FIG. 77 illustrates operations performed by the mapper illustrated inFIG. 73 ;

FIG. 78 illustrates operations performed by the mapper illustrated inFIG. 73 ;

FIG. 79 illustrates an example of data included in a receptioncapability notification symbol transmitted by the terminal illustratedin FIG. 35 ;

FIG. 80 illustrates one example of a frame configuration;

FIG. 81 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 82 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 83 illustrates one example of a spectrum of a transmission signalillustrated in FIG. 1 ;

FIG. 84 illustrates an example of a distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-quadrature Q plane when BPSK is used;

FIG. 85 illustrates an example of a distribution of signal points whensymbol number i is an even number;

FIG. 86 illustrates signal points of a precoded signal in an in-phaseI-quadrature Q plane when BPSK is used;

FIG. 87 illustrates signal points of a weighting synthesized signal inan in-phase I-quadrature Q plane;

FIG. 88 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal transmitted by a base station or AP;

FIG. 89 illustrates one example of a configuration of a receptiondevice;

FIG. 90 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice;

FIG. 91 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 90 ;

FIG. 92 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by the transmission device illustrated in FIG. 90 ;

FIG. 93 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by the transmission device illustrated in FIG. 90 ;

FIG. 94 illustrates a specific example of a reception capabilitynotification symbol transmitted by the terminal illustrated in FIG. 35 ;

FIG. 95 illustrates one example of a configuration of the receptioncapability notification symbol related to a single-carrier scheme and anOFDM scheme illustrated in FIG. 94 ;

FIG. 96 illustrates one example of a configuration of the receptioncapability notification symbol related to a single-carrier schemeillustrated in FIG. 94 ;

FIG. 97 illustrates one example of a configuration of the receptioncapability notification symbol related to an OFDM scheme illustrated inFIG. 94 ; and

FIG. 98 illustrates a specific example of a reception capabilitynotification symbol transmitted by the terminal illustrated in FIG. 35 .

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EMBODIMENTS

Hereinafter, embodiments according to the present disclosure will bedescribed in detail with reference to the drawings.

Embodiment 1

A transmission method, transmission device, reception method, andreception device according to this embodiment will be described indetail.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. Error correction encoder 102 receivesinputs of data 101 and control signal 100, and based on informationrelated to the error correction code included in control signal 100(e.g., error correction code information, code length (block length),encode rate), performs error correction encoding, and outputs encodeddata 103. Note that error correction encoder 102 may include aninterleaver. In such a case, error correction encoder 102 may rearrangethe encoded data before outputting encoded data 103.

Mapper 104 receives inputs of encoded data 103 and control signal 100,and based on information on the modulated signal included in controlsignal 100, performs mapping in accordance with the modulation scheme,and outputs mapped signal (baseband signal) 105_1 and mapped signal(baseband signal) 105_2. Note that mapper 104 generates mapped signal105_1 using a first sequence and generates mapped signal 105_2 using asecond sequence. Here, the first sequence and second sequence aredifferent.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs signal-processed signals 106_Aand 106_B. Here, signal-processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(t),and signal-processed signal 106_B is expressed as u2(t) (i is a symbolnumber; for example, i is an integer that is greater than or equal to0). Note that details regarding the signal processing will be describedwith reference to FIG. 2 later.

Radio unit 107_A receives inputs of signal-processed signal 106_A andcontrol signal 100, and based on control signal 100, processessignal-processed signal 106_A and outputs transmission signal 108_A.Transmission signal 108_A is then output as radio waves from antennaunit #A (109_A).

Similarly, radio unit 107_B receives inputs of signal-processed signal106_B and control signal 100, and based on control signal 100, processessignal-processed signal 106_B and outputs transmission signal 108_B.Transmission signal 108_B is then output as radio waves from antennaunit #B (109_B).

Antenna unit #A (109_A) receives an input of control signal 100. Here,based on control signal 100, antenna unit #A (108_A) processestransmission signal 108_A and outputs the result as radio waves.However, antenna unit #A (109_A) may not receive an input of controlsignal 100.

Similarly, antenna unit #B (109_B) receives an input of control signal100. Here, based on control signal 100, antenna unit #B (108_B)processes transmission signal 108_B and outputs the result as radiowaves. However, antenna unit #B (109_B) may not receive an input ofcontrol signal 100.

Note that control signal 100 may be generated based on informationtransmitted by a device that is the communication partner in FIG. 1 ,and, alternatively, the device in FIG. 1 may include an input unit, andcontrol signal 100 may be generated based on information input from theinput unit.

FIG. 2 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1 . Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203receives inputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1 ),mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1 ), and control signal200 (control signal 100 in FIG. 1 ), performs weighting synthesis(precoding) based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal204A and weighted signal 204B. Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed ass1(t), mapped signal 201B is expressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A isexpressed as z1(t), and weighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t).Note that one example of t is time (s1(t), s2(t), z1(t), and z2′(t) aredefined as complex numbers (accordingly, they may be real numbers)).

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the following calculation.

[MATH.1] $\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z1(i)} \\{z2^{\prime}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s1(i)} \\{s2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(1)}\end{matrix}$

In Equation (1), a, b, c, and d can be defined as complex numbers.Accordingly, a, b, c, and d are complex numbers (and may be realnumbers). Note that i is a symbol number.

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t),and z2(t) is defined as a complex number (and may be a real number).

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(t) can be expressed asz2(t)=y(i)×z2′(i) (i is a symbol number (i is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0)).

For example, the phase change value is set as shown below (N is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, N is a phase change cycle)(when N is set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3, datareception quality may improve).

[MATH.2] $\begin{matrix}{{y(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{N}}} & {{Equation}(2)}\end{matrix}$(j is an imaginary number unit.)

However, Equation (2) is merely a non-limiting example. Here, phasechange value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(t) and z2(t) can be expressed with the following equation.

[MATH.3] $\begin{matrix}\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z1(i)} \\{z2(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & {y(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s1(i)} \\{s2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j \times {\delta(i)}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s1(i)} \\{s2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}}\end{matrix} & {{Equation}(3)}\end{matrix}$

Note that δ(i) is a real number. z1(t) and z2(t) are transmitted fromthe transmission device at the same time and using the same frequency(same frequency band).

In Equation (3), the phase change value is not limited to the value usedin Equation (2); for example, a method in which the phase is changedcyclically or regularly is conceivable.

The matrix (precoding matrix) in Equation (1) and Equation (3) is asfollows.

[MATH.4] $\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix} = F} & {{Equation}(4)}\end{matrix}$For example, using the following matrix for matrix F is conceivable.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.5} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j0}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\pi}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(5)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.6} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j0} & {a \times e^{j0}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\pi}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(6)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.7} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\pi}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j0}} & {\beta \times e^{j0}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(7)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.8} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j0} & {\alpha \times e^{j\pi}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j0}} & e^{j0}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(8)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.9} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\pi}} \\{\beta \times e^{j0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j0}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(9)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.10} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j0}} & e^{j\pi} \\e^{j0} & {\alpha \times e^{j0}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(10)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.11} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j0}} & {\beta \times e^{j0}} \\{\beta \times e^{j0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\pi}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(11)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.12} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j0}} & e^{j0} \\e^{j0} & {\alpha \times e^{j\pi}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(12)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Equation (5), Equation (6), Equation (7), Equation (8),Equation (9), Equation (10), Equation (11), and Equation (12), α may bea real number and may be an imaginary number, and β may be a real numberand may be an imaginary number. However, α is not 0 (zero). β is alsonot 0 (zero).

or

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.13} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \cos\theta} & {\beta \times \sin\theta} \\{\beta \times \sin\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \cos\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(13)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.14} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\cos\theta} & {\sin\theta} \\{\sin\theta} & {{- \cos}\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(14)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.15} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \cos\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \sin\theta} \\{\beta \times \sin\theta} & {\beta \times \cos\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(15)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.16} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\cos\theta} & {{- \sin}\theta} \\{\sin\theta} & {\cos\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(16)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.17} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \sin\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \cos\theta} \\{\beta \times \cos\theta} & {\beta \times \sin\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(17)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.18} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\sin\theta} & {{- \cos}\theta} \\{\cos\theta} & {\sin\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(18)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.19} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \sin\theta} & {\beta \times \cos\theta} \\{\beta \times \cos\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \sin\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(19)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.20} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\sin\theta} & {\cos\theta} \\{\cos\theta} & {{- s}{in}\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(20)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Equation (13), Equation (15), Equation (17), and Equation(19), β may be a real number and may be an imaginary number. However, βis not 0 (zero) (θ is a real number).

or

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.21} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j{\theta_{11}(i)}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({{\theta_{11}(i)} + \lambda})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{\theta_{21}(i)}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({{\theta_{21}(i)} + \lambda + \pi})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(21)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.22} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j{\theta_{11}(i)}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({{\theta_{11}(i)} + \lambda})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j{\theta_{21}(i)}}} & e^{j({{\theta_{21}(i)} + \lambda + \pi})}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(22)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.23} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{\theta_{21}(i)}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({{\theta_{21}(i)} + \lambda + \pi})}} \\{\beta \times e^{j{\theta_{11}(i)}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({{\theta_{11}(i)} + \lambda})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(23)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.24} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j{\theta_{21}(i)}}} & e^{j({{\theta(i)} + \lambda + \pi})} \\e^{j{\theta_{11}(i)}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({{\theta_{11}(i)} + \lambda})}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(24)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.25} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + {\lambda(i)}})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + {\lambda(i)} + \pi})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(25)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.26} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + {\lambda(i)}})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + {\lambda(i)} + \pi}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(26)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.27} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + {\lambda(i)} + \pi})}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + {\lambda(i)}})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(27)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.28} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + {\lambda(i)} + \pi})} \\e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + {\lambda(i)}})}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(28)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.29} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(29)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.30} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(30)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.31} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(31)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.32} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})} \\e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(32)}\end{matrix}$

However, θ₁₁(i), θ₂₁(i), and λ(i) are functions (real numbers) of i(symbol number). λ is, for example, a fixed value (real number)(however, A need not be a fixed value). α may be a real number, and,alternatively, may be an imaginary number. β may be a real number, and,alternatively, may be an imaginary number. However, α is not 0 (zero). βis also not 0 (zero). Moreover, θ₁₁ and θ₂₁ are real numbers.

Moreover, each exemplary embodiment in the present specification canalso be carried out by using a precoding matrix other than thesematrices.

Or

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.33} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(33)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.34} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}\beta & 0 \\0 & \beta\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(34)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.35} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & {- 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(35)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.36} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}\beta & 0 \\0 & {- \beta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(36)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Equation (34) and Equation (36), β may be a real numberand, alternatively, may be an imaginary number. However, β is not 0(zero).

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal (pa(t)) (t is time) (251A), preamble signal 252,control information symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and basedon information on the frame configuration included in control signal200, outputs baseband signal 208A based on the frame configuration.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal (pb(t)) (251B), preamble signal 252, controlinformation symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based oninformation on the frame configuration included in control signal 200,outputs baseband signal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit).

Although it will be described later, note that the operation performedby phase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delay diversity) (CSD (cycleshift diversity)) disclosed in “Standard conformable antenna diversitytechniques for OFDM and its application to the DVB-T system,” IEEEGlobecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, and in IEEE P802.11n(D3.00) Draft STANDARD for Information Technology-Telecommunications andinformation exchange between systems-Local and metropolitan areanetworks-Specific requirements-Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium AccessControl (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications, 2007. Onecharacteristic of phase changer 209B is that it applies a phase changeto a symbol present along the frequency axis (i.e., applies a phasechange to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a controlinformation symbol).

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1 . Serial-parallel converter 302 receivesinputs of signal 301 and control signal 300 (control signal 100 in FIG.1 ), applies a serial-parallel conversion based on control signal 300,and outputs serial-parallel converted signal 303.

Inverse Fourier transform unit 304 receives inputs of serial-parallelconverted signal 303 and control signal 300, and based on control signal300, applies, as one example of an inverse Fourier transform, an inversefast Fourier transform (IFFT), and outputs inverse Fourier transformedsignal 305.

Processor 306 receives inputs of inverse Fourier transformed signal 305and control signal 300, applies processing such as frequency conversionand amplification based on control signal 300, and outputs modulatedsignal 307.

(For example, when signal 301 is signal-processed signal 106_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 , modulated signal 307 corresponds to transmissionsignal 108_A in FIG. 1 . Moreover, when signal 301 is signal-processedsignal 106_B illustrated in FIG. 1 , modulated signal 307 corresponds totransmission signal 108_B in FIG. 1 .)

FIG. 4 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 4 , frequency (carriers) is (are)represented on the horizontal axis and time is represented on thevertical axis. Since a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM isused, symbols are present in the carrier direction. In FIG. 4 , symbolsfrom carriers 1 to 36 are shown. Moreover, in FIG. 4 , symbols for time$1 through time $11 are shown.

In FIG. 4, 401 is a pilot symbol (pilot signal 251A (pa(t) in FIG. 2 )),402 is a data symbol, and 403 is an other symbol. Here, a pilot symbolis, for example, a PSK (phase shift keying) symbol, and is a symbol forthe reception device that receives this frame to perform channelestimation (propagation path fluctuation estimation), frequency offsetestimation, and phase fluctuation estimation. For example, thetransmission device illustrated in FIG. 1 and the reception device thatreceives the frame illustrated in FIG. 4 may share the transmissionmethod of the pilot symbol.

Note that mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1 ) isreferred to as “stream #1” and mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2in FIG. 1 ) is referred to as “stream #2”. Note that this also appliedto subsequent descriptions.

Data symbol 402 is a symbol that corresponds to baseband signal 208Agenerated in the signal processing illustrated in FIG. 2 . Accordingly,data symbol 402 satisfies “a symbol including both the symbol “stream#1” and the symbol “stream #2””, “the symbol “stream #1””, or “thesymbol “stream #2””, as determined by the configuration of the precodingmatrix used by weighting synthesizer 203.

Other symbols 403 are symbols corresponding to preamble signal 242 andcontrol information symbol signal 253 illustrated in FIG. 2 (however,the other symbols may include symbols other than a preamble or controlinformation symbol). Here, a preamble may transmit data (control data),and may be configured as, for example, a symbol for signal detection, asignal for performing frequency and time synchronization, or a symbolfor performing channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagationpath fluctuation estimation). The control information symbol is a symbolincluding control information for the reception device that received theframe in FIG. 4 to demodulate and decode a data symbol.

For example, carriers 1 to 36 from time $1 to time 4 in FIG. 4 are othersymbols 403. Then, at time $5, carrier 1 through carrier 11 are datasymbols 402. At time $5, carrier 12 is pilot symbol 401, at time $5,carriers 13 to 23 are data symbols 402, at time $5, carrier 24 is pilotsymbol 401 . . . at time $6, carriers 1 and 2 are data symbols 402, attime $6, carrier 3 is pilot symbol 401 . . . at time $11, carrier 30 ispilot symbol 401, at time $11, carriers 31 to 36 are data symbols 402.

FIG. 5 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 5 , frequency (carriers) is (are)represented on the horizontal axis and time is represented on thevertical axis. Since a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM isused, symbols are present in the carrier direction. In FIG. 5 , symbolsfrom carriers 1 to 36 are shown. Moreover, in FIG. 5 , symbols for time$1 through time $11 are shown.

In FIG. 5, 501 is a pilot symbol (pilot signal 251B (pb(t) in FIG. 2 )),502 is a data symbol, and 503 is an other symbol. Here, a pilot symbolis, for example, a PSK symbol, and is a symbol for the reception devicethat receives this frame to perform channel estimation (propagation pathfluctuation estimation), frequency offset estimation, and phasefluctuation estimation. For example, the transmission device illustratedin FIG. 1 and the reception device that receives the frame illustratedin FIG. 5 may share the transmission method of the pilot symbol.

Data symbol 502 is a symbol that corresponds to baseband signal 208Bgenerated in the signal processing illustrated in FIG. 2 . Accordingly,data symbol 502 satisfies “a symbol including both the symbol “stream#1” and the symbol “stream #2””, “the symbol “stream #1””, or “thesymbol “stream #2””, as determined by the configuration of the precodingmatrix used by weighting synthesizer 203.

Other symbols 503 are symbols corresponding to preamble signal 252 andcontrol information symbol signal 253 illustrated in FIG. 2 (however,the other symbols may include symbols other than a preamble or controlinformation symbol). Here, a preamble may transmit data (control data),and is configured as, for example, a symbol for signal detection, asignal for performing frequency and time synchronization, or a symbolfor performing channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagationpath fluctuation estimation). The control information symbol is a symbolincluding control information for the reception device that received theframe in FIG. 5 to demodulate and decode a data symbol.

For example, carriers 1 to 36 from time $1 to time 4 in FIG. 5 are othersymbols 403. Then, at time $5, carrier 1 through carrier 11 are datasymbols 402. At time $5, carrier 12 is pilot symbol 401, at time $5,carriers 13 to 23 are data symbols 402, at time $5, carrier 24 is pilotsymbol 401 . . . at time $6, carriers 1 and 2 are data symbols 402, attime $6, carrier 3 is pilot symbol 401 . . . at time $11, carrier 30 ispilot symbol 401, at time $11, carriers 31 to 36 are data symbols 402.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5 ; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frameconfigurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG. 2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2 .

Control information mapper 602 receives inputs of data 601 related tocontrol information and control signal 600, maps data 601 related tocontrol information in using a modulation scheme based on control signal600, and outputs control information mapped signal 603. Note thatcontrol information mapped signal 603 corresponds to control informationsymbol signal 253 in FIG. 2 .

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A(109_A), antenna #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 (antenna unit #A(109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) are exemplified as including aplurality of antennas).

Splitter 702 receives an input of transmission signal 701, performssplitting, and outputs transmission signals 703_1, 703_2, 703_3, and703_4.

Multiplier 704_1 receives inputs of transmission signal 703_1 andcontrol signal 700, and based on the multiplication coefficient includedin control signal 700, multiplies a multiplication coefficient withtransmission signal 703_1, and outputs multiplied signal 705_1.Multiplied signal 705_1 is output from antenna 706_1 as radio waves.

When transmission signal 703_1 is expressed as Tx1(t) (t is time) andthe multiplication coefficient is expressed as W1 (W1 can be defined asa complex number and thus may be a real number), multiplied signal 705_1can be expressed as Tx1(t)×W1.

Multiplier 704_2 receives inputs of transmission signal 703_2 andcontrol signal 700, and based on the multiplication coefficient includedin control signal 700, multiplies a multiplication coefficient withtransmission signal 703_2, and outputs multiplied signal 705_2.Multiplied signal 705_2 is output from antenna 706_2 as radio waves.

When transmission signal 703_2 is expressed as Tx2(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as W2 (W2 can be defined as acomplex number and thus may be a real number), multiplied signal 705_2can be expressed as Tx2(t)×W2.

Multiplier 704_3 receives inputs of transmission signal 703_3 andcontrol signal 700, and based on the multiplication coefficient includedin control signal 700, multiplies a multiplication coefficient withtransmission signal 703_3, and outputs multiplied signal 705_3.Multiplied signal 705_3 is output from antenna 706_3 as radio waves.

When transmission signal 703_3 is expressed as Tx3(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as W3 (W3 can be defined as acomplex number and thus may be a real number), multiplied signal 705_3can be expressed as Tx3(t)×W3.

Multiplier 704_4 receives inputs of transmission signal 703_4 andcontrol signal 700, and based on the multiplication coefficient includedin control signal 700, multiplies a multiplication coefficient withtransmission signal 703_4, and outputs multiplied signal 705_4.Multiplied signal 705_4 is output from antenna 706_4 as radio waves.

When transmission signal 703_4 is expressed as Tx4(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as W4 (W4 can be defined as acomplex number and thus may be a real number), multiplied signal 705_4can be expressed as Tx4(t)×W4.

Note that “the absolute value of W1, the absolute value of W2, theabsolute value of W3, and the absolute value of W4 are equal” may betrue. Here, this is the equivalent of having performed a phase change(it goes without saying that the absolute value of W1, the absolutevalue of W2, the absolute value of W3, and the absolute value of W4 maybe unequal).

Moreover, in FIG. 7 , the antenna unit is exemplified as including fourantennas (and four multipliers), but the number of antennas is notlimited to four; the antenna unit may include two or more antennas.

When the configuration of antenna unit #A (109_A) in FIG. 1 is asillustrated in FIG. 7 , transmission signal 701 corresponds totransmission signal 108_A in FIG. 1 . When the configuration of antennaunit #B (109_B) in FIG. 1 is as illustrated in FIG. 7 , transmissionsignal 701 corresponds to transmission signal 108_B in FIG. 1 andtransmission signal 108_B in FIG. 1 . However, antenna unit #A (109_A)and antenna unit #B (109_B) need not have the configurations illustratedin FIG. 7 ; as previously described, the antenna units need not receivean input of control signal 100.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 .

Radio unit 803X receives an input of reception signal 802X received byantenna unit #X (801X), applies processing such as frequency conversionand a Fourier transform, and outputs baseband signal 804X.

Similarly, radio unit 803Y receives an input of reception signal 802Yreceived by antenna unit #Y (801Y), applies processing such as frequencyconversion and a Fourier transform, and outputs baseband signal 804Y.

Note that FIG. 8 illustrates a configuration in which antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) receive control signal 810 as aninput, but antenna unit #X (801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) may beconfigured to not receive an input of control signal 810. Operationsperformed when control signal 810 is present as an input will bedescribed in detail later.

FIG. 9 illustrates the relationship between the transmission device andthe reception device. Antennas 901_1 and 901_2 in FIG. 9 aretransmitting antennas, and antenna 901_1 in FIG. 9 corresponds toantenna unit #A (109_A) in FIG. 1 . Antenna 901_2 in FIG. 9 correspondsto antenna unit #B (109_B) in FIG. 1 .

Antennas 902_1 and 902_2 in FIG. 9 are receiving antennas, and antenna902_1 in FIG. 9 corresponds to antenna unit #X (801X) in FIG. 8 .Antenna 902_2 in FIG. 9 corresponds to antenna unit #Y (801Y) in FIG. 8.

As illustrated in FIG. 9 , the signal transmitted from transmittingantenna 901_1 is u1(t), the signal transmitted from transmitting antenna901_2 is u2(t), the signal received by receiving antenna 902_1 is r1(t),and the signal received by receiving antenna 902_2 is r2(t). Note that iis a symbol number, and, for example, is an integer that is greater thanor equal to 0.

The propagation coefficient from transmitting antenna 901_1 to receivingantenna 902_1 is h11(t), the propagation coefficient from transmittingantenna 901_1 to receiving antenna 902_2 is h21(t), the propagationcoefficient from transmitting antenna 901_2 to receiving antenna 902_1is h12(t), and the propagation coefficient from transmitting antenna901_2 to receiving antenna 902_2 is h22(t). In this case, the followingrelation equation holds true.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.37} \right\rbrack &  \\{\begin{pmatrix}{r1(i)} \\{r2(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {{\begin{pmatrix}{h11(i)} & {h12(i)} \\{h21(i)} & {h22(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{u1(i)} \\{u2(i)}\end{pmatrix}} + \begin{pmatrix}{n1(i)} \\{n2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(37)}\end{matrix}$

Note that n1(i) and n2(t) are noise.

Channel estimation unit 805_1 of modulated signal u1 in FIG. 8 receivesan input of baseband signal 804X, and using the preamble and/or pilotsymbol illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 , performs channel estimation onmodulated signal u1, that is to say, estimates h11(t) in Equation (37),and outputs channel estimated signal 806_1.

Channel estimation unit 805_2 of modulated signal u2 receives an inputof baseband signal 804X, and using the preamble and/or pilot symbolillustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 , performs channel estimation onmodulated signal u2, that is to say, estimates h12(t) in Equation (37),and outputs channel estimated signal 806_2.

Channel estimation unit 807_1 of modulated signal u1 receives an inputof baseband signal 804Y, and using the preamble and/or pilot symbolillustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 , performs channel estimation onmodulated signal u1, that is to say, estimates h21(t) in Equation (37),and outputs channel estimated signal 808_1.

Channel estimation unit 807_2 of modulated signal u2 receives an inputof baseband signal 804Y, and using the preamble and/or pilot symbolillustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 , performs channel estimation onmodulated signal u2, that is to say, estimates h22(t) in Equation (37),and outputs channel estimated signal 808_2.

Control information decoder 809 receives inputs of baseband signals 804Xand 804Y, demodulates and decodes control information including “othersymbols” in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , and outputs control signal 810 includingcontrol information.

Signal processor 811 receives inputs of channel estimated signals 806_1,806_2, 808_1, and 808_2, baseband signals 804X and 804Y, and controlsignal 810, performs demodulation and decoding using the relationship inEquation (37) or based on control information (for example, informationon a modulation scheme or a scheme relating to the error correctioncode) in control signal 810, and outputs reception data 812.

Note that control signal 810 need not be generated via the methodillustrated in FIG. 8 . For example, control signal 810 in FIG. 8 may begenerated based on information transmitted by a device that is thecommunication partner (FIG. 1 ) in FIG. 8 , and, alternatively, thedevice in FIG. 8 may include an input unit, and control signal 810 maybe generated based on information input from the input unit.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) illustrated in FIG. 8 (antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) are exemplified as including aplurality of antennas).

Multiplier 1003_1 receives inputs of reception signal 1002_1 received byantenna 1001_1 and control signal 1000, and based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 1000, multipliesreception signal 1002_1 with the multiplication coefficient, and outputsmultiplied signal 1004_1.

When reception signal 1002_1 is expressed as Rx1(t) (t is time) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as D1 (D1 can be defined as acomplex number and thus may be a real number), multiplied signal 1004_1can be expressed as Rx1(t)×D1.

Multiplier 1003_2 receives inputs of reception signal 1002_2 received byantenna 1001_2 and control signal 1000, and based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 1000, multipliesreception signal 1002_2 with the multiplication coefficient, and outputsmultiplied signal 1004_2.

When reception signal 1002_2 is expressed as Rx2(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as D2 (D2 can be defined as acomplex number and thus may be a real number), multiplied signal 1004_2can be expressed as Rx2(t)×D2.

Multiplier 1003_3 receives inputs of reception signal 1002_3 received byantenna 1001_3 and control signal 1000, and based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 1000, multipliesreception signal 1002_3 with the multiplication coefficient, and outputsmultiplied signal 1004_3.

When reception signal 1002_3 is expressed as Rx3(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as D3 (D3 can be defined as acomplex number and thus may be a real number), multiplied signal 1004_3can be expressed as Rx3(t)×D3.

Multiplier 1003_4 receives inputs of reception signal 1002_4 received byantenna 1001_4 and control signal 1000, and based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 1000, multipliesreception signal 1002_4 with the multiplication coefficient, and outputsmultiplied signal 1004_4.

When reception signal 1002_4 is expressed as Rx4(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as D4 (D4 can be defined as acomplex number and thus may be a real number), multiplied signal 1004_4can be expressed as Rx4(t)×D4.

Synthesizer 1005 receives inputs of multiplied signals 1004_1, 1004_2,1004_3, and 1004_4, synthesizes multiplied signals 1004_1, 1004_2,1004_3, and 1004_4, and outputs synthesized signal 1006. Note thatsynthesized signal 1006 is expressed asRx1(t)×D1+Rx2(t)×D2+Rx3(t)×D3+Rx4(t) x D4.

In FIG. 10 , the antenna unit is exemplified as including four antennas(and four multipliers), but the number of antennas is not limited tofour; the antenna unit may include two or more antennas.

When the configuration of antenna unit #X (801X) in FIG. 8 is asillustrated in FIG. 10 , reception signal 802X corresponds tosynthesized signal 1006 in FIG. 10 , and control signal 710 correspondsto control signal 1000 in FIG. 10 . When the configuration of antennaunit #Y (801Y) in FIG. 8 is as illustrated in FIG. 10 , reception signal802Y corresponds to synthesized signal 1006 in FIG. 10 , and controlsignal 710 corresponds to control signal 1000 in FIG. 10 . However,antenna unit #X (801X) and antenna unit #Y 801Y need not have theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 10 ; as stated before, the antennaunit may not receive an input of control signal 710.

Note that control signal 800 may be generated based on informationtransmitted by a device that is the communication partner, and,alternatively, the device may include an input unit, and control signal800 may be generated based on information input from the input unit.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changer 205B and phase changer 209B, asillustrated in FIG. 2 . The characteristics and advantageous effects ofthis configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , phase changer 205Bapplies precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(t) (201A) (iis a symbol number; i is an integer greater than or equal to 0) obtainedvia mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(t) (201B)obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and applies a phasechange to one of the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204A and204B. Weighting synthesized signal 204A and phase-changed signal 206Bare then transmitted at the same frequency and at the same time.Accordingly, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , a phase change is applied to datasymbol 502 in FIG. 5 (in the case of FIG. 2 , since phase changer 205Bapplies this to weighting synthesized signal 204B, a phase change isapplied to data symbol 502 in FIG. 5 ; when a phase change is applied toweighting synthesized signal 204A, a phase change is applied to datasymbol 402 in FIG. 4 ; this will be described later).

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5 . Note that in FIG. 11 , similar to FIG. 5, 501 is a pilot symbol, 502is a data symbol, and 503 is an other symbol.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4 , data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11 ,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6). In other words, in FIG. 4 , the symbolslocated at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time$5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) aredata symbols (in other words, data symbols that perform MIMOtransmission (transmit a plurality of streams) are subject to phasechange by phase changer 205B).

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly (such as at each cycle N)(however, the phase change method implemented on the data symbols is notlimited to this example).

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission (transmit a plurality ofstreams). Next, the advantageous effects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 isquadrature phase shift keying (QPSK) (mapped signal 201A in FIG. 2 is aQPSK signal, and mapped signal 201B is a QPSK signal; in other words,two QPSK streams are transmitted). Accordingly, for example, usingchannel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2, 16 candidate signal pointsare obtained by signal processor 811 illustrated in FIG. 8 (2-bittransmission is possible with QPSK. Accordingly, since there are twostreams, 4-bit transmission is achieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidatesignal points) (note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtainedfrom using channel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but sincedescription thereof is the same as described above, the followingdescription will focus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained byusing channel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2).

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the state resulting from such a case.In (A) and (B) in FIG. 12 , in-phase I is represented on the horizontalaxis and quadrature Q is represented on the vertical axis, and 16candidate signal points are present in the illustrated in-phaseI-quadrature Q planes (among the 16 candidate signal points, one is asignal point that is transmitted by the transmission device;accordingly, this is referred to as “16 candidate signal points”).

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, consider a first case in which phase changer205B is omitted from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 (in otherwords, a case in which phase change is not applied by phase changer 205Bin FIG. 2 ).

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in (A) in FIG. 12 will berealized. When the state falls into the state illustrated in (A) in FIG.12 , as illustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points1203, 1204, 1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signalpoints become dense (the distances between some signal points shorten).Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , datareception quality may deteriorate.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 2 , phase changer 205B isinserted. When phase changer 205B is inserted, due to symbol number i,there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points are dense (thedistances between some signal points shorten), such as in (A) in FIG. 12, and symbol numbers whose “distance between signal points is long”,such as in (B) in FIG. 12 . With respect to this state, since errorcorrection code is introduced, high error correction performance isachieved, and in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , high datareception quality can be achieved.

Note that in FIG. 2 , a phase change is not applied by phase changer205B in FIG. 2 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wavedetection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, andfor channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due to symbolnumber i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points are dense(the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in (A) inFIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signal points islong”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changer 205B in FIG.2 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detection of) datasymbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.” In such acase, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or a preambleunder some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M (N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2).

As described above, phase changer 209B receives inputs of basebandsignal 208B and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210B. Baseband signal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i isan integer that is greater than or equal to 0), and is expressed asx′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209B is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol (accordingly, in such acase, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols, pilotsymbols, control information symbols, and preambles (other symbols)) (inthe case of FIG. 2 , since phase changer 209B applies a phase change tobaseband signal 208B, a phase change is applied to each symbol in FIG. 5; when a phase change is applied to baseband signal 208A in FIG. 2 , aphase change is applied to each symbol in FIG. 4 ; this will bedescribed later.)

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 5 , phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $3, phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, all othersymbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4, phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 attime $5, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phase changeto all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) forall carriers 1 to 36 at time $6, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG.2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7, phase changer209B illustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $8, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9, phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $10,phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $11.

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 13 , objects that operate the same as inFIG. 4 share like reference marks. In FIG. 13 , frequency (carriers) is(are) represented on the horizontal axis and time is represented on thevertical axis. Similar to FIG. 4 , since a multi-carrier transmissionscheme such as OFDM is used, symbols are present in the carrierdirection. In FIG. 13 , similar to FIG. 4 , symbols for carrier 1 to 36are shown. Moreover, similar to FIG. 4 , in FIG. 13 as well, symbols fortime $1 through time $11 are shown.

In FIG. 13 , in addition to pilot symbols 401 (pilot signal 251A(pat(t)) in FIG. 2 ), data symbols 402, and other symbols 403, nullsymbols 1301 are also shown.

Null symbol 1301 has an in-phase component I of zero (0) and aquadrature component Q of zero (0) (note that this symbol is referred toas a “null symbol” here, but this symbol may be referred to as somethingelse).

In FIG. 13 , null symbols are inserted in carrier 19 (note that themethod in which the null symbols are inserted is not limited to theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 13 ; for example, a null symbol may beinserted at some certain time, a null symbol may be inserted at somecertain frequency and time region, a null symbol may be insertedcontinuously at a time and frequency region, and a null symbol may beinserted discretely at a time and frequency region).

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 14 , objects that operate the same as inFIG. 5 share like reference marks. In FIG. 14 , frequency (carriers) is(are) represented on the horizontal axis and time is represented on thevertical axis. Similar to FIG. 5 , since a multi-carrier transmissionscheme such as OFDM is used, symbols are present in the carrierdirection. In FIG. 14 , similar to FIG. 5 , symbols for carrier 1 to 36are shown. Moreover, similar to FIG. 5 , in FIG. 14 as well, symbols fortime $1 through time $11 are shown.

In FIG. 14 , in addition to pilot symbols 501 (pilot signal 251B (pb(t))in FIG. 2 ), data symbols 502, and other symbols 503, null symbols 1301are also shown.

Null symbol 1301 has an in-phase component I of zero (0) and aquadrature component Q of zero (0) (note that this symbol is referred toas a “null symbol” here, but this symbol may be referred to as somethingelse).

In FIG. 14 , null symbols are inserted in carrier 19 (note that themethod in which the null symbols are inserted is not limited to theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 14 ; for example, a null symbol may beinserted at some certain time, a null symbol may be inserted at somecertain frequency and time region, a null symbol may be insertedcontinuously at a time and frequency region, and a null symbol may beinserted discretely at a time and frequency region).

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG. 2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209B is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol). Here, a null symbol may beconsidered as a target for application of a phase change (accordingly,in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols,pilot symbols, control information symbols, preambles (other symbols),and null symbols). However, even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same(in-phase component I is zero (0) and the quadrature component Q is zero(0)). Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not atarget for a phase change (in the case of FIG. 2 , since phase changer209B applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 14 ; when a phase change is applied tobaseband signal 208A in FIG. 2 , a phase change is applied to eachsymbol in FIG. 13 ; this will be described later).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 14 , phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.

Similarly, “phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, However, the handling of the phase changewith respect to null symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phasechanger 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols(in this case, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time$3, However, the handling of the phase change with respect to nullsymbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $5,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $8,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $10,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.” . . . .

The phase change value of phase changer 209B is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208B is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210B is x(i).Accordingly, x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as follows (Q is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number of phasechange cycles).

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.38} \right\rbrack &  \\{{\Omega(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{Q}}} & {{Equation}(38)}\end{matrix}$(j is an imaginary number unit.)

However, Equation (38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 , the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as follows for carrier1 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .[MATH. 39]e ^(j×0×π)  Equation (39)

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as follows for carrier2 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.40} \right\rbrack &  \\e^{j\frac{1 \times \pi}{6}} & {{Equation}(40)}\end{matrix}$

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as follows for carrier3 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.41} \right\rbrack &  \\e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi}{6}} & {{Equation}(41)}\end{matrix}$

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as follows for carrier4 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.42} \right\rbrack &  \\e^{j\frac{3 \times \pi}{6}} & {{Equation}(42)}\end{matrix}$

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 2 .

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 2 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include a control information symbol. Aspreviously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

However, consider the following cases.

Case 2: transmitting a control information symbol using either antennaunit #A (109_A) or antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is performed, spatial diversitygain is less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception qualitydeteriorates even when received by the reception device illustrated inFIG. 8 . Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data receptionquality, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is more beneficial.

Case 3: transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .However, phase change by is not performed by phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 2 .

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same (orexhibit a specific phase shift), depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 , data reception quality deteriorates.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 2 , phase changer 209B isinserted. Since this changes the phase along the time or frequency axis,in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , it is possible to reducethe probability of reception of an inferior reception signal. Moreover,since there is a high probability that there will be a difference in themultipath effect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit#A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipath effect that themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B is subjected to,there is a high probability that diversity gain will result, andaccordingly, that data reception quality in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 2 , phase changer 209B is provided and phasechange is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or“the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include pilot symbols 401, 501, andby using these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14 ” transmit a plurality of streams (perform MIMOtransmission) at the same time and using the same frequency (frequencyband) via data symbols 402 and data symbols 502. In order to demodulatethese data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequencyand time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbolsfor propagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbols forpropagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phase change byphase changer 209B, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed on datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 (on data symbols 402 in the exampleabove), in the reception device, when data symbols 402 and data symbols502 are demodulated and decoded, there is a need to perform thedemodulation and decoding in which the processing for the phase changeby phase changer 209B was performed, and there is a probability thatthis processing will be complicated (this is because “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation (symbols for propagation path variationestimation), which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols503” are applied with a phase change by phase changer 209B).

However, as illustrated in FIG. 2 , in phase changer 209B, when a phasechange is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (to datasymbols 502 in the example above), in the reception device, there is theadvantage that data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 can (easily) bedemodulated and decoded using the channel estimation signal (propagationpath fluctuation signal) estimated by using “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation (symbols for propagation path variationestimation), which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols503”.

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 2 , in phase changer 209B, when aphase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (datasymbols 502 in the example above), in multipath environments, it ispossible to reduce the influence of sharp drops in electric fieldintensity along the frequency axis. Accordingly, it is possible toobtain the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changer 205B” and “symbols that are targetsfor implementation of a phase change by phase changer 209B” aredifferent is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changer 205Billustrated in FIG. 2 , it is possible to achieve the advantageouseffect of an improvement in data reception quality of data symbols 402and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, for example, LOSenvironments, and by applying a phase change using phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 2 , for example, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality in thereception device of the control information symbols included in “theframes of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ”and the advantageous effect that operations of demodulation and decodingof data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changer 205B illustrated in FIG. 2 , andfurthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and data symbols502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 using phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 .

Note that FIG. 2 illustrates an example of a configuration in whichphase changer 209B is arranged after inserter 207B and phase changer209B applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, but a configurationfor achieving both the above-described advantageous effects of the phasechange by phase changer 205B and the phase change by phase changer 209Bis not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 2 . One example of anacceptable variation is one in which phase changer 209B is removed fromthe configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 , baseband signal 208B outputfrom inserter 207B becomes processed signal 106_B, phase changer 209Athat performs the same operations as phase changer 209B is insertedafter inserter 207A, and phase-changed signal 210A, which is generatedby phase changer 209A implementing a phase change on baseband signal208A, becomes processed signal 106_A. Even with such a configuration,similar to the example illustrated in FIG. 2 and described above, theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality in thereception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 in, forexample, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phase changeimplemented by phase changer 205B illustrated in FIG. 2 , andfurthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and data symbols502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 using phase changer 209A.

Furthermore, it is possible to achieve the advantageous effect of animprovement in data reception quality in the reception device of thecontrol information symbols included in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ”.

(Supplemental Information 1)

In, for example, Embodiment 1, it is described that the operationperformed by “phase changer B” may be CDD (CSD) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. Next, supplemental information regarding thispoint will be given.

FIG. 15 illustrates a configuration in the case that CDD (CSD) is used.1501 is a modulated signal when cyclic delay is not implemented, and isexpressed as X[n].

Cyclic delayer 1502_1 receives an input of modulated signal 1501,applies a cyclic delay, and outputs a cyclic-delayed signal 1503_1. Whencyclic-delayed signal 1503_1 is expressed as X1[n], X1[n] is appliedwith the following equation.[MATH. 43]X1[n]=X[(n−δ1)mod N]  Equation (43)

Note that δ1 is the cyclic delay amount (δ1 is a real number), and X[n]is configured as N symbols (N is an integer that is greater than orequal to 2). Accordingly, n is an integer that is greater than or equalto 0 and less than or equal to N−1.

Cyclic delayer 1502_M receives an input of modulated signal 1501,applies a cyclic delay, and outputs a cyclic-delayed signal 1503_M. Whencyclic-delayed signal 1503_M is expressed as XM[n], XM[n] is appliedwith the following equation.[MATH. 44]XM[n]=X[(n−δM)mod N]  Equation (44)

Note that δM is the cyclic delay amount (δM is a real number), and X[n]is configured as N symbols (N is an integer that is greater than orequal to 2). Accordingly, n is an integer that is greater than or equalto 0 and less than or equal to N−1.

Cyclic delayer 1502_i is an integer that is greater than or equal to 1and less than or equal to M (M is an integer that is greater than orequal to 1)) receives an input of modulated signal 1501, applies acyclic delay, and outputs a cyclic-delayed signal 1503_i. Whencyclic-delayed signal 1503_i is expressed as Xi[n], Xi[n] is appliedwith the following equation.[MATH. 45]Xi[n]=X[(n−δi)mod N]  Equation (45)

Note that δi is the cyclic delay amount (δi is a real number), and X[n]is configured as N symbols (N is an integer that is greater than orequal to 2). Accordingly, n is an integer that is greater than or equalto 0 and less than or equal to N−1.

Cyclic-delayed signal 1503_i is then transmitted from antenna i(accordingly, cyclic-delayed signal 1503_1, . . . , and cyclic-delayedsignal 1503_M are each transmitted from different antennas).

This makes it possible to achieve the diversity effect via cyclic delay(in particular, reduce the adverse effects of delayed radio waves), andin the reception device, achieve an advantageous effect of improved datareception quality.

For example, phase changer 209B in FIG. 2 may be replaced with thecyclic delayer illustrated in FIG. 15 , and may perform the sameoperations performed by phase changer 209B.

Accordingly, in phase changer 209B in FIG. 2 , the cyclic delay amount 6(δ is a real number) is applied, and the input signal for phase changer209B is expressed as Y[n]. When the output signal for phase changer 209Bis expressed as Z[n], Z[n] is applied with the following equation.[MATH. 46]Z[n]=Y[(n−δ)mod N]  Equation (46)

Note that Y[n] is configured as N samples (N is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 2). Accordingly, n is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to N−1.

Next, the relationship between cyclic delay amount and phase change willbe described.

For example, consider a case in which CDD (CSD) is applied to OFDM. Notethat the carrier arrangement when OFDM is used is as illustrated in FIG.16 .

In FIG. 16, 1601 is a symbol, frequency (carriers) is (are) representedon the horizontal axis, with increasing frequency from left to right andcarriers arranged in ascending order. Accordingly, the carrier of thelowest frequency is “carrier 1”, and subsequent carriers are “carrier2”, “carrier 3”, “carrier 4”, . . . .

For example, in phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 , a cyclicdelay amount τ is applied. In such as case, phase change value Ω[i] in“carrier i” is expressed as follows.[MATH. 47]Ω[i]=e ^(j×μ×i)  Equation (47)

Note that μ is a value capable of being calculated from cyclic delayamount and/or the size of the fast Fourier transform (FFT).

When the baseband signal for “carrier i”, time t before being appliedwith a phase change (before cyclic delay processing) is expressed asv′[i][t], the signal v[i][t] for “carrier i”, time t after being appliedwith a phase change can be expressed as v[i][t]=Ω[i] x v′[i][t].

(Supplemental Information 2)

As a matter of course, the embodiments may be carried out by combining aplurality of the exemplary embodiments and other contents described inthe present specification.

Moreover, each exemplary embodiment and the other contents are onlyexamples. For example, while a “modulating method, an error correctioncoding method (an error correction code, a code length, a coding rateand the like to be used), control information and the like” areexemplified, it is possible to carry out the present disclosure with thesame configuration even when other types of a “modulating method, anerror correction coding method (an error correction code, a code length,a coding rate and the like to be used), control information and thelike” are applied.

Regarding the modulation scheme, even when a modulation scheme otherthan the modulation schemes described in the present specification isused, it is possible to carry out the embodiments and the other subjectmatter described herein. For example, amplitude phase shift keying(APSK) (such as 16APSK, 64APSK, 128APSK, 256APSK, 1024APSK and4096APSK), pulse amplitude modulation (PAM) (such as 4PAM, 8PAM, 16PAM,64PAM, 128PAM, 256PAM, 1024PAM and 4096PAM), phase shift keying (PSK)(such as BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16PSK, 64PSK, 128PSK, 256PSK, 1024PSK and4096PSK), and quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) (such as 4QAM, 8QAM,16QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM, 1024QAM and 4096QAM) may be applied, or ineach modulation scheme, uniform mapping or non-uniform mapping may beperformed.

Moreover, a method for arranging 2, 4, 8, 16, 64, 128, 256, 1024, etc.,signal points on an I-Q plane (a modulation scheme having 2, 4, 8, 16,64, 128, 256, 1024, etc., signal points) is not limited to a signalpoint arrangement method of the modulation schemes described in thepresent specification. Hence, a function of outputting an in-phasecomponent and a quadrature component based on a plurality of bits is afunction in a mapper, and performing precoding and phase-changethereafter is one effective function of the present disclosure.

In the present specification, when “∀” and/or “∃” is present, “∀”represents a universal quantifier, and “∃” represents an existentialquantifier.

Moreover, in the present specification, when there is a complex plane,the phase unit such as an argument is “radian”.

When the complex plane is used, display in a polar form can be made asdisplay by polar coordinates of a complex number. When point (a, b) onthe complex plane is associated with complex number z=a+jb (a and b areboth real numbers, and j is a unit of an imaginary number), and whenthis point is expressed by [r, θ] in polar coordinates, a=r×cos θ andb=r×sin θ,[MATH. 48]r=√{square root over (a ² +b ²)}  Equation (48)holds true, r is an absolute value of z (r=I z I), and 0 is an argument.Then, z=a+jb is expressed by r×e^(jθ).

In the present specification, the reception device in the terminal andthe antennas may be configured as separate devices. For example, thereception device includes an interface that receives an input, via acable, of a signal received by an antenna or a signal generated byapplying a signal received by an antenna with a frequency conversion,and the reception device performs subsequent processing.

Moreover, data/information obtained by the reception device issubsequently converted into a video or audio, and a display (monitor)displays the video or a speaker outputs the audio. Further, thedata/information obtained by the reception device may be subjected tosignal processing related to a video or a sound (signal processing maynot be performed), and may be output from an RCA terminal (a videoterminal or an audio terminal), a Universal Serial Bus (USB), or aHigh-Definition Multimedia Interface (registered trademark) (HDMI) ofthe reception device.

In the present specification, it can be considered that the apparatuswhich includes the transmission device is a communications and broadcastapparatus, such as a broadcast station, a base station, an access point,a terminal or a mobile phone. In such cases, it can be considered thatthe apparatus that includes the reception device is a communicationapparatus such as a television, a radio, a terminal, a personalcomputer, a mobile phone, an access point, or a base station. Moreover,it can also be considered that the transmission device and receptiondevice according to the present disclosure are each a device havingcommunication functions that is formed so as to be connectable via someinterface to an apparatus for executing an application in, for example,a television, a radio, a personal computer or a mobile phone.

Moreover, in this embodiment, symbols other than data symbols, such aspilot symbols (preamble, unique word, post-amble, reference symbol,etc.) or symbols for control information, may be arranged in any way ina frame. Here, the terms “pilot symbol” and “control information” areused, but the naming of such symbols is not important; the functionsthat they perform are.

A pilot symbol may be a known symbol that is modulated using PSKmodulation in a transceiver (alternatively, a symbol transmitted by atransmitter can be known by a receiver by the receiver being periodic),and the receiver detects, for example, frequency synchronization, timesynchronization, and a channel estimation (channel state information(CSI)) symbol (of each modulated signal) by using the symbol.

Moreover, the symbol for control information is a symbol fortransmitting information required to be transmitted to a communicationpartner in order to establish communication pertaining to anything otherthan data (such as application data) (this information is, for example,the modulation scheme, error correction encoding method, or encode rateof the error correction encoding method used in the communication, orsettings information in an upper layer).

Note that the present disclosure is not limited to each exemplaryembodiment, and can be carried out with various modifications. Forexample, in each embodiment, the present disclosure is described asbeing performed as a communications device. However, the presentdisclosure is not limited to this case, and this communications methodcan also be used as software.

Moreover, in the above description, precoding switching methods in amethod for transmitting two modulated signals from two antennas aredescribed, but these examples are not limiting. A precoding switchingmethod in which precoding weight (matrix) is changed similarly in amethod in which precoding is performed on four mapped signals togenerate four modulated signals and transmitted from four antennas, thatis to say, a method in which precoding is performed on N mapped signalsto generate N modulated signals and transmitted from N antennas, canalso be applied.

The terms “precoding” and “precoding weight” are used in the presentspecification. The terms used to refer to such signal processing are notimportant per-se; the signal processing itself is what is important tothe present disclosure.

Streams s1(t) and s2(t) may transmit different data, and may transmitthe same data.

The transmitting antenna in the transmission device, the receivingantenna in the reception device, and each signal antenna illustrated inthe drawings may be configured of a plurality of antennas.

The transmission device needs to notify the reception device of thetransmission method (MIMO, SISO, temporal-spatial block code,interleaving method), modulation scheme, and/or error correctionencoding method (may be omitted depending on embodiment); thisinformation is present in the frame transmitted by the transmissiondevice; the reception device changes operation upon receipt.

Note that a program for executing the above-described communicationsmethod may be stored in Read Only Memory (ROM) in advance to cause aCentral Processing Unit (CPU) to operate this program.

Moreover, the program for executing the communications method may bestored in a computer-readable storage medium, the program stored in therecording medium may be recorded in RAM (Random Access Memory) in acomputer, and the computer may be caused to operate according to thisprogram.

Each configuration of each of the above-described embodiments, etc., maybe realized as a LSI (large scale integration) circuit, which istypically an integrated circuit. These integrated circuits may be formedas separate chips, or may be formed as one chip so as to include theentire configuration or part of the configuration of each embodiment.LSI is described here, but the integrated circuit may also be referredto as an IC (integrated circuit), a system LSI circuit, a super LSIcircuit or an ultra LSI circuit depending on the degree of integration.Moreover, the circuit integration technique is not limited to LSI, andmay be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general purpose processor.After manufacturing of the LSI circuit, a programmable FieldProgrammable Gate Array (FPGA) or a reconfigurable processor which isreconfigurable in connection or settings of circuit cells inside the LSIcircuit may be used.

Further, when development of a semiconductor technology or anotherderived technology provides a circuit integration technology whichreplaces LSI, as a matter of course, functional blocks may be integratedby using this technology. Adaption of biotechnology, for example, is apossibility.

The present disclosure can be widely applied to radio systems thattransmit different modulated signals from different antennas. Moreover,the present disclosure can also be applied when MIMO transmission isused in a wired communications system including a plurality oftransmission points (for example, a power line communication (PLC)system, an optical transmission system, a digital subscriber line (DSL)system).

Embodiment 2

In this embodiment, an implementation method will be described that isdifferent from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 and described inEmbodiment 1.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. As FIG. 1 is described in detail inEmbodiment 1, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs signal-processed signals 106_Aand 106_B. Here, signal-processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(t),and signal-processed signal 106_B is expressed as u2(t) (i is a symbolnumber; for example, i is an integer that is greater than or equal to0). Note that details regarding the signal processing will be describedwith reference to FIG. 18 later.

FIG. 18 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1 . Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203receives inputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1 ),mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1 ), and control signal200 (control signal 100 in FIG. 1 ), performs weighting synthesis(precoding) based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal204A and weighted signal 204B. Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed ass1(t), mapped signal 201B is expressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A isexpressed as z1(t), and weighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t).Note that one example of t is time (s1(t), s2(t), z1(t), and z2′(t) aredefined as complex numbers (accordingly, they may be real numbers)).Here, these are given as functions of time, but may be functions of a“frequency (carrier number)”, and may be functions of “time andfrequency”. These may also be a function of a “symbol number”. Note thatthis also applies to Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the calculations indicatedin Equation (1).

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t),and z2(t) is defined as a complex number (and may be a real number).

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(t) can be expressed asz2(t)=y(i)×z2′(i) (i is a symbol number (i is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0)).

For example, the phase change value is set as shown in Equation (2) (Nis an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, N is a phase changecycle) (when N is set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3, datareception quality may improve). However, Equation (2) is merely anon-limiting example. Here, phase change value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(i) and z2(t) can be expressed with Equation (3). Note that δ(i)is a real number. z1(i) and z2(t) are transmitted from the transmissiondevice at the same time and using the same frequency (same frequencyband). In Equation (3), the phase change value is not limited to thevalue used in Equation (2); for example, a method in which the phase ischanged cyclically or regularly is conceivable.

As described in Embodiment 1, conceivable examples of the (precoding)matrix inserted in Equation (1) and Equation (3) are illustrated inEquation (5) through Equation (36) (however, the precoding matrix is notlimited to these examples (the same applies to Embodiment 1)).

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal (pa(t)) (t is time) (251A), preamble signal 252,control information symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and basedon information on the frame configuration included in control signal200, outputs baseband signal 208A based on the frame configuration.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal (pb(t)) (251B), preamble signal 252, controlinformation symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based oninformation on the frame configuration included in control signal 200,outputs baseband signal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit).

As described in Embodiment 1, etc., note that the operation performed byphase changer 209A may be CDD (cyclic delay diversity) (CSD (cycle shiftdiversity)) disclosed in “Standard conformable antenna diversitytechniques for OFDM and its application to the DVB-T system,” IEEEGlobecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, and in IEEE P802.11n(D3.00) Draft STANDARD for Information Technology-Telecommunications andinformation exchange between systems-Local and metropolitan areanetworks-Specific requirements-Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium AccessControl (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications, 2007. Onecharacteristic of phase changer 209A is that it applies a phase changeto a symbol present along the frequency axis (i.e., applies a phasechange to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a controlinformation symbol).

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 3 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 4 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 5 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5 ; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frameconfigurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG. 2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2 . FIG. 6 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A(109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 (in thisexample, antenna unit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) include aplurality of antennas). FIG. 7 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 . FIG. 8is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) illustrated in FIG. 8 (antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) are exemplified as including aplurality of antennas). FIG. 10 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changer 205B and phase changer 209A, asillustrated in FIG. 18 . The characteristics and advantageous effects ofthis configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , phase changer 205Bapplies precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(t) (201A) (iis a symbol number; i is an integer greater than or equal to 0) obtainedvia mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(t) (201B)obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and applies a phasechange to one of the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204A and204B. Weighting synthesized signal 204A and phase-changed signal 206Bare then transmitted at the same frequency and at the same time.Accordingly, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , a phase change is applied to datasymbol 502 in FIG. 5 (in the case of FIG. 18 , since phase changer 205applies this to weighting synthesized signal 204B, a phase change isapplied to data symbol 502 in FIG. 5 ; when a phase change is applied toweighting synthesized signal 204A, a phase change is applied to datasymbol 402 in FIG. 4 ; this will be described later).

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5 . Note that in FIG. 11 , similar to FIG. 5, 501 is a pilot symbol, 502is a data symbol, and 503 is an other symbol.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4 , data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11 ,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6). In other words, in FIG. 4 , the symbolslocated at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time$5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) aredata symbols (in other words, data symbols that perform MIMOtransmission (transmit a plurality of streams) are subject to phasechange by phase changer 205B).

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly (such as at each cycle N)(however, the phase change method implemented on the data symbols is notlimited to this example).

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission (transmit a plurality ofstreams). Next, the advantageous effects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 isquadrature phase shift keying (QPSK) (mapped signal 201A in FIG. 18 is aQPSK signal, and mapped signal 201B is a QPSK signal; in other words,two QPSK streams are transmitted). Accordingly, for example, usingchannel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2, 16 candidate signal pointsare obtained by signal processor 811 illustrated in FIG. 8 (2-bittransmission is possible with QPSK. Accordingly, since there are twostreams, 4-bit transmission is achieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidatesignal points) (note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtainedfrom using channel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but sincedescription thereof is the same as described above, the followingdescription will focus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained byusing channel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2).

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the state resulting from such a case.In (A) and (B) in FIG. 12 , in-phase I is represented on the horizontalaxis and quadrature Q is represented on the vertical axis, and 16candidate signal points are present in the illustrated in-phaseI-quadrature Q planes (among the 16 candidate signal points, one is asignal point that is transmitted by the transmission device;accordingly, this is referred to as “16 candidate signal points”).

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, consider a first case in which phase changer205B is omitted from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 18 (in otherwords, a case in which phase change is not applied by phase changer 205Bin FIG. 18 ).

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in (A) in FIG. 12 will berealized. When the state falls into the state illustrated in (A) in FIG.12 , as illustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points1203, 1204, 1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signalpoints become dense (the distances between some signal points shorten).Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , datareception quality may deteriorate.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 18 , phase changer 205B isinserted. When phase changer 205B is inserted, due to symbol number i,there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points are dense (thedistances between some signal points shorten), such as in (A) in FIG. 12, and symbol numbers whose “distance between signal points is long”,such as in (B) in FIG. 12 . With respect to this state, since errorcorrection code is introduced, high error correction performance isachieved, and in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , high datareception quality can be achieved.

Note that in FIG. 18 , a phase change is not applied by phase changer205B in FIG. 18 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wavedetection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, andfor channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due to symbolnumber i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points are dense(the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in (A) inFIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signal points islong”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changer 205B in FIG.18 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detection of)data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.” In such acase, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or a preambleunder some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M (N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2).

As described above, phase changer 209A receives inputs of basebandsignal 208A and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210A. Baseband signal 208A is a function of symbol number i (i isan integer that is greater than or equal to 0), and is expressed asx′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209A is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol (accordingly, in such acase, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols, pilotsymbols, control information symbols, and preambles (other symbols)) (inthe case of FIG. 18 , since phase changer 209A applies a phase change tobaseband signal 208A, a phase change is applied to each symbol in FIG. 4).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 4 , phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $3, phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, allother symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4, phase changer209A illustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $5, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6, phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $8, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9, phase changer209A illustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $10, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18 applies aphase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11 . . . .

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 13 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 14 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.18 ”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209A is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol). Here, a null symbol may beconsidered as a target for application of a phase change (accordingly,in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols,pilot symbols, control information symbols, preambles (other symbols),and null symbols). However, even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same(in-phase component I is zero (0) and the quadrature component Q is zero(0)). Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not atarget for a phase change (in the case of FIG. 18 , since phase changer209A applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 13 ).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 13 , phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.

Similarly, “phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, However, the handling of the phase changewith respect to null symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phasechanger 209A illustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36at time $3, However, the handling of the phase change with respect tonull symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $5,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $8,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $10,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.” . . . .

The phase change value of phase changer 209A is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208A is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210A is x(i).Accordingly, x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set to Equation (38) (Q is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles) (j is an imaginary number unit). However, Equation(38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 , the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

. . .

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 18 .

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 18 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include a control information symbol. Aspreviously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

However, consider the following cases.

Case 2: transmitting a control information symbol using either antennaunit #A (109_A) or antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is performed, spatial diversitygain is less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception qualitydeteriorates even when received by the reception device illustrated inFIG. 8 . Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data receptionquality, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is more beneficial.

Case 3: transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .However, phase change by is not performed by phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 18 .

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same (orexhibit a specific phase shift), depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 , data reception quality deteriorates.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 18 , phase changer 209A isinserted. Since this changes the phase along the time or frequency axis,in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , it is possible to reducethe probability of reception of an inferior reception signal. Moreover,since there is a high probability that there will be a difference in themultipath effect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit#A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipath effect that themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B is subjected to,there is a high probability that diversity gain will result, andaccordingly, that data reception quality in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 18 , phase changer 209A is provided and phasechange is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or“the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include pilot symbols 401, 501, andby using these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14 ” transmit a plurality of streams (perform MIMOtransmission) at the same time and using the same frequency (frequencyband) via data symbols 402 and data symbols 502. In order to demodulatethese data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequencyand time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbolsfor propagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbols forpropagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phase change byphase changer 209A, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed on datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 (on data symbols 402 in the exampleabove), in the reception device, when data symbols 402 and data symbols502 are demodulated and decoded, there is a need to perform thedemodulation and decoding in which the processing for the phase changeby phase changer 209A was performed, and there is a probability thatthis processing will be complicated (this is because “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation (symbols for propagation path variationestimation), which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols503” are applied with a phase change by phase changer 209A).

However, as illustrated in FIG. 18 , in phase changer 209A, when a phasechange is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (to datasymbols 402 in the example above), in the reception device, there is theadvantage that data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 can (easily) bedemodulated and decoded using the channel estimation signal (propagationpath fluctuation signal) estimated by using “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation (symbols for propagation path variationestimation), which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols503”.

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 18 , in phase changer 209A, when aphase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (datasymbols 402 in the example above), in multipath environments, it ispossible to reduce the influence of sharp drops in electric fieldintensity along the frequency axis. Accordingly, it is possible toobtain the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changer 205B” and “symbols that are targetsfor implementation of a phase change by phase changer 209A” aredifferent is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changer 205Billustrated in FIG. 18 , it is possible to achieve the advantageouseffect of an improvement in data reception quality of data symbols 402and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, for example, LOSenvironments, and by applying a phase change using phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 18 , for example, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality in thereception device of the control information symbols included in “theframes of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ”and the advantageous effect that operations of demodulation and decodingof data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changer 205B illustrated in FIG. 18 , andfurthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and data symbols502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 using phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18 .

Note that Q in Equation (38) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of Q.This feature is applicable to Embodiment 1 as well.

Embodiment 3

In this embodiment, an implementation method will be described that isdifferent from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 and described inEmbodiment 1.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. As FIG. 1 is described in detail inEmbodiment 1, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs signal-processed signals 106_Aand 106_B. Here, signal-processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(t),and signal-processed signal 106_B is expressed as u2(t) (i is a symbolnumber; for example, i is an integer that is greater than or equal to0). Note that details regarding the signal processing will be describedwith reference to FIG. 19 later.

FIG. 19 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1 . Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203receives inputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1 ),mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1 ), and control signal200 (control signal 100 in FIG. 1 ), performs weighting synthesis(precoding) based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal204A and weighted signal 204B. Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed ass1(t), mapped signal 201B is expressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A isexpressed as z1(t), and weighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t).Note that one example of t is time (s1(t), s2(t), z1(t), and z2′(t) aredefined as complex numbers (accordingly, they may be real numbers)).Here, these are given as functions of time, but may be functions of a“frequency (carrier number)”, and may be functions of “time andfrequency”. These may also be a function of a “symbol number”. Note thatthis also applies to Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the calculations indicatedin Equation (1).

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t),and z2(t) is defined as a complex number (and may be a real number).

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(t) can be expressed asz2(t)=y(i)×z2′(i) (i is a symbol number (i is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0)).

For example, the phase change value is set as shown in Equation (2) (Nis an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, N is a phase changecycle) (when N is set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3, datareception quality may improve). However, Equation (2) is merely anon-limiting example. Here, phase change value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(i) and z2(t) can be expressed with Equation (3). Note that δ(i)is a real number. z1(i) and z2(t) are transmitted from the transmissiondevice at the same time and using the same frequency (same frequencyband). In Equation (3), the phase change value is not limited to thevalue used in Equation (2); for example, a method in which the phase ischanged cyclically or regularly is conceivable.

As described in Embodiment 1, conceivable examples of the (precoding)matrix inserted in Equation (1) and Equation (3) are illustrated inEquation (5) through Equation (36) (however, the precoding matrix is notlimited to these examples (the same applies to Embodiment 1)).

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal (pa(t)) (t is time) (251A), preamble signal 252,control information symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and basedon information on the frame configuration included in control signal200, outputs baseband signal 208A based on the frame configuration.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal (pb(t)) (251B), preamble signal 252, controlinformation symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based oninformation on the frame configuration included in control signal 200,outputs baseband signal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit).

As described in Embodiment 1, etc., note that the operation performed byphase changer 209A may be CDD (cyclic delay diversity) (CSD (cycle shiftdiversity)) disclosed in “Standard conformable antenna diversitytechniques for OFDM and its application to the DVB-T system,” IEEEGlobecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, and in IEEE P802.11n(D3.00) Draft STANDARD for Information Technology-Telecommunications andinformation exchange between systems-Local and metropolitan areanetworks-Specific requirements-Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium AccessControl (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications, 2007. Onecharacteristic of phase changer 209A is that it applies a phase changeto a symbol present along the frequency axis (i.e., applies a phasechange to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a controlinformation symbol).

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as y′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210B (y(i)) can be expressed as y(i)=ej×τ(i)×y′(i)(j is an imaginary number unit).

As described in Embodiment 1, etc., note that the operation performed byphase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delay diversity) (CSD (cycle shiftdiversity)) disclosed in “Standard conformable antenna diversitytechniques for OFDM and its application to the DVB-T system,” IEEEGlobecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, and in IEEE P802.11n(D3.00) Draft STANDARD for Information Technology-Telecommunications andinformation exchange between systems-Local and metropolitan areanetworks-Specific requirements-Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium AccessControl (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications, 2007. Onecharacteristic of phase changer 209B is that it applies a phase changeto a symbol present along the frequency axis (i.e., applies a phasechange to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a controlinformation symbol).

The characteristic feature here is that the phase changing method viaε(i) and the phase changing method via τ(i) are different.Alternatively, the characteristic feature here is that the CDD (CyclicDelay Diversity) (CSD (Cyclic Shift Diversity)) cyclic delay amountvalue set by phase changer 209A and the CDD (Cyclic Delay Diversity)(CSD (Cyclic Shift Diversity)) cyclic delay amount value set by phasechanger 209B are different.

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 3 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 4 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 5 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5 ; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frameconfigurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG. 2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2 . FIG. 6 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A(109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 (in thisexample, antenna unit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) include aplurality of antennas). FIG. 7 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 . FIG. 8is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) illustrated in FIG. 8 (antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) are exemplified as including aplurality of antennas). FIG. 10 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changer 205B and phase changers 209A, 209B,as illustrated in FIG. 19 . The characteristics and advantageous effectsof this configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , phase changer 205Bapplies precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(t) (201A) (iis a symbol number; i is an integer greater than or equal to 0) obtainedvia mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(t) (201B)obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and applies a phasechange to one of the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204A and204B. Weighting synthesized signal 204A and phase-changed signal 206Bare then transmitted at the same frequency and at the same time.Accordingly, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , a phase change is applied to datasymbol 502 in FIG. 5 (in the case of FIG. 19 , since phase changer 205applies this to weighting synthesized signal 204B, a phase change isapplied to data symbol 502 in FIG. 5 ; when a phase change is applied toweighting synthesized signal 204A, a phase change is applied to datasymbol 402 in FIG. 4 ; this will be described later).

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5 . Note that in FIG. 11 , similar to FIG. 5, 501 is a pilot symbol, 502is a data symbol, and 503 is an other symbol.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4 , data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11 ,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6). In other words, in FIG. 4 , the symbolslocated at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time$5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) aredata symbols (in other words, data symbols that perform MIMOtransmission (transmit a plurality of streams) are subject to phasechange by phase changer 205B).

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly (such as at each cycle N)(however, the phase change method implemented on the data symbols is notlimited to this example).

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission (transmit a plurality ofstreams). Next, the advantageous effects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 isquadrature phase shift keying (QPSK) (mapped signal 201A in FIG. 19 is aQPSK signal, and mapped signal 201B is a QPSK signal; in other words,two QPSK streams are transmitted). Accordingly, for example, usingchannel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2, 16 candidate signal pointsare obtained by signal processor 811 illustrated in FIG. 8 (2-bittransmission is possible with QPSK. Accordingly, since there are twostreams, 4-bit transmission is achieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidatesignal points) (note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtainedfrom using channel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but sincedescription thereof is the same as described above, the followingdescription will focus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained byusing channel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2).

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the state resulting from such a case.In (A) and (B) in FIG. 12 , in-phase I is represented on the horizontalaxis and quadrature Q is represented on the vertical axis, and 16candidate signal points are present in the illustrated in-phaseI-quadrature Q planes (among the 16 candidate signal points, one is asignal point that is transmitted by the transmission device;accordingly, this is referred to as “16 candidate signal points”).

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, consider a first case in which phase changer205B is omitted from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 19 (in otherwords, a case in which phase change is not applied by phase changer 205Bin FIG. 19 ).

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in (A) in FIG. 12 will berealized. When the state falls into the state illustrated in (A) in FIG.12 , as illustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points1203, 1204, 1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signalpoints become dense (the distances between some signal points shorten).Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , datareception quality may deteriorate.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 19 , phase changer 205B isinserted. When phase changer 205B is inserted, due to symbol number i,there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points are dense (thedistances between some signal points shorten), such as in (A) in FIG. 12, and symbol numbers whose “distance between signal points is long”,such as in (B) in FIG. 12 . With respect to this state, since errorcorrection code is introduced, high error correction performance isachieved, and in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , high datareception quality can be achieved.

Note that in FIG. 19 , a phase change is not applied by phase changer205B in FIG. 19 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wavedetection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, andfor channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due to symbolnumber i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points are dense(the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in (A) inFIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signal points islong”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changer 205B in FIG.19 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detection of)data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.” In such acase, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or a preambleunder some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M (N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2).

As described above, phase changer 209A receives inputs of basebandsignal 208A and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210A. Baseband signal 208A is a function of symbol number i (i isan integer that is greater than or equal to 0), and is expressed asx′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209A is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol (accordingly, in such acase, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols, pilotsymbols, control information symbols, and preambles (other symbols)) (inthe case of FIG. 19 , since phase changer 209A applies a phase change tobaseband signal 208A, a phase change is applied to each symbol in FIG. 4).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 4 , phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 19applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $3, phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, allother symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4, phase changer209A illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $5, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6, phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $8, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 19applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9, phase changer209A illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $10, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 19 applies aphase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11 . . . .

As described above, phase changer 209B receives inputs of basebandsignal 208B and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210B. Baseband signal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i isan integer that is greater than or equal to 0), and is expressed asy′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210B (y(i)) can be expressed asy(i)=ej×τ(i)×y′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11:

Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209B is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol (accordingly, in such acase, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols, pilotsymbols, control information symbols, and preambles (other symbols)) (inthe case of FIG. 19 , since phase changer 209B applies a phase change tobaseband signal 208B, a phase change is applied to each symbol in FIG. 5).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 5 , phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 19applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $3, phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, allother symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4, phase changer209B illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $5, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6, phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $8, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 19applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9, phase changer209B illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $10, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 19 applies aphase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11 . . . .

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 13 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 14 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.19 ”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209A is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol). Here, a null symbol may beconsidered as a target for application of a phase change (accordingly,in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols,pilot symbols, control information symbols, preambles (other symbols),and null symbols). However, even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same(in-phase component I is zero (0) and the quadrature component Q is zero(0)). Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not atarget for a phase change (in the case of FIG. 19 , since phase changer209A applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 13 ).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 13 , phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.

Similarly, “phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, However, the handling of the phase changewith respect to null symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phasechanger 209A illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36at time $3, However, the handling of the phase change with respect tonull symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $5,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $8,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $10,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.” . . . .

The phase change value of phase changer 209A is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208A is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210A is x(i).Accordingly, x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set to Equation (38) (Q is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles) (j is an imaginary number unit). However, Equation(38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 , the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

. . .

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 19 .

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as y′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210B (y(i)) can be expressed asy(i)=e^(j×τ(i))×y′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209B is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol). Here, a null symbol may beconsidered as a target for application of a phase change (accordingly,in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols,pilot symbols, control information symbols, preambles (other symbols),and null symbols). However, even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same(in-phase component I is zero (0) and the quadrature component Q is zero(0)). Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not atarget for a phase change (in the case of FIG. 19 , since phase changer209B applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 14 ).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 14 , phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.

Similarly, “phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, However, the handling of the phase changewith respect to null symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phasechanger 209B illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36at time $3, However, the handling of the phase change with respect tonull symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $5,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $8,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $10,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.” . . . .

The phase change value of phase changer 209B is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208B is y′(i) and phase-changed signal 210B is y(i).Accordingly, y(i)=Δ(i)×y′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as in the following equation(R is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents thenumber of phase change cycles. Note that the values for Q and R inEquation (38) may be different values).

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.49} \right\rbrack &  \\{{\Delta(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{R}}} & {{Equation}(49)}\end{matrix}$(j is an imaginary number unit.)

However, Equation (49) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Δ(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle R.

Note that the phase changing methods used by phase changer 209A andphase changer 209B may be different. For example, the cycle may be thesame and, alternatively, may be different.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 , the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

. . .

Although the phase change value is described as Equation (39), (40),(41), and (42), the phase changing methods of phase changer 209A andphase changer 209B are different.

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 19 .

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changers 209A, 209Billustrated in FIG. 19 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include a control information symbol. Aspreviously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

However, consider the following cases.

Case 2: transmitting a control information symbol using either antennaunit #A (109_A) or antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is performed, spatial diversitygain is less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception qualitydeteriorates even when received by the reception device illustrated inFIG. 8 . Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data receptionquality, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is more beneficial.

Case 3: transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .However, phase change by is not performed by phase changers 209A and209B illustrated in FIG. 19 .

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same (orexhibit a specific phase shift), depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 , data reception quality deteriorates.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 19 , phase changers 209A and209B are inserted. Since this changes the phase along the time orfrequency axis, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , it ispossible to reduce the probability of reception of an inferior receptionsignal. Moreover, since there is a high probability that there will be adifference in the multipath effect that the modulated signal transmittedfrom antenna unit #A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipatheffect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_Bis subjected to, there is a high probability that diversity gain willresult, and accordingly, that data reception quality in the receptiondevice illustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 19 , phase changers 209A, 209B are providedand phase change is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or“the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include pilot symbols 401, 501, andby using these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14 ” transmit a plurality of streams (perform MIMOtransmission) at the same time and using the same frequency (frequencyband) via data symbols 402 and data symbols 502. In order to demodulatethese data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequencyand time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbolsfor propagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbols forpropagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phase change byphase changers 209A, 209B, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed on datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502, in the reception device, when datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 are demodulated and decoded, there is aneed to perform the demodulation and decoding in which the processingfor the phase change by phase changers 209A and 209B was performed, andthere is a probability that this processing will be complicated (this isbecause “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbols forpropagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phase change byphase changers 209A and 209B).

However, as illustrated in FIG. 19 , in phase changers 209A, 209B, whena phase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502, inthe reception device, there is the advantage that data symbols 402 anddata symbols 502 can (easily) be demodulated and decoded using thechannel estimation signal (propagation path fluctuation signal)estimated by using “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequencyand time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbol forestimating propagation path fluctuation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503”.

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 19 , in phase changers 209A, 209B,when a phase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502,in multipath environments, it is possible to reduce the influence ofsharp drops in electric field intensity along the frequency axis.Accordingly, it is possible to obtain the advantageous effect of animprovement in data reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changer 205B” and “symbols that are targetsfor implementation of a phase change by phase changers 209A, 209B” aredifferent is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changer 205Billustrated in FIG. 19 , it is possible to achieve the advantageouseffect of an improvement in data reception quality of data symbols 402and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, for example, LOSenvironments, and by applying a phase change using phase changers 209A,209B illustrated in FIG. 19 , for example, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality in thereception device of the control information symbols included in “theframes of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ”and the advantageous effect that operations of demodulation and decodingof data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changer 205B illustrated in FIG. 19 , andfurthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and data symbols502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 using phase changers 209A, 209B illustrated in FIG. 19 .

Note that Q in Equation (38) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of Q.This feature is applicable to Embodiment 1 as well.

Note that R in Equation (49) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of R.

Moreover, taking into consideration the descriptions provided inSupplemental Information 1, the cyclic delay amount set in phase changer209A and the cyclic delay amount set in phase changer 209B may bedifferent values.

Embodiment 4

In this embodiment, an implementation method will be described that isdifferent from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 and described inEmbodiment 1.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. As FIG. 1 is described in detail inEmbodiment 1, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs signal-processed signals 106_Aand 106_B. Here, signal-processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(t),and signal-processed signal 106_B is expressed as u2(t) (i is a symbolnumber; for example, i is an integer that is greater than or equal to0). Note that details regarding the signal processing will be describedwith reference to FIG. 20 later.

FIG. 20 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1 . Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203receives inputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1 ),mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1 ), and control signal200 (control signal 100 in FIG. 1 ), performs weighting synthesis(precoding) based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal204A and weighted signal 204B. Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed ass1(t), mapped signal 201B is expressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A isexpressed as z1′(t), and weighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t).Note that one example of t is time (s1(t), s2(t), z1′(t), and z2′(t) aredefined as complex numbers (accordingly, they may be real numbers)).

Here, these are given as functions of time, but may be functions of a“frequency (carrier number)”, and may be functions of “time andfrequency”. These may also be a function of a “symbol number”. Note thatthis also applies to Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the following calculation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.50} \right\rbrack &  \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z1^{\prime}(i)} \\{z2^{\prime}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s1(i)} \\{s2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(50)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Aand control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206A. Note that phase-changed signal 206A is expressed as z1(t),and z1(t) is defined as a complex number (and may be a real number).

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205A will bedescribed. In phase changer 205A, for example, a phase change of w(i) isapplied to z1′(i). Accordingly, z1(t) can be expressed asz1(t)=w(i)×z1′(i) (i is a symbol number (i is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0)).

For example, the phase change value is set as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.51} \right\rbrack &  \\{{w(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{M}}} & {{Equation}(51)}\end{matrix}$(M is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, M is a phase changecycle) (when M is set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3, datareception quality may improve).

However, Equation (51) is merely a non-limiting example. Here, phasechange value is expressed as w(i)=e^(j×λ(i)).

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t),and z2(t) is defined as a complex number (and may be a real number).

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(t) can be expressed asz2(t)=y(i)×z2′(i) (i is a symbol number (i is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0)).

For example, the phase change value is set as shown in Equation (2) (Nis an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, N is a phase changecycle, N M) (when N is set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3,data reception quality may improve). However, Equation (2) is merely anon-limiting example. Here, phase change value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(i) and z2(t) can be expressed with the following equation.

$\begin{matrix}{\left\lbrack {{MATH}.52} \right\rbrack} &  \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z1(i)} \\{z2(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {{\begin{pmatrix}{w(i)} & 0 \\0 & {y(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s1(i)} \\{s2(i)}\end{pmatrix}} = {\begin{pmatrix}e^{j \times {\lambda(i)}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j \times {\lambda(i)}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s1(i)} \\{s2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}}} & {{Equation}52}\end{matrix}$

Note that δ(i) and λ(i) are real numbers. z1(i) and z2(t) aretransmitted from the transmission device at the same time and using thesame frequency (same frequency band). In Equation (52), the phase changevalue is not limited to the value used in Equations (2) and (52); forexample, a method in which the phase is changed cyclically or regularlyis conceivable.

As described in Embodiment 1, conceivable examples of the (precoding)matrix inserted in Equation (50) and Equation (52) are illustrated inEquation (5) through Equation (36) (however, the precoding matrix is notlimited to these examples (the same applies to Embodiment 1)).

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal (pa(t)) (t is time) (251A), preamble signal 252,control information symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and basedon information on the frame configuration included in control signal200, outputs baseband signal 208A based on the frame configuration.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal (pb(t)) (251B), preamble signal 252, controlinformation symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based oninformation on the frame configuration included in control signal 200,outputs baseband signal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit).

As described in Embodiment 1, etc., note that the operation performed byphase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delay diversity) (CSD (cycle shiftdiversity)) disclosed in “Standard conformable antenna diversitytechniques for OFDM and its application to the DVB-T system,” IEEEGlobecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, and in IEEE P802.11n(D3.00) Draft STANDARD for Information Technology-Telecommunications andinformation exchange between systems-Local and metropolitan areanetworks-Specific requirements-Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium AccessControl (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications, 2007. Onecharacteristic of phase changer 209B is that it applies a phase changeto a symbol present along the frequency axis (i.e., applies a phasechange to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a controlinformation symbol).

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 3 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 4 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 5 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5 ; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frameconfigurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG. 2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2 . FIG. 6 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A(109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 (in thisexample, antenna unit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) include aplurality of antennas). FIG. 7 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 . FIG. 8is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) illustrated in FIG. 8 (antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) are exemplified as including aplurality of antennas). FIG. 10 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changers 205A, 205B and phase changer 209A,as illustrated in FIG. 20 . The characteristics and advantageous effectsof this configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , phase changers 205A,205B apply precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(t) (201A)(i is a symbol number; i is an integer greater than or equal to 0)obtained via mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(t)(201B) obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and applies aphase change to one of the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204Aand 204B. Phase-changed signal 206A and phase-changed signal 206B arethen transmitted at the same frequency and at the same time.Accordingly, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , a phase change is applied to datasymbol 402 in FIG. 4 and data symbol 502 in FIG. 5 .

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.4 . Note that in FIG. 11 , similar to FIG. 4, 401 is a pilot symbol, 402is a data symbol, and 403 is an other symbol.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , phasechanger 205A applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×λ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×λ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×λ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×λ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×λ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×λ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×λ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×λ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×λ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205A.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205A. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4 , data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11 ,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6). In other words, in FIG. 4 , the symbolslocated at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time$5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) aredata symbols (in other words, data symbols that perform MIMOtransmission (transmit a plurality of streams) are subject to phasechange by phase changer 205A).

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205A applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (50) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly (such as at each cycle N)(however, the phase change method implemented on the data symbols is notlimited to this example).

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5 . Note that in FIG. 11 , similar to FIG. 5, 501 is a pilot symbol, 502is a data symbol, and 503 is an other symbol.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4 , data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11 ,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6). In other words, in FIG. 4 , the symbolslocated at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time$5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) aredata symbols (in other words, data symbols that perform MIMOtransmission (transmit a plurality of streams) are subject to phasechange by phase changer 205B).

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly (such as at each cycle N)(however, the phase change method implemented on the data symbols is notlimited to this example).

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission (transmit a plurality ofstreams). Next, the advantageous effects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 isquadrature phase shift keying (QPSK) (mapped signal 201A in FIG. 18 is aQPSK signal, and mapped signal 201B is a QPSK signal; in other words,two QPSK streams are transmitted). Accordingly, for example, usingchannel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2, 16 candidate signal pointsare obtained by signal processor 811 illustrated in FIG. 8 (2-bittransmission is possible with QPSK. Accordingly, since there are twostreams, 4-bit transmission is achieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidatesignal points) (note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtainedfrom using channel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but sincedescription thereof is the same as described above, the followingdescription will focus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained byusing channel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2).

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the state resulting from such a case.In (A) and (B) in FIG. 12 , in-phase I is represented on the horizontalaxis and quadrature Q is represented on the vertical axis, and 16candidate signal points are present in the illustrated in-phaseI-quadrature Q planes (among the 16 candidate signal points, one is asignal point that is transmitted by the transmission device;accordingly, this is referred to as “16 candidate signal points”).

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, consider a first case in which phase changers205A and 205B are omitted from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 20(in other words, a case in which phase change is not applied by phasechangers 205A and 205B in FIG. 20 ).

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in (A) in FIG. 12 will berealized. When the state falls into the state illustrated in (A) in FIG.12 , as illustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points1203, 1204, 1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signalpoints become dense (the distances between some signal points shorten).Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , datareception quality may deteriorate.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 20 , phase changers 205A,205B are inserted. When phase changers 205A, 205B are inserted, due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 . With respect to this state,since error correction code is introduced, high error correctionperformance is achieved, and in the reception device illustrated in FIG.8 , high data reception quality can be achieved.

Note that in FIG. 20 , a phase change is not applied by phase changers205A, 205B in FIG. 20 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating(wave detection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble,and for channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changers 205A, 205Bin FIG. 20 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detectionof) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.” In such acase, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or a preambleunder some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M (N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2).

As described above, phase changer 209B receives inputs of basebandsignal 208B and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210B. Baseband signal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i isan integer that is greater than or equal to 0), and is expressed asx′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209B is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol (accordingly, in such acase, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols, pilotsymbols, control information symbols, and preambles (other symbols)) (inthe case of FIG. 20 , since phase changer 209B applies a phase change tobaseband signal 208B, a phase change is applied to each symbol in FIG. 5).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 5 , phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $3, phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, allother symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4, phase changer209B illustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $5, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6, phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $8, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9, phase changer209B illustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $10, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20 applies aphase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11 . . . .

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 13 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 14 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.20 ”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209B is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol). Here, a null symbol may beconsidered as a target for application of a phase change (accordingly,in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols,pilot symbols, control information symbols, preambles (other symbols),and null symbols). However, even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same(in-phase component I is zero (0) and the quadrature component Q is zero(0)). Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not atarget for a phase change (in the case of FIG. 20 , since phase changer209B applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 14 ).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 14 , phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.

Similarly, “phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, However, the handling of the phase changewith respect to null symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phasechanger 209B illustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36at time $3, However, the handling of the phase change with respect tonull symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $5,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $8,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $10,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.” . . . .

. . .

The phase change value of phase changer 209B is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208B is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210B is x(i).Accordingly, x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set to Equation (38) (Q is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles) (j is an imaginary number unit). However, Equation(38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 , the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

. . .

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 20 .

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 20 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include a control information symbol. Aspreviously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

However, consider the following cases.

Case 2: transmitting a control information symbol using either antennaunit #A (109_A) or antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is performed, spatial diversitygain is less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception qualitydeteriorates even when received by the reception device illustrated inFIG. 8 . Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data receptionquality, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is more beneficial.

Case 3: transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .However, phase change by is not performed by phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 20 .

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same (orexhibit a specific phase shift), depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 , data reception quality deteriorates.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 20 , phase changer 209B isinserted. Since this changes the phase along the time or frequency axis,in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , it is possible to reducethe probability of reception of an inferior reception signal. Moreover,since there is a high probability that there will be a difference in themultipath effect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit#A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipath effect that themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B is subjected to,there is a high probability that diversity gain will result, andaccordingly, that data reception quality in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 20 , phase changer 209B is provided and phasechange is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or“the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include pilot symbols 401, 501, andby using these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14 ” transmit a plurality of streams (perform MIMOtransmission) at the same time and using the same frequency (frequencyband) via data symbols 402 and data symbols 502. In order to demodulatethese data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequencyand time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbolsfor propagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbols forpropagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phase change byphase changer 209B, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed on datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 (on data symbols 402 in the exampleabove), in the reception device, when data symbols 402 and data symbols502 are demodulated and decoded, there is a need to perform thedemodulation and decoding in which the processing for the phase changeby phase changer 209B was performed, and there is a probability thatthis processing will be complicated (this is because “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation (symbols for propagation path variationestimation), which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols503” are applied with a phase change by phase changer 209B).

However, as illustrated in FIG. 20 , in phase changer 209B, when a phasechange is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (to datasymbols 502 in the example above), in the reception device, there is theadvantage that data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 can (easily) bedemodulated and decoded using the channel estimation signal (propagationpath fluctuation signal) estimated by using “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation (symbols for propagation path variationestimation), which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols503”.

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 20 , in phase changer 209B, when aphase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (todata symbols 502 in the example above), in multipath environments, it ispossible to reduce the influence of sharp drops in electric fieldintensity along the frequency axis. Accordingly, it is possible toobtain the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changers 205A, 205B” and “symbols that aretargets for implementation of a phase change by phase changer 209B” aredifferent is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changers205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 20 , it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality of datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, forexample, LOS environments, and by applying a phase change using phasechanger 209B illustrated in FIG. 20 , for example, it is possible toachieve the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of the control information symbolsincluded in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14 ” and the advantageous effect that operations ofdemodulation and decoding of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changers 205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 20 ,and furthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402and data symbols 502 using phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20 .

Note that Q in Equation (38) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of Q.This feature is applicable to Embodiment 1 as well.

Embodiment 5

In this embodiment, an implementation method will be described that isdifferent from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 and described inEmbodiment 1.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. As FIG. 1 is described in detail inEmbodiment 1, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs signal-processed signals 106_Aand 106_B. Here, signal-processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(t),and signal-processed signal 106_B is expressed as u2(t) (i is a symbolnumber; for example, i is an integer that is greater than or equal to0). Note that details regarding the signal processing will be describedwith reference to FIG. 21 later.

FIG. 21 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1 . Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203receives inputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1 ),mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1 ), and control signal200 (control signal 100 in FIG. 1 ), performs weighting synthesis(precoding) based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal204A and weighted signal 204B. Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed ass1(t), mapped signal 201B is expressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A isexpressed as z1′(t), and weighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t).Note that one example of t is time (s1(t), s2(t), z1′(t), and z2′(t) aredefined as complex numbers (accordingly, they may be real numbers)).

Here, these are given as functions of time, but may be functions of a“frequency (carrier number)”, and may be functions of “time andfrequency”. These may also be a function of a “symbol number”. Note thatthis also applies to Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the calculations indicatedin Equation (49).

Phase changer 205A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Aand control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206A. Note that phase-changed signal 206A is expressed as z1(t),and z1(t) is defined as a complex number (and may be a real number).

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205A will bedescribed. In phase changer 205A, for example, a phase change of w(i) isapplied to z1′(i). Accordingly, z1(t) can be expressed asz1(i)=w(i)×z1′(i) (i is a symbol number (i is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0)).

For example, the phase change value is set as indicated in Equation(50).

(M is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, M is a phase changecycle) (when M is set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3, datareception quality may improve). However, Equation (50) is merely anon-limiting example. Here, phase change value is expressed asw(i)=e^(j×λ(i)).

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t),and z2(t) is defined as a complex number (and may be a real number).

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(t) can be expressed asz2(t)=y(i)×z2′(i) (i is a symbol number (i is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0)).

For example, the phase change value is set as shown in Equation (2) (Nis an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, N is a phase changecycle, N M) (when N is set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3,data reception quality may improve). However, Equation (2) is merely anon-limiting example. Here, phase change value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(i) and z2(t) can be expressed with Equation (51).

Note that δ(i) and λ(i) are real numbers. z1(i) and z2(t) aretransmitted from the transmission device at the same time and using thesame frequency (same frequency band). In Equation (51), the phase changevalue is not limited to the value used in Equations (2) and (51); forexample, a method in which the phase is changed cyclically or regularlyis conceivable.

As described in Embodiment 1, conceivable examples of the (precoding)matrix inserted in Equation (49) and Equation (51) are illustrated inEquation (5) through Equation (36) (however, the precoding matrix is notlimited to these examples (the same applies to Embodiment 1)).

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal (pa(t)) (t is time) (251A), preamble signal 252,control information symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and basedon information on the frame configuration included in control signal200, outputs baseband signal 208A based on the frame configuration.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal (pb(t)) (251B), preamble signal 252, controlinformation symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based oninformation on the frame configuration included in control signal 200,outputs baseband signal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit).

As described in Embodiment 1, etc., note that the operation performed byphase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delay diversity) (CSD (cycle shiftdiversity)) disclosed in “Standard conformable antenna diversitytechniques for OFDM and its application to the DVB-T system,” IEEEGlobecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, and in IEEE P802.11n(D3.00) Draft STANDARD for Information Technology-Telecommunications andinformation exchange between systems-Local and metropolitan areanetworks-Specific requirements-Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium AccessControl (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications, 2007. Onecharacteristic of phase changer 209B is that it applies a phase changeto a symbol present along the frequency axis (i.e., applies a phasechange to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a controlinformation symbol).

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 3 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 4 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 5 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5 ; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frameconfigurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG. 2”.

Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2 . FIG. 6 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A(109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 (in thisexample, antenna unit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) include aplurality of antennas). FIG. 7 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 . FIG. 8is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) illustrated in FIG. 8 (antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) are exemplified as including aplurality of antennas). FIG. 10 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changers 205A, 205B and phase changer 209B,as illustrated in FIG. 21 . The characteristics and advantageous effectsof this configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , phase changers 205A,205B apply precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(t) (201A)(i is a symbol number; i is an integer greater than or equal to 0)obtained via mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(t)(201B) obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and applies aphase change to one of the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204Aand 204B. Phase-changed signal 206A and phase-changed signal 206B arethen transmitted at the same frequency and at the same time.Accordingly, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , a phase change is applied to datasymbol 402 in FIG. 4 and data symbol 502 in FIG. 5 .

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.4 . Note that in FIG. 11 , similar to FIG. 4, 401 is a pilot symbol, 402is a data symbol, and 403 is an other symbol.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , phasechanger 205A applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×λ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×λ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×λ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×λ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×λ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×λ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×λ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×λ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×λ56(i)” for (carrier) 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205A.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205A. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4 , data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11 ,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6). In other words, in FIG. 4 , the symbolslocated at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time$5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) aredata symbols (in other words, data symbols that perform MIMOtransmission (transmit a plurality of streams) are subject to phasechange by phase changer 205A).

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205A applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (50) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly (such as at each cycle N)(however, the phase change method implemented on the data symbols is notlimited to this example).

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5 . Note that in FIG. 11 , similar to FIG. 5, 501 is a pilot symbol, 502is a data symbol, and 503 is an other symbol.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4 , data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11 ,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6). In other words, in FIG. 4 , the symbolslocated at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time$5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) aredata symbols (in other words, data symbols that perform MIMOtransmission (transmit a plurality of streams) are subject to phasechange by phase changer 205B).

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly (such as at each cycle N)(however, the phase change method implemented on the data symbols is notlimited to this example).

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission (transmit a plurality ofstreams). Next, the advantageous effects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 isquadrature phase shift keying (QPSK) (mapped signal 201A in FIG. 18 is aQPSK signal, and mapped signal 201B is a QPSK signal; in other words,two QPSK streams are transmitted). Accordingly, for example, usingchannel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2, 16 candidate signal pointsare obtained by signal processor 811 illustrated in FIG. 8 (2-bittransmission is possible with QPSK. Accordingly, since there are twostreams, 4-bit transmission is achieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidatesignal points) (note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtainedfrom using channel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but sincedescription thereof is the same as described above, the followingdescription will focus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained byusing channel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2).

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the state resulting from such a case.In (A) and (B) in FIG. 12 , in-phase I is represented on the horizontalaxis and quadrature Q is represented on the vertical axis, and 16candidate signal points are present in the illustrated in-phaseI-quadrature Q planes (among the 16 candidate signal points, one is asignal point that is transmitted by the transmission device;accordingly, this is referred to as “16 candidate signal points”).

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, consider a first case in which phase changers205A and 205B are omitted from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 21(in other words, a case in which phase change is not applied by phasechangers 205A and 205B in FIG. 21 ).

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in (A) in FIG. 12 will berealized. When the state falls into the state illustrated in (A) in FIG.12 , as illustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points1203, 1204, 1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signalpoints become dense (the distances between some signal points shorten).Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , datareception quality may deteriorate.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 21 , phase changers 205A,205B are inserted. When phase changers 205A, 205B are inserted, due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 . With respect to this state,since error correction code is introduced, high error correctionperformance is achieved, and in the reception device illustrated in FIG.8 , high data reception quality can be achieved.

Note that in FIG. 21 , a phase change is not applied by phase changers205A, 205B in FIG. 21 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating(wave detection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble,and for channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changers 205A, 205Bin FIG. 21 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detectionof) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.” In such acase, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or a preambleunder some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M (N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2).

As described above, phase changer 209A receives inputs of basebandsignal 208A and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210A. Baseband signal 208A is a function of symbol number i (i isan integer that is greater than or equal to 0), and is expressed asx′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209A is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol (accordingly, in such acase, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols, pilotsymbols, control information symbols, and preambles (other symbols)) (inthe case of FIG. 21 , since phase changer 209A applies a phase change tobaseband signal 208A, a phase change is applied to each symbol in FIG. 4).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 4 , phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $3, phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, allother symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4, phase changer209A illustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $5, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6, phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $8, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9, phase changer209A illustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $10, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21 applies aphase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11 . . . .

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 13 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 14 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.21 ”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209A is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol). Here, a null symbol may beconsidered as a target for application of a phase change (accordingly,in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols,pilot symbols, control information symbols, preambles (other symbols),and null symbols). However, even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same(in-phase component I is zero (0) and the quadrature component Q is zero(0)). Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not atarget for a phase change (in the case of FIG. 21 , since phase changer209A applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 13 ).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 13 , phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.

Similarly, “phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, However, the handling of the phase changewith respect to null symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phasechanger 209A illustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36at time $3, However, the handling of the phase change with respect tonull symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $5,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $8,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $10,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.” . . . .

The phase change value of phase changer 209A is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208A is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210A is x(i).Accordingly, x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set to Equation (38) (Q is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles) (j is an imaginary number unit). However, Equation(38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 , the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

. . .

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 21 .

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 21 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include a control information symbol. Aspreviously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

However, consider the following cases.

Case 2: transmitting a control information symbol using either antennaunit #A (109_A) or antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is performed, spatial diversitygain is less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception qualitydeteriorates even when received by the reception device illustrated inFIG. 8 . Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data receptionquality, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is more beneficial.

Case 3: transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .However, phase change by is not performed by phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 21 .

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same (orexhibit a specific phase shift), depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 , data reception quality deteriorates.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 21 , phase changer 209A isinserted. Since this changes the phase along the time or frequency axis,in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , it is possible to reducethe probability of reception of an inferior reception signal. Moreover,since there is a high probability that there will be a difference in themultipath effect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit#A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipath effect that themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B is subjected to,there is a high probability that diversity gain will result, andaccordingly, that data reception quality in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 21 , phase changer 209A is provided and phasechange is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or“the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include pilot symbols 401, 501, andby using these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14 ” transmit a plurality of streams (perform MIMOtransmission) at the same time and using the same frequency (frequencyband) via data symbols 402 and data symbols 502. In order to demodulatethese data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequencyand time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbolsfor propagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbols forpropagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phase change byphase changer 209A, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed on datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 (on data symbols 402 in the exampleabove), in the reception device, when data symbols 402 and data symbols502 are demodulated and decoded, there is a need to perform thedemodulation and decoding in which the processing for the phase changeby phase changer 209A was performed, and there is a probability thatthis processing will be complicated (this is because “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation (symbols for propagation path variationestimation), which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols503” are applied with a phase change by phase changer 209A).

However, as illustrated in FIG. 21 , in phase changer 209A, when a phasechange is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (to datasymbols 402 in the example above), in the reception device, there is theadvantage that data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 can (easily) bedemodulated and decoded using the channel estimation signal (propagationpath fluctuation signal) estimated by using “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation (symbols for propagation path variationestimation), which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols503”.

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 21 , in phase changer 209A, when aphase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (datasymbols 402 in the example above), in multipath environments, it ispossible to reduce the influence of sharp drops in electric fieldintensity along the frequency axis. Accordingly, it is possible toobtain the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changers 205A, 205B” and “symbols that aretargets for implementation of a phase change by phase changer 209A” aredifferent is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changers205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 21 , it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality of datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, forexample, LOS environments, and by applying a phase change using phasechanger 209A illustrated in FIG. 21 , for example, it is possible toachieve the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of the control information symbolsincluded in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14 ” and the advantageous effect that operations ofdemodulation and decoding of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changers 205A and 205B illustrated in FIG.21 , and furthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402and data symbols 502 using phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21 .

Note that Q in Equation (38) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of Q.This feature is applicable to Embodiment 1 as well.

Embodiment 6

In this embodiment, an implementation method will be described that isdifferent from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 and described inEmbodiment 1.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. As FIG. 1 is described in detail inEmbodiment 1, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs signal-processed signals 106_Aand 106_B. Here, signal-processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(t),and signal-processed signal 106_B is expressed as u2(t) (i is a symbolnumber; for example, i is an integer that is greater than or equal to0). Note that details regarding the signal processing will be describedwith reference to FIG. 22 later.

FIG. 22 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1 . Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203receives inputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1 ),mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1 ), and control signal200 (control signal 100 in FIG. 1 ), performs weighting synthesis(precoding) based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal204A and weighted signal 204B. Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed ass1(t), mapped signal 201B is expressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A isexpressed as z1′(t), and weighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t).Note that one example of t is time (s1(t), s2(t), z1′(t), and z2′(t) aredefined as complex numbers (accordingly, they may be real numbers)).

Here, these are given as functions of time, but may be functions of a“frequency (carrier number)”, and may be functions of “time andfrequency”. These may also be a function of a “symbol number”. Note thatthis also applies to Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the calculations indicatedin Equation (49).

Phase changer 205A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Aand control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206A. Note that phase-changed signal 206A is expressed as z1(t),and z1(t) is defined as a complex number (and may be a real number).

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205A will bedescribed. In phase changer 205A, for example, a phase change of w(i) isapplied to z1′(i). Accordingly, z1(t) can be expressed asz1(t)=w(i)×z1′(i) (i is a symbol number (i is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0)).

For example, the phase change value is set as indicated in Equation(50).

(M is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, M is a phase changecycle) (when M is set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3, datareception quality may improve). However, Equation (50) is merely anon-limiting example. Here, phase change value is expressed asw(i)=e^(j×λ(i)).

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t),and z2(t) is defined as a complex number (and may be a real number).

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(t) can be expressed asz2(t)=y(i)×z2′(i) (i is a symbol number (i is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0)).

For example, the phase change value is set as shown in Equation (2) (Nis an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, N is a phase changecycle, N M) (when N is set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3,data reception quality may improve). However, Equation (2) is merely anon-limiting example. Here, phase change value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(t) and z2(t) can be expressed with Equation (51).

Note that δ(i) and λ(i) are real numbers. z1(t) and z2(t) aretransmitted from the transmission device at the same time and using thesame frequency (same frequency band). In Equation (51), the phase changevalue is not limited to the value used in Equations (2) and (51); forexample, a method in which the phase is changed cyclically or regularlyis conceivable.

As described in Embodiment 1, conceivable examples of the (precoding)matrix inserted in Equation (49) and Equation (51) are illustrated inEquation (5) through Equation (36) (however, the precoding matrix is notlimited to these examples (the same applies to Embodiment 1)).

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal (pa(t)) (t is time) (251A), preamble signal 252,control information symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and basedon information on the frame configuration included in control signal200, outputs baseband signal 208A based on the frame configuration.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal (pb(t)) (251B), preamble signal 252, controlinformation symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based oninformation on the frame configuration included in control signal 200,outputs baseband signal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit).

As described in Embodiment 1, etc., note that the operation performed byphase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delay diversity) (CSD (cycle shiftdiversity)) disclosed in “Standard conformable antenna diversitytechniques for OFDM and its application to the DVB-T system,” IEEEGlobecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, and in IEEE P802.11n(D3.00) Draft STANDARD for Information Technology-Telecommunications andinformation exchange between systems-Local and metropolitan areanetworks-Specific requirements-Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium AccessControl (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications, 2007. Onecharacteristic of phase changer 209B is that it applies a phase changeto a symbol present along the frequency axis (i.e., applies a phasechange to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a controlinformation symbol).

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 3 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 4 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 5 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5 ; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frameconfigurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG. 2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2 . FIG. 6 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A(109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 (in thisexample, antenna unit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) include aplurality of antennas). FIG. 7 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 . FIG. 8is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) illustrated in FIG. 8 (antenna unit #X(801X) and antenna unit #Y (801Y) are exemplified as including aplurality of antennas). FIG. 10 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changers 205A, 205B and phase changer 209B,as illustrated in FIG. 22 . The characteristics and advantageous effectsof this configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , phase changers 205A,205B apply precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(t) (201A)(i is a symbol number; i is an integer greater than or equal to 0)obtained via mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(t)(201B) obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and applies aphase change to one of the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204Aand 204B. Phase-changed signal 206A and phase-changed signal 206B arethen transmitted at the same frequency and at the same time.Accordingly, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , a phase change is applied to datasymbol 402 in FIG. 4 and data symbol 502 in FIG. 5 .

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.4 . Note that in FIG. 11 , similar to FIG. 4, 401 is a pilot symbol, 402is a data symbol, and 403 is an other symbol.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , phasechanger 205A applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×λ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×λ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×λ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×λ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×λ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×λ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×λ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×λ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×λ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205A.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205A. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4 , data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11 ,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6). In other words, in FIG. 4 , the symbolslocated at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time$5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) aredata symbols (in other words, data symbols that perform MIMOtransmission (transmit a plurality of streams) are subject to phasechange by phase changer 205A).

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205A applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (50) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly (such as at each cycle N)(however, the phase change method implemented on the data symbols is notlimited to this example).

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5 . Note that in FIG. 11 , similar to FIG. 5, 501 is a pilot symbol, 502is a data symbol, and 503 is an other symbol.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))” for(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11 , the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4 , data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11 ,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6). In other words, in FIG. 4 , the symbolslocated at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time$5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) aredata symbols (in other words, data symbols that perform MIMOtransmission (transmit a plurality of streams) are subject to phasechange by phase changer 205B).

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly (such as at each cycle N)(however, the phase change method implemented on the data symbols is notlimited to this example).

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission (transmit a plurality ofstreams). Next, the advantageous effects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 isquadrature phase shift keying (QPSK) (mapped signal 201A in FIG. 18 is aQPSK signal, and mapped signal 201B is a QPSK signal; in other words,two QPSK streams are transmitted). Accordingly, for example, usingchannel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2, 16 candidate signal pointsare obtained by signal processor 811 illustrated in FIG. 8 (2-bittransmission is possible with QPSK. Accordingly, since there are twostreams, 4-bit transmission is achieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidatesignal points) (note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtainedfrom using channel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but sincedescription thereof is the same as described above, the followingdescription will focus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained byusing channel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2).

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the state resulting from such a case.In (A) and (B) in FIG. 12 , in-phase I is represented on the horizontalaxis and quadrature Q is represented on the vertical axis, and 16candidate signal points are present in the illustrated in-phaseI-quadrature Q planes (among the 16 candidate signal points, one is asignal point that is transmitted by the transmission device;accordingly, this is referred to as “16 candidate signal points”).

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, consider a first case in which phase changers205A and 205B are omitted from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 22(in other words, a case in which phase change is not applied by phasechangers 205A, 205B in FIG. 22 ).

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in (A) in FIG. 12 will berealized. When the state falls into the state illustrated in (A) in FIG.12 , as illustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points1203, 1204, 1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signalpoints become dense (the distances between some signal points shorten).Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , datareception quality may deteriorate.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 22 , phase changers 205A,205B are inserted. When phase changers 205A, 205B are inserted, due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 . With respect to this state,since error correction code is introduced, high error correctionperformance is achieved, and in the reception device illustrated in FIG.8 , high data reception quality can be achieved.

Note that in FIG. 22 , a phase change is not applied by phase changers205A, 205B in FIG. 22 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating(wave detection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble,and for channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changers 205A, 205Bin FIG. 22 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detectionof) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense (the distances between some signal points shorten), such as in(A) in FIG. 12 , and symbol numbers whose “distance between signalpoints is long”, such as in (B) in FIG. 12 ” can be realized.” In such acase, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or a preambleunder some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M (N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2).

As described above, phase changer 209A receives inputs of basebandsignal 208A and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210A. Baseband signal 208A is a function of symbol number i (i isan integer that is greater than or equal to 0), and is expressed asx′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209A is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol (accordingly, in such acase, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols, pilotsymbols, control information symbols, and preambles (other symbols)) (inthe case of FIG. 22 , since phase changer 209A applies a phase change tobaseband signal 208A, a phase change is applied to each symbol in FIG. 4).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 4 , phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 22applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $3, phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, allother symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4, phase changer209A illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $5, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6, phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $8, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 22applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9, phase changer209A illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $10, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 22 applies aphase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11 . . . .

As described above, phase changer 209B receives inputs of basebandsignal 208B and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210B. Baseband signal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i isan integer that is greater than or equal to 0), and is expressed asy′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210B (y(i)) can be expressed as y(i)=xy′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that the operation performedby phase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delay diversity) (CSD (cycleshift diversity)) disclosed in “Standard conformable antenna diversitytechniques for OFDM and its application to the DVB-T system,” IEEEGlobecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, and in IEEE P802.11n(D3.00) Draft STANDARD for Information Technology-Telecommunications andinformation exchange between systems-Local and metropolitan areanetworks-Specific requirements-Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium AccessControl (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications, 2007. Onecharacteristic of phase changer 209B is that it applies a phase changeto a symbol present along the frequency axis (i.e., applies a phasechange to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a controlinformation symbol (accordingly, in such a case, symbols subject tosymbol number i include data symbols, pilot symbols, control informationsymbols, and preambles (other symbols)) (in the case of FIG. 22 , sincephase changer 209B applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, aphase change is applied to each symbol in FIG. 5 ).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 5 , phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 22applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $3, phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, allother symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4, phase changer209B illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $5, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6, phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $8, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 22applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9, phase changer209B illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (inthis case, pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to36 at time $10, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 22 applies aphase change to all symbols (in this case, pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11 . . . .

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 13 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1 . FIG. 14 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14 , the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.22 ”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209A is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol). Here, a null symbol may beconsidered as a target for application of a phase change (accordingly,in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols,pilot symbols, control information symbols, preambles (other symbols),and null symbols). However, even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same(in-phase component I is zero (0) and the quadrature component Q is zero(0)). Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not atarget for a phase change (in the case of FIG. 22 , since phase changer209A applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 13 ).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 13 , phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.

Similarly, “phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, However, the handling of the phase changewith respect to null symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phasechanger 209A illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36at time $3, However, the handling of the phase change with respect tonull symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 403) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $5,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $8,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $10,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.” . . . .

The phase change value of phase changer 209A is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208A is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210A is x(i).

For example, the phase change value is set to Equation (38) (Q is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles) (j is an imaginary number unit). However, Equation(38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 , the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13 .

. . .

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 22 .

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as y′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asy(i)=e^(j×η(i))×y′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD (cyclic delaydiversity) (CSD (cycle shift diversity)) disclosed in “Standardconformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM and its application tothe DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp. 3100-3105, November 2001, andin IEEE P802.11n (D3.00) Draft STANDARD for InformationTechnology-Telecommunications and information exchange betweensystems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)specifications, 2007. One characteristic of phase changer 209B is thatit applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequency axis(i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol). Here, a null symbol may beconsidered as a target for application of a phase change (accordingly,in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols,pilot symbols, control information symbols, preambles (other symbols),and null symbols). However, even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same(in-phase component I is zero (0) and the quadrature component Q is zero(0)). Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not atarget for a phase change (in the case of FIG. 22 , since phase changer209B applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 14 ).

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 14 , phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $1.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.

Similarly, “phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phasechange to all symbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for allcarriers 1 to 36 at time $2, However, the handling of the phase changewith respect to null symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phasechanger 209B illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to allsymbols (in this case, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36at time $3, However, the handling of the phase change with respect tonull symbol 1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in thiscase, all other symbols 503) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $4,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $5,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $6,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $7,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $8,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $9,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $10,However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.”, “phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (in this case, pilotsymbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers 1 to 36 at time $11.However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described.” . . . .

The phase change value of phase changer 209B is expressed as Δ(i).Baseband signal 208B is y′(i) and phase-changed signal 210B is y(i).Accordingly, y(i)=Δ(i)×y′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as shown in Equation (49) (Ris an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents thenumber of phase change cycles. Note that the values for Q and R inEquation (38) may be different values).

For example, Δ(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle R.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 , the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14 .

. . .

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 20 .

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changers 209A, 209Billustrated in FIG. 22 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include a control information symbol. Aspreviously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

However, consider the following cases.

Case 2: transmitting a control information symbol using either antennaunit #A (109_A) or antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is performed, spatial diversitygain is less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception qualitydeteriorates even when received by the reception device illustrated inFIG. 8 . Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data receptionquality, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B)” is more beneficial.

Case 3: transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A (109_A) and antenna unit #B (109_B) illustrated in FIG. 1 .However, phase change by is not performed by phase changers 209A and209B illustrated in FIG. 22 .

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same (orexhibit a specific phase shift), depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 , data reception quality deteriorates.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 22 , phase changers 209A and209B are inserted. Since this changes the phase along the time orfrequency axis, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 , it ispossible to reduce the probability of reception of an inferior receptionsignal. Moreover, since there is a high probability that there will be adifference in the multipath effect that the modulated signal transmittedfrom antenna unit #A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipatheffect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_Bis subjected to, there is a high probability that diversity gain willresult, and accordingly, that data reception quality in the receptiondevice illustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 22 , phase changers 209A, 209B are providedand phase change is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or“the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ” include pilot symbols 401, 501, andby using these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14 ” transmit a plurality of streams (perform MIMOtransmission) at the same time and using the same frequency (frequencyband) via data symbols 402 and data symbols 502. In order to demodulatethese data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequencyand time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbolsfor propagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbols forpropagation path variation estimation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phase change byphase changers 209A, 209B, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed on datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 (on data symbols 402 in the exampleabove), in the reception device, when data symbols 402 and data symbols502 are demodulated and decoded, there is a need to perform thedemodulation and decoding in which the processing for the phase changeby phase changer 209A was performed, and there is a probability thatthis processing will be complicated (this is because “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation (symbols for propagation path variationestimation), which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols503” are applied with a phase change by phase changers 209A and 209B).

However, as illustrated in FIG. 22 , in phase changers 209A, 209B, whena phase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502, inthe reception device, there is the advantage that data symbols 402 anddata symbols 502 can (easily) be demodulated and decoded using thechannel estimation signal (propagation path fluctuation signal)estimated by using “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequencyand time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation (symbol forestimating propagation path fluctuation), which are included in othersymbols 403 and other symbols 503”.

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 22 , in phase changers 209A, 209B,when a phase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502,in multipath environments, it is possible to reduce the influence ofsharp drops in electric field intensity along the frequency axis.Accordingly, it is possible to obtain the advantageous effect of animprovement in data reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changers 205A, 205B” and “symbols that aretargets for implementation of a phase change by phase changers 209A,209B” are different is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changer 205Billustrated in FIG. 22 , it is possible to achieve the advantageouseffect of an improvement in data reception quality of data symbols 402and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, for example, LOSenvironments, and by applying a phase change using phase changers 209A,209B illustrated in FIG. 22 , for example, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality in thereception device of the control information symbols included in “theframes of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 ” or “the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 ”and the advantageous effect that operations of demodulation and decodingof data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changers 205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 22 ,and furthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402and data symbols 502 using phase changers 209A and 209B illustrated inFIG. 22 .

Note that Q in Equation (38) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of Q.This feature is applicable to Embodiment 1 as well.

Note that R in Equation (49) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of R.

Moreover, taking into consideration the descriptions provided inSupplemental Information 1, the cyclic delay amount set in phase changer209A and the cyclic delay amount set in phase changer 209B may bedifferent values.

Embodiment 7

In this embodiment, an example of a communications system that employsthe transmission method and reception method described in Embodiments 1to 6 will be described.

FIG. 23 illustrates one example of a configuration of a base station (oraccess point or the like) according to this embodiment.

Transmission device 2303 receives inputs of data 2301, signal group2302, and control signal 2309, generates a modulated signalcorresponding to data 2301 and signal group 2302, and transmits themodulated signal from an antenna.

One example of a configuration of transmission device 2303 is as isshown in FIG. 1 , where data 2301 corresponds to 101 in FIG. 1 , signalgroup 2302 corresponds to 110 in FIG. 1 , and control signal 2309corresponds to 100 in FIG. 1 .

Reception device 2304 receives a modulated signal transmitted by thecommunication partner such as a terminal, performs signal processing,demodulation, and decoding on the modulated signal, and outputs controlinformation signal 2305 from the communication partner and receptiondata 2306.

One example of a configuration of reception device 2304 is as shown inFIG. 8 , where reception data 2306 corresponds to reception data 812 inFIG. 8 , and control information signal 2305 from the communicationpartner corresponds to control signal 810 in FIG. 8 .

Control signal generator 2308 receives inputs of control informationsignal 2305 from the communication partner and settings signal 2307, andgenerates and outputs control signal 2309 based on these inputs.

FIG. 24 illustrates one example of a configuration of a terminal, whichis the communication partner of the base station illustrated in FIG. 23.

Transmission device 2403 receives inputs of data 2401, signal group2402, and control signal 2409, generates a modulated signalcorresponding to data 2401 and signal group 2402, and transmits themodulated signal from an antenna.

One example of a configuration of transmission device 2403 is as isshown in FIG. 1 , where data 2401 corresponds to data 101 in FIG. 1 ,signal group 2402 corresponds to signal group 110 in FIG. 1 , andcontrol signal 2409 corresponds to control signal 110 in FIG. 1 .

Reception device 2404 receives a modulated signal transmitted by thecommunication partner such as a base station, performs signalprocessing, demodulation, and decoding on the modulated signal, andoutputs control information signal 2405 from the communication partnerand reception data 2406.

One example of a configuration of reception device 2404 is as shown inFIG. 8 , where reception data 2406 corresponds to reception data 812 inFIG. 8 , and control information signal 2405 from the communicationpartner corresponds to control signal 810 in FIG. 8 .

Control signal generator 2408 receives inputs of control informationsignal 2305 from the communication partner and settings signal 2407, andgenerates and outputs control signal 2409 based on this information.

FIG. 25 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by the terminal illustrated in FIG. 24 . Time isrepresented on the horizontal axis. 2501 is a preamble, and is a symbol,such as a PSK symbol, for the communication partner (for example, a basestation) to perform signal detection, frequency synchronization, timesynchronization, frequency offset estimation, and/or channel estimation.Preamble 2501 may include a training symbol for directionality control.Note that, here, the terminology “preamble” is used, but differentterminology may be used.

2502 is a control information symbol, and 2503 is a data symbolincluding data to be transmitted to the communication partner.

2502 is a control information symbol that includes, for example:information on an error correction encoding method used to generate datasymbol 2503 (such as information on the code length (block length)and/or encode rate); modulation scheme information, and controlinformation for notifying the communication partner.

Note that FIG. 25 is merely one non-limiting example of a frameconfiguration. Moreover other symbols, such as a pilot symbol and/orreference symbol, may be included in the symbols illustrated in FIG. 25. In FIG. 25 , frequency is represented on the vertical axis and symbolsare present along the frequency axis (carrier direction).

As examples of a frame configuration transmitted by the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 have been described with reference to FIG. 4 ,FIG. 5 , FIG. 13 , and FIG. 14 , further description is herein omitted.Note that other symbols 403, 503 may include a training symbol forperforming directionality control. Accordingly, in this embodiment, thebase station covers a case in which a plurality of modulated signals aretransmitted using a plurality of antennas.

Next, operations performed by a base station in a communications systemsuch as described above will be described in detail.

Transmission device 2303 in the base station illustrated in FIG. 23 hasthe configuration illustrated in FIG. 1 . Signal processor 106illustrated in FIG. 1 has the configuration illustrated in any one ofFIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 ,FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 . Note that FIG. 28, FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 will be describedlater. Here, operation performed by phase changers 205A, 205B may beswitched depending on the communications environment or the settings.Control information relating to operations performed by phase changers205A, 205B is transmitted by the base station as a part of the controlinformation transmitted via control information symbols, namely, othersymbols 403, 503 in the frame configurations illustrated in FIG. 4 ,FIG. 5 , FIG. 13 , and FIG. 14 .

Here, control information relating to operations performed by phasechangers 205A, 205B is expressed as u0, u1. The relationship between [u0u1] and phase changers 205A and 205B is illustrated in Table 1 (notethat u0, u1 are transmitted by the base station as some of the controlinformation symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503. The terminalobtains [u0 u1] included in control information symbols, namely, othersymbols 403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed by phasechangers 205A, 205B from [u0 u1], and demodulates and decodes datasymbols).

TABLE 1 u0 u1 phase changer operations 00 no phase change 01 changephase change value on a per-symbol basis (cyclically/regularly) 10implement phase change using specified phase change value (set) 11reserve

Interpretation of Table 1 is as follows.

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 205A, 205B do not implement a phase change, u0 is set to 0(u0=0) and u1 is set to 0 (u1=0). Accordingly, phase changer 205Aoutputs signal (206A) without implementing a phase change on inputsignal (204A). Similarly, phase changer 205B outputs a signal (206B)without implementing a phase change on the input signal (204B).

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 205A, 205B implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis, u0 is set to 0 (u0=0) and u1 is set to 1 (u1=1). Notethat since the method used by phase changers 205A, 205B to implement aphase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis is described indetail in Embodiments 1 through 6, detailed description thereof isomitted. When signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 is configuredas illustrated in any one of FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , and FIG. 22 , u0 isalso set to 0 (u0=0) and u1 is also set to 1 (u1=1) when the settings inthe base station are configured such that phase changer 205A implementsa phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and phasechanger 205B does not implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis, and when the settings in the base station areconfigured such that phase changer 205A does not implement a phasechange cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and phase changer 205Bimplements a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 205A, 205B implement phase change using a specific phase changevalue, u0 is set to 1 (u0=1) and u1 is set to 0 (u1=0). Next,implementation of a phase change using a specific phase change valuewill be described.

For example, in phase changer 205A, a phase change is implemented usinga specific phase change value. Here, the input signal (204A) isexpressed as z1(i) (i is a symbol number). Accordingly, when a phasechange is implemented using a specific phase change value, output signal(206A) is expressed as e^(jα)×z1(i) (a is the specific phase changevalue, and is a real number). Here, the amplitude may be changed. Insuch a case, output signal (206A) is expressed as A×e^(jα)×z1(i) (A is areal number).

Similarly, in phase changer 206A, a phase change is implemented using aspecific phase change value. Here, input signal (204B) is expressed asz2(t) (i is a symbol number). Accordingly, when a phase change isimplemented using a specific phase change value, output signal (206B) isexpressed as e^(jβ)×z2(t) (a is the specific phase change value, and isa real number). Here, the amplitude may be changed. In such a case,output signal 206B is expressed as B×e^(jβ)×z2(t) (B is a real number).

Note that when signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 is configuredas illustrated in any one of FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 31 ,FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , u0 is also set to 1 (u0=1) and u1 is also set to0 (u1=0) when the settings in the base station are configured such thatphase changer 205A implements a phase change using a specific phasechange value and phase changer 205B does not implement a phase changeusing a specific phase change value, and when the settings in the basestation are configured such that phase changer 205A does not implement aphase change using a specific phase change value and phase changer 205Bimplements a phase change using a specific phase change value.

Next, an example of a method for setting a specific phase change valuewill be described. Hereinafter, a first method and a second method willbe described.

First Method:

The base station transmits a training symbol. The terminal, which is thecommunication partner, uses the training symbol to transmit informationon the specific phase change value (set) to the base station. The basestation implements a phase change based on the information on thespecific phase change value (set) obtained from the terminal.

Another alternative example is as follows. The base station transmits atraining symbol. The terminal, which is the communication partner,transmits, to the base station, information relating to the receptionresult of the training symbol (e.g., information relating to a channelestimation value). Based on the information relating to the receptionresult of the training symbol from the terminal, the base stationcalculates a suitable value for the specific phase change value (set)and implements a phase change.

Note that it is necessary for the base station to notify the terminal ofthe information relating to the specific phase change value (set) set inthe settings, and in this case, the control information symbols, namely,other symbols 403, 503 illustrated in FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 13 , andFIG. 14 transmit information relating to the specific phase change value(set) set in the settings by the base station.

Next, an implementation example of the first method will be describedwith reference to FIG. 26 . In FIG. 26 , (A) illustrates symbolstransmitted by the base station arranged on the time axis, which is thehorizontal axis. In FIG. 26 , (B) illustrates symbols transmitted by theterminal arranged on the time axis, which is the horizontal axis.

Hereinafter, FIG. 26 will be described in detail. First, the terminalrequests communication with the base station.

Then, the base station transmits at least training symbol 2601 forestimating the specific phase change value (set) to be used by the basestation for the transmission of data symbol 2604. Note that the terminalmay perform other estimation using training symbol 2601, and trainingsymbol 2601 may use PSK modulation, for example. The training symbol isthen transmitted from a plurality of antennas, just like the pilotsymbol described in Embodiments 1 through 6.

The terminal receives training symbol 2601 transmitted by the basestation, calculates, using training symbol 2601, a suitable specificphase change value (set) for phase changer 205A and/or phase changer205B included in the base station to use upon implementing a phasechange, and transmits feedback information symbol 2602 including thecalculated value.

The base station receives feedback information symbol 2602 transmittedby the terminal, and demodulates and decodes the symbol to obtaininformation on the suitable specific phase change value (set). Based onthis information, the phase change value (set) used in theimplementation of the phase change by phase changer 205A and/or phasechanger 205B in the base station is set.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2603 and datasymbol 2604. Here, at least data symbol 2604 is implemented with a phasechange using the set phase change value (set).

Note that regarding data symbol 2604, the base station transmits aplurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas, just asdescribed in Embodiments 1 through 6. However, unlike Embodiments 1through 6, phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B implement aphase change using the specific phase change value (set) describedabove.

The frame configurations of the base station and terminal illustrated inFIG. 26 are mere non-limiting examples; other symbols may be included.Training symbol 2601, feedback information symbol 2602, controlinformation symbol 2603, and data symbol 2604 may each include anothersymbol such as a pilot symbol. Moreover, control information symbol 2603includes information relating to the specific phase change value (set)used upon transmitting data symbol 2604, and the terminal becomescapable of demodulating and decoding data symbol 2604 as a result ofobtaining this information.

Similar to as described in Embodiments 1 through 6, for example, whenthe base station transmits a modulated signal having a frameconfiguration such as illustrated in FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 13 , or FIG.14 , the subject of the phase change implemented using the specificphase change value (set) by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer205B, as described above, are data symbols (402, 502). The symbol thatis subject to phase change implemented by phase changer 209A and/orphase changer 209B is, just as described in Embodiments 1 through 6,“pilot symbol 401, 501”, “other symbol 403, 503”.

However, in phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B, if a phasechange is applied to “pilot symbol 401, 501”, “other symbol 403, 503” aswell, demodulating and decoding is possible.

A note regarding the recitation “specific phase change value (set)”follows. In the examples illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 ,FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , phase changer 205A is omitted, andphase changer 205B is included. Accordingly, in such a case, there is aneed to prepare a specific phase change value to be used by phasechanger 205B. On the other hand, in the examples illustrated in FIG. 20, FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , phase changer205A and phase changer 205B are included. In such a case, there is aneed to prepare a specific phase change value #A to be used by phasechanger 205A and a specific phase change value #B to be used by phasechanger 205B. Accordingly, the terminology “specific phase change value(set)” is used.

Second Method:

The base station starts transmission of a frame to the terminal. In thiscase, for example, the base station sets the specific phase change value(set) based on a random value, implements a phase change using thespecific phase change value, and transmits the modulated signal.

Thereafter, the terminal transmits, to the base station, informationindicating that the frame (or packet) could not be obtained, and thebase station receives this information.

In this case, for example, the base station sets the specific phasechange value (set) based on a random value, and transmits the modulatedsignal. Here, at least a data symbol including the frame (packet) datathat the terminal could not obtain is transmitted via a modulated signalimplemented with a phase change based on the newly set specific phasechange value (set). In other words, when the base station performstransmission two (or more) times as a result of, for example,retransmitting the first frame (packet) data, the specific phase changevalue (set) used for the first transmission and the specific phasechange value (set) used for the second transmission may be different.This makes it possible to achieve the advantageous effect that the frame(or packet) is highly likely to be obtained by the terminal upon thesecond transmission when retransmission is performed.

Thereafter, when the base station receives, from the terminal,information indicating that a frame (or packet) could not be obtained,the base station changes the specific change value (set) based on, forexample, a random number.

Note that it is necessary for the base station to notify the terminal ofthe information relating to the specific phase change value (set) set inthe settings, and in this case, the control information symbols, namely,other symbols 403, 503 illustrated in FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 13 , andFIG. 14 transmit information relating to the specific phase change value(set) set in the settings by the base station.

Note that in the above description of the second method, the specificphase change value (set) is set by the base station based on a randomvalue, but the method for setting the specific phase change value (set)is not limited to this example. So long as the specific phase changevalue (set) is set to a new value upon setting the specific phase changevalue (set), any method may be used to set the specific phase changevalue (set). Take the following for example.

For example, the specific phase change value (set) is set based on somerule.

The specific phase change value (set) may be set randomly.

The specific phase change value (set) may be set based on informationobtained from the communication partner.

The specific phase change value (set) may be set in any of these ways(however, the method is not limited to these examples).

Next, an implementation example of the second method will be describedwith reference to FIG. 27 . In FIG. 27 , (A) illustrates symbolstransmitted by the base station arranged on the time axis, which is thehorizontal axis. In FIG. 27 , (B) illustrates symbols transmitted by theterminal arranged on the time axis, which is the horizontal axis.

Hereinafter, FIG. 27 will be described in detail.

Note that in order to describe FIG. 27 , descriptions of FIG. 28 , FIG.29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 will also be described.

Examples of the configuration of signal processor 106 illustrated inFIG. 1 are given in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , andFIG. 22 , and variations on those configurations are illustrated in FIG.28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 .

FIG. 28 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 2 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203.Next, operations in FIG. 28 different from those with respect to FIG. 2will be described.

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) andcontrol signal 200, and based on control signal 200, applies a phasechange to mapped signal 201B, and outputs phase-changed signal 2801B.

In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) is applied tos2(t). Accordingly, when phase-changed signal 2801B is expressed ass2′(i), s2′(i) can be expressed as s2′(i)=y(i)×s2(t) (i is a symbolnumber (i is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0)). Note thatthe application method for phase change value y(i) is as described inEmbodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer 203 receives inputs of mapped signal 201A (s1(t)),phase-changed signal 2801B (s2′(i)), and control signal 200, performsweighting synthesis (precoding) based on control signal 200, and outputsweighting synthesized signal 204A and weighting synthesized signal 204B.More specifically, weighting synthesizer 203 multiplies a precodingmatrix with the vectors of mapped signal 201A (s1(t)) and phase-changedsignal 2801B (s2′(i)) to obtain weighting synthesized signal 204A andweighting synthesized signal 204B. Note that the configuration examplefor the precoding matrix is as described in Embodiment 1 (subsequentdescription is the same as made with reference to FIG. 2 , and as such,is omitted).

FIG. 29 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 18 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203. Inthis case, the operations performed by phase changer 205B and weightingsynthesizer 203 are the same as described with reference to FIG. 28 ,and as such, description will be omitted. Moreover, operations down theline of weighting synthesizer 203 are also the same as made withreference to FIG. 18 , and as such, description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 30 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 19 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203. Inthis case, the operations performed by phase changer 205B and weightingsynthesizer 203 are the same as described with reference to FIG. 28 ,and as such, description will be omitted. Moreover, operations down theline of weighting synthesizer 203 are also the same as made withreference to FIG. 19 , and as such, description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 31 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 20 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205A in front of weighting synthesizer 203 andmoving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203.

Phase changer 205A receives inputs of mapped signal 201A (s1(t)) andcontrol signal 200, and based on control signal 200, applies a phasechange to mapped signal 201A, and outputs phase-changed signal 2801A.

In phase changer 205A, for example, a phase change of w(i) is applied tos1(t). Accordingly, when phase-changed signal 2901A is expressed ass1′(i), s1′(i) can be expressed as s1′(i)=w(i)×s1(i) (i is a symbolnumber (i is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0)). Note thatthe application method for phase change value w(i) is as described inEmbodiment 1.

In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) is applied tos2(t). Accordingly, when phase-changed signal 2801B is expressed ass2′(i), s2′(i) can be expressed as s2′(i)=y(i)×s2(t) (i is a symbolnumber (i is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0)). Note thatthe application method for phase change value y(i) is as described inEmbodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer 203 receives inputs of mapped signal 2801A(s1′(i)), phase-changed signal 2801B (s2′(i)), and control signal 200,performs weighting synthesis (precoding) based on control signal 200,and outputs weighting synthesized signal 204A and weighting synthesizedsignal 204B. More specifically, weighting synthesizer 203 multiplies aprecoding matrix with the vectors of mapped signal 2801A (s1′(i)) andphase-changed signal 2801B (s2′(i)) to obtain weighting synthesizedsignal 204A and weighting synthesized signal 204B. Note that theconfiguration example for the precoding matrix is as described inEmbodiment 1 (subsequent description is the same as made with referenceto FIG. 20 , and as such, is omitted).

FIG. 32 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 21 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205A in front of weighting synthesizer 203 andmoving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203. In thiscase, the operations performed by phase changer 205A, phase changer205B, and weighting synthesizer 203 are the same as described withreference to FIG. 31 , and as such, description will be omitted.Moreover, operations down the line of weighting synthesizer 203 are alsothe same as made with reference to FIG. 21, and as such, descriptionthereof is omitted.

FIG. 33 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 22 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205A in front of weighting synthesizer 203 andmoving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203. In thiscase, the operations performed by phase changer 205A, phase changer205B, and weighting synthesizer 203 are the same as described withreference to FIG. 31 , and as such, description will be omitted.Moreover, operations down the line of weighting synthesizer 203 are alsothe same as made with reference to FIG. 22 , and as such, descriptionthereof is omitted.

In FIG. 27 , the terminal requests communication with the base station.

In this case, the base station determines the phase change value to beimplemented by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B to be afirst specific phase change value (set) by using a random number, forexample. Then, the base station implements a phase change via phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on the determined firstspecific phase change value (set). Here, control information symbol2701_1 includes information on the first specific phase change value(set).

A note regarding the terminology “first specific phase change value(set)” follows. In the examples illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG.19 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , and FIG. 30 , phase changer 205A is omitted,and phase changer 205B is included. Accordingly, in such a case, thereis a need to prepare a first specific phase change value to be used byphase changer 205B. On the other hand, in the examples illustrated inFIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , phasechanger 205A and phase changer 205B are included. In such a case, thereis a need to prepare a first specific phase change value #A to be usedby phase changer 205A and a first specific phase change value #B to beused by phase changer 205B. Accordingly, the terminology “first specificphase change value (set)” is used.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_1 anddata symbol #1 (2702_1). Here, at least data symbol #1 (2702_1) isimplemented with a phase change using the determined first specificphase change value (set).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_1 and data symbol#1 (2702_1) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #1 (2702_1) based at least on information on the firstspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_1. As a result, the terminal determines that the data included indata symbol #1 (2702_1) is obtained without error. The terminal thentransmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_1including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #1 (2702_1) was obtained without error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_1transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_1 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #1 (2702_1) was obtained without error,determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B to be the first specific phase changevalue (set), just as in the case where data symbol #1 (2702_1) istransmitted (since the base station obtained the data included in datasymbol #1 (2702_1) without error, the terminal can determine that it ishighly probable that data can be obtained without error when the nextdata symbol is transmitted and the first specific phase change value(set) is used (this makes it possible to achieve an advantageous effectthat it is highly probable that the terminal can achieve a high datareception quality)). Then, the base station implements a phase changevia phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on the determinedfirst specific phase change value (set). Here, control informationsymbol 2701_2 includes information on the first specific phase changevalue (set).

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_2 anddata symbol #2 (2702_2). Here, at least data symbol #2 (2702_2) isimplemented with a phase change using the determined first specificphase change value (set).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_2 and data symbol#2 (2702_2) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #2 (2702_2) based at least on information on the firstspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_2. As a result, the terminal determines that the data included indata symbol #2 (2702_2) is not successfully obtained. The terminal thentransmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_2including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #2 (2702_2) was not successfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_2transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_2 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 (2702_2) was not successfullyobtained, determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B to be changed from the firstspecific phase change value (set) (since the base station did not obtainthe data included in data symbol #2 (2702_2) successfully, the terminalcan determine that it is highly probable that data can be obtainedwithout error when the next data symbol is transmitted and the phasechange value is changed from the first specific phase change value (set)(this makes it possible to achieve an advantageous effect that it ishighly probable that the terminal can achieve a high data receptionquality)). Accordingly, the base station determines the phase changevalue (set) to be implemented by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer205B to be changed from the first specific phase change value (set) to asecond specific phase change value (set), by using a random number, forexample. Then, the base station implements a phase change via phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on the determined secondspecific phase change value (set). Here, control information symbol2701_3 includes information on the second specific phase change value(set).

A note regarding the terminology “second specific phase change value(set)” follows. In the examples illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG.19 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , and FIG. 30 , phase changer 205A is omitted,and phase changer 205B is included. Accordingly, in such a case, thereis a need to prepare a second specific phase change value to be used byphase changer 205B. On the other hand, in the examples illustrated inFIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , phasechanger 205A and phase changer 205B are included. In such a case, thereis a need to prepare a second specific phase change value #A to be usedby phase changer 205A and a second specific phase change value #B to beused by phase changer 205B. Accordingly, the terminology “secondspecific phase change value (set)” is used.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_3 anddata symbol #2 (2702_2-1). Here, at least data symbol #2 (2702_2-1) isimplemented with a phase change using the determined second specificphase change value (set).

Note that regarding “data symbol #2 (2702_2) present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_2” and “data symbol #2 (2702_2-1)present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_3”, themodulation scheme of “data symbol #2 (2702_2) present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_2” and the modulation scheme of “datasymbol #2 (2702_2-1) present immediately behind control informationsymbol 2701_3” may be the same or different.

Moreover, all or some data included in “data symbol #2 (2702_2) presentimmediately behind control information symbol 2701_2” is included in“data symbol #2 (2702_2-1) present immediately behind controlinformation symbol 2701_3” (because “data symbol #2 (2702_2-1) presentimmediately behind control information symbol 2701_3” is aretransmission symbol).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_3 and data symbol#2 (2702_2) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #2 (2702_2-1) based at least on information on the secondspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_3. As a result, the terminal determines that the data included indata symbol #2 (2702_2-1) is not successfully obtained. The terminalthen transmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_3including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #2 (2702_2-1) was not successfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_3transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_3 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 (2702_2-1) was not successfullyobtained, determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phasechanger A and phase changer B to be changed from the second specificphase change value (set) (since the base station did not obtain the dataincluded in data symbol #2 (2702_2-1) successfully, the terminal candetermine that it is highly probable that data can be obtained withouterror when the next data symbol is transmitted and the phase changevalue is changed from the second specific phase change value (set) (thismakes it possible to achieve an advantageous effect that it is highlyprobable that the terminal can achieve a high data reception quality)).Accordingly, the base station determines the phase change value (set) tobe implemented by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B to bechanged from the second specific phase change value (set) to a thirdspecific phase change value (set), by using a random number, forexample. Here, control information symbol 2701_4 includes information onthe third specific phase change value (set).

A note regarding the terminology “third specific phase change value(set)” follows. In the examples illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG.19 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , and FIG. 30 , phase changer 205A is omitted,and phase changer 205B is included. Accordingly, in such a case, thereis a need to prepare a third specific phase change value to be used byphase changer 205B. On the other hand, in the examples illustrated inFIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , phasechanger 205A and phase changer 205B are included. In such a case, thereis a need to prepare a third specific phase change value #A to be usedby phase changer 205A and a third specific phase change value #B to beused by phase changer 205B. Accordingly, the terminology “third specificphase change value (set)” is used.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_4 anddata symbol #2 (2702_2-2). Here, at least data symbol #2 (2702_2-2) isimplemented with a phase change using the determined third specificphase change value (set).

Note that regarding “data symbol #2 (2702_2-1) present immediatelybehind control information symbol 2701_3” and “data symbol #2 (2702_2-2)present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_4”, themodulation scheme of “data symbol #2 (2702_2-1) present immediatelybehind control information symbol 2701_3” and the modulation scheme of“data symbol #2 (2702_2-2) present immediately behind controlinformation symbol 2701_4” may be the same or different.

Moreover, all or some data included in “data symbol #2 (2702_2-1)present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_3” isincluded in “data symbol #2 (2702_2-2) present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_4” (because “data symbol #2 (2702_2-2)present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_4” is aretransmission symbol).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_4 and data symbol#2 (2702_2-2) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates anddecodes data symbol #2 (2702_2-2) based at least on information on thethird specific phase change value (set) included in control informationsymbol 2701_4. As a result, the terminal determines that the dataincluded in data symbol #2 (2702_2-2) is obtained without error. Theterminal then transmits, to the base station, terminal transmissionsymbol 2750_4 including at least information indicating that the dataincluded in data symbol #2 (2702_2-2) was obtained without error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_4transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_4 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 (2702_2-2) was obtained withouterror, determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B to be the third specific phasechange value (set), just as in the case where data symbol #2 (2702_2-2)is transmitted (since the base station obtained the data included indata symbol #2 (2702_2-2) without error, the terminal can determine thatit is highly probable that data can be obtained without error when thenext data symbol is transmitted and the third specific phase changevalue (set) is used (this makes it possible to achieve an advantageouseffect that it is highly probable that the terminal can achieve a highdata reception quality)). Then, the base station implements a phasechange via phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on thedetermined third specific phase change value (set). Here, controlinformation symbol 2701_5 includes information on the third specificphase change value (set).

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_5 anddata symbol #3 (2702_3). Here, at least data symbol #3 (2702_3) isimplemented with a phase change using the determined third specificphase change value (set).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_5 and data symbol#3 (2702_3) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #3 (2702_3) based at least on information on the thirdspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_5. As a result, the terminal determines that the data included indata symbol #3 (2702_3) is obtained without error. The terminal thentransmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_5including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #3 (2702_3) was obtained without error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_5transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_5 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #3 (2702_3) was obtained without error,determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B to be the third specific phase changevalue (set), just as in the case where data symbol #3 (2702_3) istransmitted (since the base station obtained the data included in datasymbol #3 (2702_3) without error, the terminal can determine that it ishighly probable that data can be obtained without error when the nextdata symbol is transmitted and the third specific phase change value(set) is used (this makes it possible to achieve an advantageous effectthat it is highly probable that the terminal can achieve a high datareception quality)). Then, the base station implements a phase changevia phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on the determinedthird specific phase change value (set). Here, control informationsymbol 2701_6 includes information on the third specific phase changevalue (set).

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_6 anddata symbol #4 (2702_4). Here, at least data symbol #4 (2702_4) isimplemented with a phase change using the determined third specificphase change value (set).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_6 and data symbol#4 (2702_4) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #4 (2702_4) based at least on information on the thirdspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_6. As a result, the terminal determines that the data included indata symbol #4 (2702_4) is not successfully obtained. The terminal thentransmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_6including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #4 (2702_4) was not successfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_6transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_6 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #4 (2702_4) was not successfullyobtained, determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B to be changed from the thirdspecific phase change value (set) (since the base station did not obtainthe data included in data symbol #4 (2702_4) successfully, the terminalcan determine that it is highly probable that data can be obtainedwithout error when the next data symbol is transmitted and the phasechange value is changed from the third specific phase change value (set)(this makes it possible to achieve an advantageous effect that it ishighly probable that the terminal can achieve a high data receptionquality)). Accordingly, the base station determines the phase changevalue (set) to be implemented by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer205B to be changed from the third specific phase change value (set) to afourth specific phase change value (set), by using a random number, forexample. Then, the base station implements a phase change via phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on the determined fourthspecific phase change value (set). Here, control information symbol2701_7 includes information on the fourth specific phase change value(set).

A note regarding the terminology “fourth specific phase change value(set)” follows. In the examples illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG.19 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , and FIG. 30 , phase changer 205A is omitted,and phase changer 205B is included. Accordingly, in such a case, thereis a need to prepare a fourth specific phase change value to be used byphase changer 205B. On the other hand, in the examples illustrated inFIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , phasechanger 205A and phase changer 205B are included. In such a case, thereis a need to prepare a fourth specific phase change value #A to be usedby phase changer 205A and a fourth specific phase change value #B to beused by phase changer 205B. Accordingly, the terminology “fourthspecific phase change value (set)” is used.

Note that regarding “data symbol #4 (2702_4) present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_6” and “data symbol #4 (2702_4-1)present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_7”, themodulation scheme of “data symbol #4 (2702_4) present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_6” and the modulation scheme of “datasymbol #4 (2702_4-1) present immediately behind control informationsymbol 2701_7” may be the same or different.

Moreover, “data symbol #4 (2702_4-1) present immediately behind controlinformation symbol 2701_7” includes all or some data included in “datasymbol #4 (2702_4) present immediately behind control information symbol2701_6” (because “data symbol #4 (2702_4-1) present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_7” is a retransmission symbol).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_7 and data symbol#4 (2702_4-1) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates anddecodes data symbol #4 (2702_4-1) based at least on information on thefourth specific phase change value (set) included in control informationsymbol 2701_7.

Note that regarding data symbol #1 (2702_1), data symbol #2 (2702_2),data symbol #3 (2702_3), and data symbol #4 (2702_4), the base stationtransmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas,just as described in Embodiments 1 through 6. However, unlikeEmbodiments 1 through 6, phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205Bimplement a phase change using the specific phase change value describedabove.

The frame configurations of the base station and terminal illustrated inFIG. 27 are mere non-limiting examples; other symbols may be included.Moreover, control information symbol 2701_1, 2701_2, 2701_3, 2701_4,2701_5, 2701_6, data symbol #1 (2702_1), data symbol #2 (2702_2), datasymbol #3 (2702_3), and data symbol #4 (2702_4) may each include othersymbols, such as a pilot symbol. Moreover, control information symbol2701_1, 2701_2, 2701_3, 2701_4, 2701_5, and 2701_6 include informationrelating to the specific phase change value (set) used upon transmittingdata symbol #1 (2702_1), data symbol #2 (2702_2), data symbol #3(2702_3), and data symbol #4 (2702_4), and the terminal becomes capableof demodulating and decoding data symbol #1 (2702_1), data symbol #2(2702_2), data symbol #3 (2702_3), and data symbol #4 (2702_4) as aresult of obtaining this information.

Note that in the above description, the base station determines thevalue (set) for the specific phase change value (set) by using a “randomnumber”, but the determination of the value for the specific phasechange value (set) is not limited to this method. The base station mayregularly change the value (set) for the specific phase change value(set) (any method may be used to determine the value for the specificphase change value (set); when the specific phase change value (set)needs to be changed, the specific phase change value (set) before andafter the change may be different).

Similar to as described in Embodiments 1 through 6, for example, whenthe base station transmits a modulated signal having a frameconfiguration such as illustrated in FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 13 , or FIG.14 , the subject of the phase change implemented using the specificphase change value by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B, asdescribed above, are data symbols (402, 502). The symbol that is subjectto phase change implemented by phase changer 209A and/or phase changer209B is, just as described in Embodiments 1 through 6, “pilot symbol401, 501”, “other symbol 403, 503”.

However, in phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B, if a phasechange is applied to “pilot symbol 401, 501”, “other symbol 403, 503” aswell, demodulating and decoding is possible.

Even if this transmission method is implemented independently, themethod of implementation of a phase change using a specific phase changevalue described above can achieve an advantageous effect in that highdata reception quality can be achieved with the terminal.

Moreover, examples of the configuration of signal processor 106illustrated in FIG. 1 and included in the transmission device of thebase station are given in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21, FIG. 22 , FIG. 23 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 ,and FIG. 33 , but phase change need not be implemented in phase changer209A and phase changer 209B. In other words, in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG.19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 23 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30, FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , phase changer 209A and phase changer209B may be removed. In such cases, signal 208A corresponds to signal106_A in FIG. 1 , and signal 208B corresponds to signal 106_B in FIG. 1.

When [u0 u1], which is described above and used to control operationsperformed by phase changers 205A, 205B included in the base station, isset to [01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), that is to say, when phase changers205A, 205B implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbolbasis, control information for setting the phase change in detail is setto u2, u3. The relationship between [u2 u3] and the phase changeimplemented by phase changers 205A and 205B in detail is illustrated inTable 2 (note that u2, u3 are, for example, transmitted by the basestation as some of the control information symbols, namely, othersymbols 403, 503. The terminal obtains [u2 u3] included in controlinformation symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503, becomes aware ofoperations performed by phase changers 205A, 205B from [u2 u3], anddemodulates and decodes data symbols. Also, the control information for“detailed phase change” is 2-bit information, but the number of bits maybe other than 2 bits).

TABLE 2 u2 u3 phase change method when [u0 u1] = [01] 00 method 01_1 01method 01_2 10 method 01_3 11 method 01_4

A first example of an interpretation of Table 2 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[00] (i.e., u2=0,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_1.

Method 01_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.53} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}53}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[01] (i.e., u2=0,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_2.

Method 01_2:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.54} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(54)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[10] (i.e., u2=1,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_3.

Method 01_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.55] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(55)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.56] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}(56)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[11] (i.e., u2=1,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_4.

Method 01_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.57] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}(57)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.58] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(58)}\end{matrix}$

A second example of an interpretation of Table 2 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[00] (i.e., u2=0,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_1.

Method 01_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.59] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}(59)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[01] (i.e., u2=0,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_2.

Method 01_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.60] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}(60)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[10] (i.e., u2=1,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_3.

Method 01_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.61] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}(61)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[11] (i.e., u2=1,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_4.

Method 01_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.62] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(62)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

A third example of an interpretation of Table 2 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[00] (i.e., u2=0,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_1.

Method 01_1:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.63] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}(63)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[01] (i.e., u2=0,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_2.

Method 01_2:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.64] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}(64)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[10] (i.e., u2=1,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_3.

Method 01_3:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.65] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}(65)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[11] (i.e., u2=1,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_4.

Method 01_4:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.66] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(66)}\end{matrix}$

A fourth example of an interpretation of Table 2 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[00] (i.e., u2=0,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_1.

Method 01_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.67] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}(67)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.68] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}(68)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[01] (i.e., u2=0,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_2.

Method 01_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.69] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}(69)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.70] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}(70)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[10] (i.e., u2=1,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_3.

Method 01_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.71] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}(71)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.72] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}(72)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[11] (i.e., u2=1,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_4.

Method 01_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.73] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(73)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.74] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}(74)}\end{matrix}$

Although first through fourth examples are given above, the detailedphase change method employed by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205Bis not limited to these examples.

<1> In phase changer 205A, a phase change is implementedcyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

<2> In phase changer 205B, a phase change is implementedcyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

<3> In phase changer 205A and phase changer 205B, a phase change isimplemented cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

So long as a method according to one or more of <1>, <2>, and <3> is setin detail according to [u2 u3], it may be implemented in the same manneras described above.

When [u0 u1], which is described above and used to control operationsperformed by phase changers 205A, 205B included in the base station, isset to [10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), that is to say, when phase changers205A, 205B implement a phase change using a specific phase change value(set), control information for setting the phase change in detail is setto u4, u5. The relationship between [u4 u5] and the phase changeimplemented by phase changers 205A, 205B in detail is illustrated inTable 3 (note that u4, u5 are, for example, transmitted by the basestation as some of the control information symbols, namely, othersymbols 403, 503. The terminal obtains [u4 u5] included in controlinformation symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503, becomes aware ofoperations performed by phase changers 205A, 205B from [u4 u5], anddemodulates and decodes data symbols. Also, the control information for“detailed phase change” is 2-bit information, but the number of bits maybe other than 2 bits).

TABLE 3 u4 u5 phase change method when [u0 u1] = [10] 00 method 10_1 01method 10_2 10 method 10_3 11 method 10_4

A first example of an interpretation of Table 3 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[00] (i.e., u4=0,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_1.

Method 10_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.75] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(75)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[01] (i.e., u4=0,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_2.

Method 10_2:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.76] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}}} & {{Equation}(76)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[10] (i.e., u4=1,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_3.

Method 10_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.77] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(77)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.78] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(78)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[11] (i.e., u4=1,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_4.

Method 10_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.79] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi}{7}}} & {{Equation}(79)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.80] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi}{9}}} & {{Equation}(80)}\end{matrix}$

A second example of an interpretation of Table 3 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[00] (i.e., u4=0,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_1.

Method 10_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).[MATH. 81]y1(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (81)

(In the case of Equation (81), phase changer 205A does not implement aphase.). Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[01] (i.e., u4=0,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_2.

Method 10_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.82] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(82)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[10] (i.e., u4=1,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_3.

Method 10_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.83] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(83)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[11] (i.e., u4=1,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_4.

Method 10_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.84] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{3 \times \pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(84)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

A third example of an interpretation of Table 3 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[00] (i.e., u4=0,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_1.

Method 10_1:

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).[MATH. 85]y2(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (85)

In the case of Equation (85), phase changer 205B does not implement aphase. Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[01] (i.e., u4=0,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_2.

Method 10_2:

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.86] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(86)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[10] (i.e., u4=1,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_3.

Method 10_3:

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.87] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(87)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[11] (i.e., u4=1,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_4.

Method 10_4:

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.88] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{3 \times \pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(88)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

A fourth example of an interpretation of Table 3 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[00] (i.e., u4=0,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_1.

Method 10_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.89] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(89)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).[MATH. 90]y2(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (90)

(In the case of Equation (90), phase changer 205B does not implement aphase.)

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[01] (i.e., u4=0,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_2.

Method 10_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.91] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(91)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.92] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(92)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[10] (i.e., u4=1,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_3.

Method 10_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.93] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(93)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).

[MATH.94] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(94)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[11] (i.e., u4=1,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_4.

Method 10_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows(this acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number).[MATH. 95]y1(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (95)

(In the case of Equation (95), phase changer 205A does not implement aphase.). Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in themultiplication for the phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbolnumber and is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0). Here,y2(i) is expressed as follows (this acts as a fixed phase valueindependent of symbol number).

[MATH.96] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(96)}\end{matrix}$

Although first through fourth examples are given above, the detailedphase change method employed by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205Bis not limited to these examples.

<4> In phase changer 205A, phase change is implemented using a specificphase change value.

<5> In phase changer 205B, phase change is implemented using a specificphase change value.

<6> In phase changer 205A and phase changer 205B, phase change isimplemented using a specific phase change value.

So long as a method according to one or more of <4>, <5>, and <6> is setin detail according to [u4 u5], it may be implemented in the same manneras described above.

Moreover, in phase changers 205A, 205B included in the base station, acombination of the method of implementing a phase changecyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the method ofimplementing a phase change using a specific phase change value may beused. A mode in which phase changers 205A, 205B use a combination of themethod of implementing a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis and the method of implementing a phase change using aspecific phase change value is indicated as “reserve” in Table 1, and isallotted as [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1).

When [u0 u1], which is described above and used to control operationsperformed by phase changers 205A, 205B included in the base station, isset to [11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), that is to say, when phase changers205A, 205B implement a phase change using a combination the method ofimplementing a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basisand the method of implementing a phase change using a specific phasechange value, control information for setting the phase change in detailis set to u6, u7. The relationship between [u6 u7] and the phase changeimplemented by phase changers 205A, 205B in detail is illustrated inTable 4 (note that u6, u7 are, for example, transmitted by the basestation as some of the control information symbols, namely, othersymbols 403, 503. The terminal obtains [u6 u7] included in controlinformation symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503, becomes aware ofoperations performed by phase changers 205A, 205B from [u6 u7], anddemodulates and decodes data symbols. Also, the control information for“detailed phase change” is 2-bit information, but the number of bits maybe other than 2 bits).

TABLE 4 u6 u7 phase change method when [u0 u1] = [10] 00 method 11_1 01method 11_2 10 method 11_3 11 method 11_4

A first example of an interpretation of Table 4 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[00] (i.e., u6=0,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_1.

Method 11_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.97] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(97)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.[MATH. 98]y2(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (98)

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[01] (i.e., u6=0,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_2.

Method 11_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.99] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(99)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.100] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(100)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[10] (i.e., u6=1,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_3.

Method 11_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.[MATH. 101]y1(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (101)

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.102] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(102)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[11] (i.e., u6=1,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_4.

Method 11_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.103] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(103)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.104] $\begin{matrix}{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(104)}\end{matrix}$

A second example of an interpretation of Table 4 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[00] (i.e., u6=0,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_1.

Method 11_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

[MATH.105] $\begin{matrix}{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(105)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.[MATH. 106]y2(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (106)

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[01] (i.e., u6=0,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_2.

Method 11_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.107} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(107)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.108} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(108)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[10] (i.e., u6=1,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_3.

Method 11_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.109} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(109)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.110} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(110)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[11] (i.e., u6=1,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_4.

Method 11_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.111} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(111)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.112} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{3 \times \pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(112)}\end{matrix}$

A third example of an interpretation of Table 4 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[00] (i.e., u6=0,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_1.

Method 11_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.113} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{8}}} & {{Equation}(113)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.114} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(114)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[01] (i.e., u6=0,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_2.

Method 11_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.115} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}(115)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.116} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(116)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[10] (i.e., u6=1,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_3.

Method 11_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.117} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}(117)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.118} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(118)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[11] (i.e., u6=1,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_4.

Method 11_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.119} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(119)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.120} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(120)}\end{matrix}$

A fourth example of an interpretation of Table 4 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[00] (i.e., u6=0,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_1.

Method 11_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.[MATH. 121]y1(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (121)

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.122} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(122)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[Oi] (i.e., u6=0,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_2.

Method 11_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.123} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(123)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.124} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(124)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[10] (i.e., u6=1,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_3.

Method 11_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.125} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(125)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.126} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(126)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[11] (i.e., u6=1,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_4.

Method 11_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.127} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{3 \times \pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}(127)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.128} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(128)}\end{matrix}$

A fifth example of an interpretation of Table 4 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[00] (i.e., u6=0,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_1.

Method 11_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.129} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(129)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.130} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}(130)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[01] (i.e., u6=0,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_2.

Method 11_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.131} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(131)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.132} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}(132)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[10] (i.e., u6=1,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_3.

Method 11_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.133} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(133)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.134} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}(134)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[11] (i.e., u6=1,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_4.

Method 11_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y1(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.135} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}(135)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i) (i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0). Here, y2(i) is expressed asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.136} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}(136)}\end{matrix}$

Although first through fifth examples are given above, the detailedphase change method employed by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205Bis not limited to these examples.

<7> In phase changer 205A, phase change is implementedcyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis, and in phase changer 205B,phase change is implemented using a specific phase change value (set).

<8> In phase changer 205B, phase change is implemented using a specificphase change value (set), and in phase changer 205B, phase change isimplemented cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

<3> In phase changer 205A and phase changer 205B, a phase change isimplemented cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

So long as a method according to one or more of <7> and <8> is set indetail according to [u2 u3], it may be implemented in the same manner asdescribed above.

In weighting synthesizer 203 included in the base station, the matrixused for the weighting synthesis may be changed. Control information forsetting the weighting synthesis matrix shall be referred to as u8, u9.The relationship between [u8 u9] and the weighting synthesis matrix tobe used in detail by weighting synthesizer 203 is given in Table 5 (notethat u8, u9 are, for example, transmitted by the base station as some ofthe control information symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503. Theterminal obtains [u8 u9] included in control information symbols,namely, other symbols 403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed byweighting synthesizer 203 from [u8 u9], and demodulates and decodes datasymbols. Also, the control information for identifying “detailedweighting matrix” is 2-bit information, but the number of bits may beother than 2 bits).

TABLE 5 u8 u9 phase change method when [u0 u1] = [10] 00 precoding usingmatrix 1 01 precoding using matrix 2 10 precoding using matrix 3 11determine precoding method based on information from communicationpartner

When [u8 u9]=[00] (i.e., u8=0, u9=0), in weighting synthesizer 203 inthe base station, precoding that uses matrix 1 is performed.

When [u8 u9]=[01] (i.e., u8=0, u9=1), in weighting synthesizer 203 inthe base station, precoding that uses matrix 2 is performed.

When [u8 u9]=[10] (i.e., u8=1, u9=0), in weighting synthesizer 203 inthe base station, precoding that uses matrix 3 is performed.

When [u8 u9]=[11] (i.e., u8=1, u9=1), the base station obtains, from thecommunication partner, for example, feedback information, and based onthe feedback information, in weighting synthesizer 203 of the basestation, calculates a precoding matrix to be used, and performsprecoding using the calculated (precoding) matrix.

As described above, weighting synthesizer 203 in the base stationswitches between precoding matrices. The terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station, obtains u8, u9 included inthe control information symbol, and based on u8, u9, can demodulate anddecode the data symbols. With this, since a suitable precoding matrixcan be set based on the communications situation such as the state ofthe radio wave propagation environment, the terminal can achieve anadvantageous effect of achieving a high data reception quality.

Although identification methods such as those for phase changers 205A,205B in the base station indicated in Table 1 have been described,settings such as those in Table 6 may be used instead of those in Table1.

Transmission device 2303 in the base station illustrated in FIG. 23 hasthe configuration illustrated in FIG. 1 . Signal processor 106illustrated in FIG. 1 has the configuration illustrated in any one ofFIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 ,FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 . Here, operationperformed by phase changers 205A, 205B may be switched depending on thecommunications environment or the settings. Control information relatingto operations performed by phase changers 205A, 205B is transmitted bythe base station as a part of the control information transmitted viacontrol information symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503 in the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 13 , and FIG. 14 .

Here, control information relating to operations performed by phasechangers 205A, 205B is expressed as u10. The relationship between [u10]and phase changers 205A, 205B is illustrated in Table 6.

TABLE 6 change phase change value on a per-symbol u10 basis(cyclically/regularly) 0 OFF 1 ON

(Note that u10 is transmitted by the base station as some of the controlinformation symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503. The terminalobtains [u10] included in control information symbols, namely, othersymbols 403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed by phasechangers 205A, 205B from [u10], and demodulates and decodes datasymbols.)

Interpretation of Table 6 is as follows.

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 205A, 205B do not implement a phase change, u10 is set to 0(u10=0). Accordingly, phase changer 205A outputs signal (206A) withoutimplementing a phase change on input signal (204A). Similarly, phasechanger 205B outputs a signal (206B) without implementing a phase changeon the input signal (204B).

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 205A, 205B implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis, u10 is set to 1 (u10=1). Note that since the methodused by phase changers 205A, 205B to implement a phase changecyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis is described in detail inEmbodiments 1 through 6, detailed description thereof is omitted. Whensignal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 is configured as illustratedin any one of FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , and FIG. 22 , u10 is also set to 1(u10=1) when the settings in the base station are configured such thatphase changer 205A implements a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis and phase changer 205B does not implement a phasechange cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis, and when the settingsin the base station are configured such that phase changer 205A does notimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis andphase changer 205B implements a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis.

With this, the terminal can achieve an advantageous effect of achievinga high data reception quality by turning the operation of the phasechange performed by phase changers 205A, 205B on and off based on thecommunications situation such as the state of the radio wave propagationenvironment.

Transmission device 2303 in the base station illustrated in FIG. 23 hasthe configuration illustrated in FIG. 1 . Signal processor 106illustrated in FIG. 1 has the configuration illustrated in any one ofFIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 ,FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 . Here, operationsperformed by phase changers 209A, 209B may be switched depending on thecommunications environment or the settings. Control information relatingto operations performed by phase changers 209A, 209B is transmitted bythe base station as a part of the control information transmitted viacontrol information symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503 in the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 13 , and FIG. 14 .

Here, control information relating to operations performed by phasechangers 209A, 209B is expressed as u11. The relationship between [u11]and phase changers 209A, 209B is illustrated in Table 7.

TABLE 7 u11 phase change (or cyclic delay diversity) 0 OFF 1 ON

(Note that u11 is transmitted by the base station as some of the controlinformation symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503. The terminalobtains [u11] included in control information symbols, namely, othersymbols 403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed by phasechangers 209A, 209B from [u11], and demodulates and decodes datasymbols.)

Interpretation of Table 7 is as follows.

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 209A, 209B do not implement a phase change, u11 is set to 0(u11=0). Accordingly, phase changer 209A outputs a signal (210A) withoutimplementing a phase change on the input signal (208A). Similarly, phasechanger 209B outputs a signal (210B) without implementing a phase changeon the input signal (208B).

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 209A, 209B implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis (or apply cyclic delay diversity), u11 is set to 1(u11=1). Note that since the method used by phase changers 209A, 209B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis isdescribed in detail in Embodiments 1 through 6, detailed descriptionthereof is omitted. When signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 isconfigured as illustrated in any one of FIG. 19 and FIG. 22 , u11 isalso set to 1 (u11=1) when the settings in the base station areconfigured such that phase changer 209A implements a phase changecyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and phase changer 209B doesnot implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis,and when the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechanger 209A does not implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis and phase changer 209B implements a phase changecyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

With this, the terminal can achieve an advantageous effect of achievinga high data reception quality by turning the operation of the phasechange performed by phase changers 209A, 209B on and off based on thecommunications situation such as the state of the radio wave propagationenvironment.

Next, an example of switching the operations performed by phase changers205A, 205B shown in Table 1 will be given.

For example, the base station and the terminal may communicate asillustrated in FIG. 27 . Note that communication based on FIG. 27 hasbeen described above, and as such, description will be partiallyomitted.

First, the terminal requests communication with the base station.

The base station then selects “implement phase change using a specificphase change value (set)” in Table 1, whereby phase changer 205A and/orphase changer 205B perform signal processing equivalent to “implementphase change using a specific phase change value (set)”, and transmitdata symbol #1 (2702_1).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_1 and data symbol#1 (2702_1) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #1 (2702_1) based at least on the transmission methodincluded in control information symbol 2701_1. As a result, the terminaldetermines that the data included in data symbol #1 (2702_1) is obtainedwithout error. The terminal then transmits, to the base station,terminal transmission symbol 2750_1 including at least informationindicating that the data included in data symbol #1 (2702_1) wasobtained without error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_1transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_1 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #1 (2702_1) was obtained without error,determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B to be “implement a phase change using thespecific phase change value (set)”, just as in the case where datasymbol #1 (2702_1) is transmitted (since the base station obtained thedata included in data symbol #1 (2702_1) without error, the terminal candetermine that it is highly probable that data can be obtained withouterror when the next data symbol is transmitted and “implement a phasechange using the specific phase change value (set)” is used (this makesit possible to achieve an advantageous effect that it is highly probablethat the terminal can achieve a high data reception quality)). Then, thebase station implements a phase change via phase changer 205A and/orphase changer 205B based on the determined “implement a phase change ata specific phase change value (set)”.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_2 anddata symbol #2 (2702_2). Here, at least data symbol #2 (2702_2) isimplemented with a phase change in accordance with “implement a phasechange using the specific phase change value (set)”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_2 and data symbol#2 (2702_2) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #2 (2702_2) based at least on information on transmissionmethod included in control information symbol 2701_2. As a result, theterminal determines that the data included in data symbol #2 (2702_2) isnot successfully obtained. The terminal then transmits, to the basestation, terminal transmission symbol 2750_2 including at leastinformation indicating that the data included in data symbol #2 (2702_2)was not successfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_2transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_2 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 (2702_2) was not successfullyobtained, determines the phase change to be implemented by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B to be changed to “(cyclically/regularly)change the phase change value on a per symbol basis” (since the basestation did not obtain the data included in data symbol #2 (2702_2)successfully, the terminal can determine that it is highly probable thatdata can be obtained without error when the phase change method ischanged to “(cyclically/regularly) change the phase change value on aper symbol basis” when the next data symbol is transmitted (this makesit possible to achieve an advantageous effect that it is highly probablethat the terminal can achieve a high data reception quality)).Accordingly, the base station implements a phase change via phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on “(cyclically/regularly)change the phase change value on a per symbol basis”. Here, the basestation transmits control information symbol 2701_3 and data symbol #2(2702_2-1), but at least with respect to data symbol #2 (2702_2-1), aphase change is performed based on “(cyclically/regularly) change thephase change value on a per symbol basis”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_3 and data symbol#2 (2702_2) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #2 (2702_2-1) based at least on information on the firstspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_3. As a result, the terminal determines that the data included indata symbol #2 (2702_2-1) is not successfully obtained. The terminalthen transmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_3including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #2 (2702_2-1) was not successfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_3transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_3 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 2702_2-1 was not successfullyobtained, determines to set the phase change to be implemented by phasechanger A and phase changer B to once again be “(cyclically/regularly)change the phase change value on a per symbol basis”. Accordingly, thebase station implements a phase change via phase changer 205A and/orphase changer 205B based on “(cyclically/regularly) change the phasechange value on a per symbol basis”. Here, the base station transmitscontrol information symbol 2701_4 and data symbol #2 (2702_2-2), but atleast with respect to data symbol #2 (2702_2-2), a phase change isperformed based on “(cyclically/regularly) change the phase change valueon a per symbol basis”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_4 and data symbol#2 (2702_2-2) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates anddecodes data symbol #2 (2702_2-2) based at least on information on thetransmission method included in control information symbol 2701_4. As aresult, the terminal determines that the data included in data symbol #2(2702_2-2) is obtained without error. The terminal then transmits, tothe base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_4 including at leastinformation indicating that the data included in data symbol #2(2702_2-2) was obtained without error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_4transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_4 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 (2702-2) was obtained without error,determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B to be “implement a phase change at aspecific phase change value (set)”. Then, the base station implements aphase change via phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B based onthe “implement a phase change at a specific phase change value (set)”.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_5 anddata symbol #3 (2702_3). Here, at least data symbol #3 (2702_3) isimplemented with a phase change based on the “implement a phase changeat a specific phase change value (set)”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_5 and data symbol#3 (2702_3) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #3 (2702_3) based at least on information on thetransmission method included in control information symbol 2701_5. As aresult, the terminal determines that the data included in data symbol #3(2702_3) is obtained without error. The terminal then transmits, to thebase station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_5 including at leastinformation indicating that the data included in data symbol #3 (2702_3)was obtained without error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_5transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_5 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #3 (2702_3) was obtained without error,determines the method to be implemented by phase changer 205A and/orphase changer 205B to be the method “implement a phase change at aspecific phase change value (set)”. The base station then transmits datasymbol #4 (2702_4) based on “implement a phase change at a specificphase change value (set)”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_6 and data symbol#4 (2702_4) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #4 (2702_4) based at least on information on thetransmission method included in control information symbol 2701_6. As aresult, the terminal determines that the data included in data symbol #4(2702_4) is not successfully obtained. The terminal then transmits, tothe base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_6 including at leastinformation indicating that the data included in data symbol #4 (2702_4)was not successfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_6transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_6 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #4 (2702_4) was not successfullyobtained, determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B to be changed to“(cyclically/regularly) change the phase change value on a per symbolbasis”. Accordingly, the base station implements a phase change viaphase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on“(cyclically/regularly) change the phase change value on a per symbolbasis”. Here, the base station transmits control information symbol2701_7 and data symbol #4 (2702_4-1), but at least with respect to datasymbol #4 (2702_4-1), a phase change is performed based on“(cyclically/regularly) change the phase change value on a per symbolbasis”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_7 and data symbol#4 (2702_4-1) transmitted by the base station, and demodulates anddecodes data symbol #4 (2702_4-1) based on information on thetransmission method included in control information symbol 2701_7.

Note that regarding data symbol #1 (2702_1), data symbol #2 (2702_2),data symbol #3 (2702_3), and data symbol #4 (2702_4), the base stationtransmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas,just as described in Embodiments 1 through 6.

The frame configurations of the base station and terminal illustrated inFIG. 27 are mere non-limiting examples; other symbols may be included.Moreover, control information symbol 2701_1, 2701_2, 2701_3, 2701_4,2701_5, 2701_6, data symbol #1 (2702_1), data symbol #2 (2702_2), datasymbol #3 (2702_3), and data symbol #4 (2702_4) may each include othersymbols, such as a pilot symbol. Moreover, control information symbol2701_1, 2701_2, 2701_3, 2701_4, 2701_5, and 2701_6 include informationrelating to the specific phase change value (set) used upon transmittingdata symbol #1 (2702_1), data symbol #2 (2702_2), data symbol #3(2702_3), and data symbol #4 (2702_4), and the terminal becomes capableof demodulating and decoding data symbol #1 (2702_1), data symbol #2(2702_2), data symbol #3 (2702_3), and data symbol #4 (2702_4) as aresult of obtaining this information.

Note that the switching of the transmission method based on Table 1described in this embodiment of the base station with reference to FIG.27 is not limited to the above description. The above description ismerely one example. The switching of the transmission method based onTable 1 may be performed more flexibly.

As described above, by switching the transmission method, switching thephase change method, and switching implementation of the phase change onor off in a more flexible manner in accordance with, for example, thecommunications network, the reception device of the communicationpartner can achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality.

Note that a method for switching the precoding matrix based on, forexample, information from the communication partner, may be allotted to“reserve” in Table 1 according to this embodiment, which is associatedwith u0=1 and u1=1. In other words, when the base station selects theMIMO transmission method, the base station may be allowed to also selecta method for selecting a precoding matrix based on information from thecommunication partner.

In this embodiment, the configuration of signal processor 106illustrated in FIG. 1 was exemplified using FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30, FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , but for Embodiments 1 through 6 aswell, signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 can be configured asillustrated in FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , andFIG. 33 .

(Supplemental Information 3)

The method used to map each symbol in the mapper described in thepresent specification may be switched regularly/cyclically, for example.

For example, a modulation scheme that has 16 signal points in anin-phase I-quadrature Q plane for transmitting 4 bits is implemented.Here, the arrangement of the 16 signal points for transmitting the fourbits in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane may be changed on a per-symbolbasis.

Moreover, in Embodiments 1 through 6, a case in which a multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM is implemented is described, but a single-carrierscheme may be implemented in the same manner.

Moreover, the embodiments according to the present specification may beimplemented in the same manner even when a spread spectrum communicationmethod is implemented.

(Supplemental Information 4)

In each embodiment disclosed in the present specification, an example ofthe configuration of the transmission device is given in FIG. 1 , andexamples of the configuration of signal processor 106 illustrated inFIG. 1 are given in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 ,FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33. However, the configuration of transmission device is not limited tothe configuration illustrated in FIG. 1 , and the configuration ofsignal processor 106 is not limited to the examples illustrated in FIG.2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29, FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 . In other words, thetransmission device and signal processor 106 included in thetransmission device may be configured in any manner so long as thetransmission device can generate a signal equivalent to either of theprocessed signal 106_A or 106_B described in the above embodimentsaccording to the present specification and transmit the signal using aplurality of antenna units.

Hereinafter, a different configuration example of the transmissiondevice and signal processor 106 included in the transmission device thatmeet this requirement will be given.

One example of a different configuration is one in which mapper 104illustrated in FIG. 1 generates, as mapped signal 105_1, 105_2, a signalequivalent to weighting synthesized signal 204A, 204B illustrated in anyone of FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , and FIG. 22 ,based on encoded data 103 and control signal 100. Signal processor 106includes a configuration in which weighting synthesizer 203 is removedfrom a configuration illustrated in any one of FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG.19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , and FIG. 22 . Mapped signal 105_1 is input intophase changer 205A or inserter 207A, and mapped signal 105_2 is inputinto phase changer 205B or inserter 207B.

Another example of a different configuration is one in which, when theweighting synthesis (precoding) processing is expressed as (precoding)matrix F illustrated in Equation (33) or Equation (34), weightingsynthesizer 203 illustrated in FIG. 2 does not perform signal processingfor weighting synthesis on mapped signal 201A, 201B, outputs mappedsignal 201A as weighting synthesized signal 204A, and outputs mappedsignal 201B as weighting synthesized signal 204B. In such a case,weighting synthesizer 203 performs, based on control signal 200, controlof switching between (i) performing signal processing corresponding toweighting synthesis to generate weighting synthesized signal 204A, 204B,and (ii) outputting mapped signal 201A as weighting synthesized signal204A and outputting mapped signal 201B as weighting synthesized signal204B without performing signal processing for weighting synthesis.Moreover, when the only weighting synthesis (precoding) processing thatis performed is the processing expressed as (precoding) matrix F inEquation (33) or Equation (34), weighting synthesizer 203 may beomitted.

In the present specification, even if the specifics of the transmissiondevice configuration are different, by generating a signal equivalent toany one of signal-processed signal 106_A, 106_B described above in anyof the embodiments of the present specification and transmitting thesignal using a plurality of antenna units, when the reception device isin an environment in which direct waves are dominant, in particular whenin an LOS environment, it is possible to achieve an advantageous effectin which the reception quality of the reception device that isperforming MIMO data symbol transferring (transfer via a plurality ofstreams) can be improved (other advantageous effects described in thepresent specification are also achievable).

Note that in signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 , a phase changemay be provided both before and after weighting synthesizer 203. Morespecifically, signal processor 106 includes, before weightingsynthesizer 203, one or both of phase changer 205A_1 that generatesphase-changed signal 2801A by applying a phase change to mapped signal201A, and phase changer 205B_1 that generates phase-changed signal 2801Bby applying a phase change to mapped signal 201B. Signal processor 106further includes, before inserter 207A, 207B, one or both of phasechanger 205A_2 that generates phase-changed signal 206A by applying aphase change to weighting synthesized signal 204A, and phase changer205B_2 that generates phase-changed signal 206B by applying a phasechange to weighting synthesized signal 204B.

Here, when signal processor 106 includes phase changer 205A_1, one inputof weighting synthesizer 203 is phase-changed signal 2801A, and whensignal processor 106 does not include phase changer 205A_1, one input ofweighting synthesizer 203 is mapped signal 201A. When signal processor106 includes phase changer 205B_1, the other input of weightingsynthesizer 203 is phase-changed signal 2801B, and when signal processor106 does not include phase changer 205B_1, the other input of weightingsynthesizer 203 is mapped signal 201B. When signal processor 106includes phase changer 205A_2, the input of inserter 207A isphase-changed signal 206A, and when signal processor 106 does notinclude phase changer 205A_2, the input of inserter 207A is weightingsynthesized signal 204A. When signal processor 106 includes phasechanger 205B_2, the input of inserter 207B is phase-changed signal 206B,and when signal processor 106 does not include phase changer 205B_2, theinput of inserter 207B is weighting synthesized signal 204B.

Moreover, the transmission device illustrated in FIG. 1 may include asecond signal processor that implements different signal processing onprocessed signal 106_A, 106_B, i.e., the output of signal processor 106.Here, radio unit 107_A receives an input of signal A processed withsecond signal processing and performs predetermined processing on theinput signal, and radio unit 107_B receives an input of signal Bprocessed with second signal processing and performs predeterminedprocessing on the input signal, where signal A and signal B processedwith second signal processing are two signals output from a secondsignal processor.

Embodiment A1

Hereinafter, a case in which the base station (AP) and the terminalcommunicate with each other will be described.

Here, the base station (AP) can transmit a plurality of modulatedsignals including a plurality of streams of data using a plurality ofantennas.

For example, the base station (AP) includes the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 in order to transmit a plurality of modulatedsignals including a plurality of streams of data using a plurality ofantennas. Moreover, the base station (AP) includes, as the configurationof signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 , a configurationillustrated in any one of FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21, FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG.33 .

The following will describe a case in which the transmission devicedescribed above implements phase change on at least one modulated signalafter precoding. In this embodiment, the base station (AP) is capableswitching between implementing and not implementing a phase change,based on a control signal. Accordingly, the following holds true.

<When Phase Change is Implemented>

The base station (AP) implements a phase change on at least onemodulated signal. A plurality of modulated signals are transmitted froma plurality of antennas (note that the transmission method ofimplementing a phase change on at least one modulated signal andtransmitting a plurality of modulated signals using a plurality ofantennas is as described in the plurality of embodiments according tothe present specification).

<When Phase Change is not Implemented>

The base station (AP) performs precoding (weighting synthesis) describedin the present specification on a plurality of streams of modulatedsignals (baseband signals), and transmits the generated plurality ofmodulated signals using a plurality of antennas (here, a phase change isnot implemented). However, as described above in the presentspecification, the precoder (weighting synthesizer) is not required toperform precoding, and a configuration in which precoding is neverperformed and a precoder (weighting synthesizer) is not included is alsoacceptable.

Note that the base station (AP) transmits control information fornotifying the terminal, which is the communication partner, whether ornot phase change is to be implemented, using a preamble, for example.

FIG. 34 illustrates one example of a system configuration in a state inwhich base station (AP) 3401 and terminal 3402 are communicating.

As illustrated in FIG. 34 , base station (AP) 3401 transmits a modulatedsignal and terminal 3402, which is the communication partner, receivesthe modulated signal. Terminal 3402 then transmits a modulated signal,and base station 3401, which is the communication partner, receives themodulated signal.

FIG. 35 illustrates one example of communication between base station(AP) 3401 and terminal 3402.

In FIG. 35 , (A) illustrates the temporal state of a signal transmittedby base station (AP) 3401. Time is represented on the horizontal axis.In FIG. 35 , (B) illustrates the temporal state of a signal transmittedby terminal 3402. Time is represented on the horizontal axis.

First, base station (AP) 3401 transmits transmission request 3501including requested information indicating a request to transmit amodulated signal, for example.

Terminal 3402 receives transmission request 3501 transmitted by basestation (AP) 3401, which is requested information indicating a requestto transmit a modulated signal, and, for example, transmits receptioncapability notification symbol 3502 including information indicating thereception ability of terminal 3402 (or a receivable scheme).

Base station (AP) 3401 receives reception capability notification symbol3502 transmitted by terminal 3402, and based on the information includedin reception capability notification symbol 3502, determines an errorcorrection encoding method, modulation scheme (or modulation schemeset), and a transmission method, and transmits modulated signal 3503that includes, for example, data symbols, and is generated by mappingand implementing other signal processing (such as precoding, phasechange) on information (data) to be transmitted within the errorcorrection encoding and modulation scheme, based on the determinedschemes and methods.

Note that, for example, data symbols 3503 may include a controlinformation symbol. In such a case, when transmitting the data symbolsusing a transmission method of transmitting a plurality of modulatedsignals including a plurality of streams of data using a plurality ofantennas, a control symbol may be transmitted that includes informationfor notifying the communication partner of whether a phase change wasimplemented on at least one modulated signal or not (this allows thecommunication partner to easily change demodulation methods).

Terminal 3402 obtains data upon receiving, for example, data symbols3503 transmitted by base station 3401.

FIG. 36 illustrates an example of data included in reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502 transmitted by the terminal illustrated in FIG.35 .

FIG. 36 illustrates data 3601 indicating information relating to supportfor demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes, and data 3602indicating information relating to reception directionality controlsupport.

Note that in data 3601 indicating information relating to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes, “supported”indicates, for example, the following state.

“Demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes is supported”means, when base station (AP) 3401 applies a phase change to at leastone modulated signal and a plurality of modulated signals aretransmitted using a plurality of antennas (note that the transmissionmethod of implementing a phase change on at least one modulated signaland transmitting a plurality of modulated signals using a plurality ofantennas is as described in the plurality of embodiments according tothe present specification), terminal 3402 can receive and demodulate themodulated signals (in other words, demodulation taking intoconsideration phase change can be performed to obtain data).

In data 3601 indicating information relating to support for demodulationof modulated signals with phase changes, “not supported” indicates, forexample, the following state.

“Demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes is not supported”means, when base station (AP) 3401 applies a phase change to at leastone modulated signal and a plurality of modulated signals aretransmitted using a plurality of antennas (note that the transmissionmethod of implementing a phase change on at least one modulated signaland transmitting a plurality of modulated signals using a plurality ofantennas is as described in the plurality of embodiments according tothe present specification), even if terminal 3402 receives the modulatedsignals, demodulation of the modulated signals is not possible (in otherwords, demodulation taking into consideration phase change cannot beperformed).

For example, when terminal 3402 supports phase change, as describedabove, data 3601 indicating information relating to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes is set to “0”, andterminal 3402 transmits reception capability notification symbol 3502.Moreover, when terminal 3402 does not support phase change, as describedabove, data 3601 indicating information relating to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes is set to “1”, andterminal 3402 transmits reception capability notification symbol 3502.

Then, base station (AP) 3401 receives data 3601 transmitted by terminal3402 indicating information relating to support for demodulation ofmodulated signals with phase changes. When the reception indicates“supported” with regard to phase change (in other words, “0” is receivedas data 3601 indicating information relating to support for demodulationof modulated signals with phase changes) and base station (AP) 3401determines to transmit a plurality of streams of modulated signals usinga plurality of antennas, base station (AP) 3401 may transmit themodulated signals using either <method #1> or <method #2> describedbelow. Alternatively, base station (AP) 3401 transmits the modulatedsignals using <method #2>.

<Method #1>

Base station (AP) 3401 performs precoding (weighting synthesis)described in the present specification on a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals (baseband signals), and transmits the generatedplurality of modulated signals using a plurality of antennas (here, aphase change is not implemented). However, as described in the presentspecification, the precoder (weighting synthesizer) need not perform aprecoding process.

<Method #2>

Base station (AP) 3401 implements a phase change on at least onemodulated signal. A plurality of modulated signals are transmitted froma plurality of antennas (note that the transmission method ofimplementing a phase change on at least one modulated signal andtransmitting a plurality of modulated signals using a plurality ofantennas is as described in the plurality of embodiments according tothe present specification).

Here, what is important is that <method #2> is included as atransmission method selectable by base station (AP) 3401. Accordingly,base station (AP) 3401 may transmit modulated signals using a methodother than

<Method #1> and <Method #2>.

Then, base station (AP) 3401 receives data 3601 transmitted by terminal3402 indicating information relating to support for demodulation ofmodulated signals with phase changes. When the reception indicates “notsupported” with regard to phase change (in other words, “1” is receivedas data 3601 indicating information relating to support for demodulationof modulated signals with phase changes) and base station (AP) 3401determines to transmit a plurality of streams of modulated signals usinga plurality of antennas, base station (AP) 3401 may transmit themodulated signals using <method #1>.

Here, <method #2> is not included as a transmission method selectable bybase station (AP) 3401. Accordingly, base station (AP) 3401 may transmitmodulated signals using a transmission method that is different from<method #1> and is not <method #2>.

Note that reception capability notification symbol 3502 may include dataindicating information other than data 3601 indicating informationrelating to support for demodulation of modulated signals with phasechanges. For example, the reception device of terminal 3402 may includedata 3602 indicating information relating to reception directionalitycontrol support. Accordingly, the configuration of reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502 is not limited to the configuration illustratedin FIG. 36 .

For example, when base station (AP) 3401 includes a function oftransmitting a modulated signal using a method other than <method #1>and <method #2>, the reception device in terminal 3402 may include dataindicating information relating to support of that method other than<method #1> and <method #2>.

For example, when terminal 3402 can perform reception directionalitycontrol, “0” is set as data 3602 indicating information relating toreception directionality control support. When terminal 3402 cannotperform reception directionality control, “1” is set as data 3602indicating information relating to reception directionality controlsupport.

Terminal 3402 transmits information on data 3602 relating to receptiondirectionality control support. Base station (AP) 3401 receives thisinformation, and when it is determined that terminal 3402 supportsreception directionality control, base station (AP) 3401 and terminal3402 transmits, for example, a training symbol, reference symbol, and/orcontrol information symbol for reception directionality control forterminal 3402.

FIG. 37 illustrates an example of data included in reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502 transmitted by the terminal illustrated in FIG.35 , different from the example illustrated in FIG. 36 . Note thatcomponents that perform the same operations as in FIG. 36 share likereference numerals. Accordingly, since data 3601 indicating informationrelating to support for demodulation of modulated signals with phasechanges in FIG. 37 has already been described, repeated description willbe omitted.

Next, data 3702 indicating information relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 37 will be described.

In data 3702 indicating information relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams, “supported” indicates, for example, thefollowing state. When base station (AP) 3401 that supports reception fora plurality of streams transmits a plurality of modulated signals from aplurality of antennas to transmit a plurality of streams, this means theterminal can receive and demodulate the plurality of modulated signalstransmitted by the base station. However, for example, when base station(AP) 3401 transmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality ofantennas, whether a phase change has been implemented or not is notdistinguished. In other words, when base station (AP) 3401 defines aplurality of transmission methods for transmitting a plurality ofmodulated signals from a plurality of antennas to transmit a pluralityof streams, the terminal may depend on at least one transmission methodwith which demodulation is possible.

In data 3702 indicating information relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams, “not supported” indicates, for example, thefollowing state.

When base station (AP) 3401 does not support reception for a pluralityof streams and a plurality of transmission methods are defined astransmission methods for transmitting, from a plurality of antennas, aplurality of modulated signals for transmitting a plurality of streams,terminal 3402 cannot demodulate the modulated signals even iftransmitted by base station using any one of the transmission methods.

For example, when terminal 3402 supports reception for a plurality ofstreams, data 3702 relating to support for reception for a plurality ofstreams is set to “0”. When the terminal (3402) does not supportreception for a plurality of streams, data 3702 relating to support forreception for a plurality of streams is set to “1”.

Accordingly, when terminal 3402 has data 3702 relating to support forreception for a plurality of streams set to “0”, data 3601 relating tosupport for demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes isvalid, and in such a case, base station (AP) 3401 determines thetransmission method to use to transmit data based on data 3601 relatingto support for demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes anddata 3702 relating to support for reception for a plurality of streams.

When terminal 3402 has data 3702 relating to support for reception for aplurality of streams set to “1”, data 3601 indicating informationrelating to support for demodulation of modulated signals with phasechanges is null, and in such a case, base station (AP) 3401 determinesthe transmission method to use to transmit data based on data 3702relating to support for reception for a plurality of streams.

With this, as a result of terminal 3402 transmitting receptioncapability notification symbol 3502 and base station (AP) 3401determining a transmission method to use to transmit data based on thissymbol, there is an advantageous point that data can be actuallytransmitted to the terminal (since it is possible to reduce instances inwhich data is transmitted using a transmission method via whichdemodulation cannot be performed by terminal 3402), and, accordingly, anadvantages effect that data transfer efficiency of base station (AP)3401 can be improved.

Moreover, when data 3601 indicating information relating to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes is present asreception capability notification symbol 3502 and terminal 3402 thatsupports demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes and basestation (AP) 3401 communicate, base station (AP) 3401 can accurateselect the mode “transmit modulated signal using transmission methodthat implements a phase change”, whereby an advantageous effect thatterminal 3402 can obtain a high reception quality even in an environmentin which direct waves are dominant can be achieved. Moreover, when aterminal that does not support the demodulation of modulated signalswith phase changes and base station (AP) 3401 communicate, base station(AP) 3401 can accurately select a transmission method via whichreception is possible by terminal 3402, which makes it possible toachieve an advantageous effect that it is possible to improve datatransfer efficiency.

Note that in FIG. 35 , (A) illustrates a signal transmitted by basestation (AP) 3401 and (B) illustrates a signal transmitted by terminal3402, but these examples are not limiting. For example, (A) in FIG. 35may illustrate a signal transmitted by terminal 3402 and (B) mayillustrate a signal transmitted by base station (AP) 3401.

Moreover, in FIG. 35 , (A) may illustrate a signal transmitted byterminal #1 and (B) may illustrate a signal transmitted by terminal #2.In other words, FIG. 35 may illustrate communication between terminals.

Moreover, in FIG. 35 , (A) may illustrate a signal transmitted by basestation (AP) #1 and (B) may illustrate a signal transmitted by basestation (AP) #2. In other words, FIG. 35 may illustrate communicationbetween base stations (APs).

Note that these are non-limiting examples; communication betweencommunication devices is acceptable.

Moreover, the data symbol in the transmission of, for example, datasymbol 3503 in (A) in FIG. 35 may be a multi-carrier scheme signal suchas an OFDM signal, and may be a single-carrier scheme signal. Similarly,reception capability notification symbol 3502 in FIG. 35 may be amulti-carrier scheme signal such as an OFDM signal, and may be asingle-carrier scheme signal.

For example, when reception capability notification symbol 3502 in FIG.35 is a single-carrier scheme symbol, in the case of FIG. 35 , terminal3402 can achieve an advantageous effect that power consumption can bereduced.

Embodiment A2

Next, a different example will be given.

FIG. 38 illustrates an example of data included in reception capabilitynotification symbol (3502) transmitted by the terminal illustrated inFIG. 35 , different from the examples illustrated in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37. Note that components that perform the same operations as in FIG. 36and FIG. 37 share like reference numerals. Moreover, duplicatedescription of components that perform the same operations as in FIG. 36and FIG. 37 will be omitted.

First, data 3801 relating to “supported scheme” in FIG. 38 will bedescribed. Transmission of a modulated signal from the base station (AP)to the terminal and transmission of a modulated signal from the terminalto the base station (AP) in FIG. 34 are transmission of a modulatedsignal under a specific frequency (frequency band) communicationsscheme. Communications scheme #A and communications scheme #B areexamples of such a specific frequency (frequency band) communicationsscheme.

For example, data 3801 relating to “supported scheme” is 2-bit data.When the terminal supports only “communications scheme #A”, data 3801relating to “supported scheme” is set to “01” (when data 3801 relatingto “supported scheme” is set to “01”, even if the base station (AP)transmits a “communications scheme #B” modulated signal, the terminalcannot demodulate and obtain the data). When the terminal supports only“communications scheme #B”, data 3801 relating to “supported scheme” isset to “10” (when data 3801 relating to “supported scheme” is set to“10”, even if the base station (AP) transmits a “communications scheme#A” modulated signal, the terminal cannot demodulate and obtain thedata). When the terminal supports both communications scheme #A andcommunications scheme #B, data 3801 relating to “supported scheme” isset to “11”.

Note that communications scheme #A does not include support for a schemethat transmits a plurality of modulated signals including a plurality ofstreams using a plurality of antennas (there is no selection of “ascheme that transmits a plurality of modulated signals including aplurality of streams using a plurality of antennas” for communicationsscheme #A). Communications scheme #B does include support for a schemethat transmits a plurality of modulated signals including a plurality ofstreams using a plurality of antennas (selection of “a transmissionmethod that transmits a plurality of modulated signals including aplurality of streams using a plurality of antennas” for communicationsscheme #B is possible).

Next, data 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38 willbe described. “Single-carrier scheme” and “multi-carrier scheme such asOFDM” are selectable for communications scheme #A as a transmissionmethod for a modulated signal. Moreover, “single-carrier scheme” and“multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM” are selectable for communicationsscheme #B as a transmission method for a modulated signal.

For example, data 3802 relating to “multi-carrier scheme compatibility”is 2-bit data. When the terminal supports only “single-carrier scheme”,data 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support is set to “01” (whendata 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support is set to “01”, evenif the base station (AP) transmits a “multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM”modulated signal, the terminal cannot demodulate and obtain the data).When the terminal supports only “multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM”,data 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support is set to “10” (whendata 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support is set to “10”, evenif the base station (AP) transmits a “single-carrier scheme” modulatedsignal, the terminal cannot demodulate and obtain the data). When theterminal supports both a single-carrier scheme and a multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM, data 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme supportis set to “11”.

Next, data 3803 relating to “supported error correction encoding scheme”in FIG. 38 will be described. For example, “error correction encodingscheme #C” is an error correction encoding method that supports one ormore encode rates for a code length (block length) of c-bits (c is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 1), and “error correctionencoding scheme #D” is an error correction encoding method that supportsone or more encode rates for a code length (block length) of d-bits (dis an integer that is greater than or equal to 1; d is greater than c(d>c)). Note that the method that supports one or more encode rates maybe a method that uses a different error correction code for each encoderate, and may be a method that supports one or more encode rates viapuncturing. Moreover, a combination of these methods may be used forsupport with one or more encode rates.

Note that the only selectable choice for communications scheme #A iserror correction encoding scheme #C, whereas error correction encodingscheme #C and error correction encoding scheme #D are selectable choicesfor communications scheme #B.

For example, data 3803 relating to “supported error correction encodingscheme” is 2-bit data. When the terminal supports only “error correctionencoding scheme #C”, data 3803 relating to “supported error correctionencoding scheme” is set to “01” (when data 3803 relating to “supportederror correction encoding scheme” is set to “01”, even if the basestation (AP) uses error correction encoding scheme #D to generate andtransmit a modulated signal, the terminal cannot demodulate and decodethe modulated signal to obtain the data). When the terminal supportsonly “error correction encoding scheme #D”, data 3803 relating to“supported error correction encoding scheme” is set to “10” (when data3803 relating to “supported error correction encoding scheme” is set to“10”, even if the base station (AP) uses error correction encodingscheme #C to generate and transmit a modulated signal, the terminalcannot demodulate and decode the modulated signal to obtain the data).When the terminal supports both error correction encoding scheme #C anderror correction encoding scheme #D, data 3803 relating to “supportederror correction encoding scheme” is set to “11”.

The base station (AP) receives, for example, reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502 configured as illustrated in FIG. 38 andtransmitted by the terminal, and base station (AP) determines a methodfor generating a modulated signal including a data symbol for theterminal based on information in reception capability notificationsymbol 3502, and transmits a modulated signal to the terminal.

Next, the characteristic points in such a case will be described.

Example 1

When the terminal performs transmission when data 3801 relating to“supported scheme” is set to “01” (communications scheme #A), the basestation (AP) that receives this data determines that data 3803 relatingto “supported error correction encoding scheme” is null, and when thebase station (AP) generates the modulated signal for the terminal, errorcorrection encoding is performed using error correction encoding scheme#C (since “error correction encoding scheme #D” cannot be selected incommunications scheme #A).

Example 21

When the terminal performs transmission when data 3801 relating to“supported scheme” is set to “01” (communications scheme #A), the basestation (AP) that receives this data determines that data 3601 relatingto support for demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes anddata 3702 relating to support for reception for a plurality of streamsare null, and when the base station (AP) generates the modulated signalfor the terminal, a single stream of a modulated signal is generated andtransmitted (since “a scheme that transmits a plurality of modulatedsignals including a plurality of streams using a plurality of antennas”is not supported in communications scheme #A).

In addition to the above examples, for example, consider a case in whichthe following constraints are in place.

[Constraint Condition 1]

In “communications scheme #B”, with a single-carrier scheme, in “ascheme that transmits a plurality of modulated signals including aplurality of streams using a plurality of antennas”, a scheme in which“among a plurality of modulated signals, a phase change is implementedon at least one modulated signal” is not supported (but another schememay be supported). Additionally, in a multi-carrier scheme such as anOFDM scheme, at least a scheme in which “among a plurality of modulatedsignals, a phase change is implemented on at least one modulated signal”is supported (but another scheme may be supported).

The following applies in such a case.

Example 3

When the terminal performs transmission under when “data 3802 relatingto multi-carrier scheme support is set to “01” (single-carrier scheme)”,the base station (AP) that receives this data determines that data 3601relating to support for demodulation of modulated signals with phasechanges is null, and when the base station (AP) generates the modulatedsignal for the terminal, the base station (AP) does not use the schemein which “among a plurality of modulated signals, a phase change isimplemented on at least one modulated signal”.

Note that FIG. 38 is one example of a “reception capability notificationsymbol” (3502) that is transmitted by the terminal. As described withreference to FIG. 38 , when the terminal transmits information on aplurality of reception abilities (for example, 3601, 3702, 3801, 3802,and 3803 in FIG. 38 ), when the base station (AP) determines a methodfor generating the modulated signal for the terminal based on a“reception capability notification symbol” (3502), there are cases inwhich the base station (AP) is required to determine whether a portionof the information on the plurality of reception abilities is null ornot. Taking this into consideration, when the terminal bundles andtransfers the information on the plurality of reception abilities as a“reception capability notification symbol” (3502), the base station (AP)can achieve an advantageous effect in which the generation of themodulated signal for the terminal can be determined easily, with lowdelay.

Embodiment A3

In this embodiment, an operational example in which a single-carrierscheme is implemented in an embodiment described in the presentspecification will be given.

FIG. 39 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of transmissionsignal 106_A illustrated in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 39 , time is represented onthe horizontal axis. The frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 39 isan example of a frame configuration when a single-carrier scheme isused. Symbols are present along the time axis. In FIG. 39 , symbols fromtime t1 to t22 are shown.

Preamble 3901 in FIG. 39 corresponds to preamble signal 252 in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 28 , FIG.29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 . Here, a preamble maytransmit data (for control purposes), and may be configured as, forexample, a symbol for signal detection, a signal for performingfrequency and time synchronization, a symbol for performing channelestimation, or a symbol for frame synchronization (a symbol forperforming propagation path fluctuation estimation).

Control information symbol 3902 in FIG. 39 is a symbol that correspondsto control information symbol signal 253 in, for example, FIG. 2 , FIG.18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31, FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , and is a symbol including control informationfor realizing demodulation and decoding of data symbols by the receptiondevice that received the frame illustrated in FIG. 39 .

Pilot symbol 3904 illustrated in FIG. 39 is a symbol corresponding topilot signal 251A (pa(t)) such as in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG.20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33. Pilot symbol 3904 is, for example, a PSK symbol, and is used by thereception device that receives the frame for, for example, channelestimation (propagation path variation estimation), frequency offsetestimation, and phase variation estimation. For example, thetransmission device illustrated in FIG. 1 and the reception device thatreceives the frame illustrated in FIG. 39 may share the pilot symboltransmission method.

3903 in FIG. 39 is a data symbol for transmitting data.

Note that mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1 ) isreferred to as “stream #1” and mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2in FIG. 1 ) is referred to as “stream #2”.

Data symbol 3903 is a symbol corresponding to a data symbol included inbaseband signal 208A generated by signal processing illustrated in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 28 , FIG.29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 . Accordingly, datasymbol 3903 is either (i) a symbol including both the symbol “stream #1”and the symbol “stream #2”, or (ii) either one of symbol “stream #1” andthe symbol “stream #2”. This is determined by the precoding matrixconfiguration used by weighting synthesizer 203 (in other words, datasymbol 3903 corresponds to weighting synthesized signal 204A (z1(t))).

Note that, although not illustrated in FIG. 39 , the frame may includesymbols other than a preamble, control information symbol, data symbol,and pilot symbol. Moreover, not each of preamble 3901, controlinformation symbol 3902, and pilot symbol 3904 need be present in theframe.

For example, in FIG. 39 , the transmission device transmits preamble3901 at time t1, transmits control information symbol 3902 at time t2,transmits data symbols 3903 from time t3 to time t11, transmits pilotsymbol 3904 at time t12, transmits data symbols 3903 from time t13 totime t21, and transmits pilot symbol 3904 at time t22.

FIG. 40 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of transmissionsignal 106_B illustrated in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 40 , time is represented onthe horizontal axis. The frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 40 isan example of a frame configuration when a single-carrier scheme isused. Symbols are present along the time axis. In FIG. 40 , symbols fromtime t1 to t22 are shown.

Preamble 4001 in FIG. 40 corresponds to preamble signal 252 in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 28 , FIG.29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 . Here, a preamble maytransmit data (for control purposes), and may be configured as, forexample, a symbol for signal detection, a signal for performingfrequency and time synchronization, a symbol for performing channelestimation, or a symbol for frame synchronization (a symbol forperforming propagation path fluctuation estimation).

Control information symbol 1102 in FIG. 40 is a symbol that correspondsto control information symbol signal 253 in, for example, FIG. 2 , FIG.18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31, FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , and is a symbol including control informationfor realizing demodulation and decoding of data symbols by the receptiondevice that received the frame illustrated in FIG. 40 .

Pilot symbol 4004 illustrated in FIG. 40 is a symbol corresponding topilot signal 251B (pb(t)) such as in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG.20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33. Pilot symbol 4004 is, for example, a PSK symbol, and is used by thereception device that receives the frame for, for example, channelestimation (propagation path variation estimation), frequency offsetestimation, and phase variation estimation. For example, thetransmission device illustrated in FIG. 1 and the reception device thatreceives the frame illustrated in FIG. 40 may share the pilot symboltransmission method.

4003 in FIG. 40 is a data symbol for transmitting data.

Note that mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1 ) isreferred to as “stream #1” and mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2in FIG. 1 ) is referred to as “stream #2”.

Data symbol 4003 is a symbol corresponding to a data symbol included inbaseband signal 208B generated by signal processing illustrated in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 28 , FIG.29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 . Accordingly, datasymbol 4003 is either (i) a symbol including both the symbol “stream #1”and the symbol “stream #2”, or (ii) either one of symbol “stream #1” andthe symbol “stream #2”. This is determined by the precoding matrixconfiguration used by weighting synthesizer 203 (in other words, datasymbol 4003 corresponds to phase-changed signal 206B (z2(t))).

Note that, although not illustrated in FIG. 40 , the frame may includesymbols other than a preamble, control information symbol, data symbol,and pilot symbol. Moreover, not each of preamble 4001, controlinformation symbol 4002, and pilot symbol 4004 need be present in theframe.

For example, in FIG. 40 , the transmission device transmits preamble4001 at time t1, transmits control information symbol 4002 at time t2,transmits data symbols 4003 from time t3 to time t11, transmits pilotsymbol 4004 at time t12, transmits data symbols 4003 from time t13 totime t21, and transmits pilot symbol 4004 at time t22.

When a symbol is present at time tp in FIG. 39 and a symbol is presentat time tp in FIG. 40 (where p is an integer that is greater than orequal to 1), the symbol at time tp in FIG. 39 and the symbol at time tpin FIG. 40 are transmitted at the same time and same frequency or at thesame time and same frequency band. For example, the data symbol at timet3 in FIG. 39 and the data symbol at time t3 in FIG. 40 are transmittedat the same time and at the same frequency, or at the same time and atthe same frequency band. Note that the frame configuration is notlimited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 ; FIG.39 and FIG. 40 are mere examples of frame configurations.

Moreover, a method in which the preamble and control information symbolin FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 transmit the same data (same control information)may be used.

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 39 and theframe of FIG. 40 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 39 or the frame of FIG. 40 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Note that a combination of the single-carrier scheme transmissionmethod, transmission device described in this embodiment and theembodiments described in the specification may be implemented.

Embodiment A4

In this embodiment, using the example described in Embodiment A2, anoperational example of the terminal will be given.

FIG. 24 illustrates one example of a configuration of a terminal. Asthis example has already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

FIG. 41 illustrates one example of a configuration of reception device2404 in the terminal illustrated in FIG. 24 . Radio unit 4103 receivesan input of reception signal 4102 received by antenna unit 4101,performs processing such as frequency conversion, and outputs basebandsignal 4104.

Control information decoder 4107 receives an input of baseband signal4104, demodulates the control information symbol, and outputs controlinformation 4108.

Channel estimator 4105 receives an input of baseband signal 4104,extracts preamble and pilot symbol, performs channel fluctuationestimation, and outputs channel estimation signal 4106.

Signal processor 4109 receives inputs of baseband signal 4104, channelestimation signal 4106, and control information 4108, demodulates andperforms error correction decoding on a data symbol based on controlinformation 4108, and outputs reception data 4110.

FIG. 42 illustrates an example of a frame configuration upon singlemodulated signal transmission by a base station or AP, which is thecommunication partner of the terminal, using a multi-carriertransmission scheme such as OFDM. In FIG. 42 , components that operatethe same as in FIG. 4 share like reference marks.

In FIG. 42 , frequency is represented on the horizontal axis, andsymbols for carrier 1 through carrier 36 are shown in FIG. 42 .Moreover, in FIG. 42 , time is represented on the vertical axis, andsymbols for time $1 through time $11 are shown.

For example, the transmission device in the base station illustrated inFIG. 1 may transmit a single stream modulated signal having the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 42 .

FIG. 43 illustrates an example of a frame configuration upon singlemodulated signal transmission by a base station or AP, which is thecommunication partner of the terminal, using a single-carriertransmission scheme. In FIG. 43 , components that operate the same as inFIG. 39 share like reference marks.

In FIG. 43 , time is represented on the horizontal axis, and symbolsfrom time t1 to time t22 are shown in FIG. 43 .

For example, the transmission device in the base station illustrated inFIG. 1 may transmit a single stream modulated signal having the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 43 .

For example, the transmission device in the base station illustrated inFIG. 1 may transmit a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals having the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 and/or FIG.5 .

Furthermore, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 may transmit a plurality of streams of a pluralityof modulated signals having the frame configuration illustrated in FIG.39 and/or FIG. 40 .

The reception device of the terminal has the configuration illustratedin FIG. 41 . For example, the reception device of the terminal supportsthe following.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, even if the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of a plurality of modulated signals, the terminal does notsupport reception of such.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofa plurality of modulated signals and phase change is implemented, theterminal does not support reception of such.

The terminal supports only single-carrier schemes.

The terminal supports only decoding of “error correction encoding scheme#C” as an error correction encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A is supported from supported scheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3601 relating to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 38 beingnull and communications scheme #A being supported, control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station determines to not transmit aphase-changed modulated signal, and outputs control signal 2309including such information. This is because communications scheme #Adoes not support transmission or reception of a plurality of modulatedsignals for a plurality of streams.

Based on information 3702 relating to support for reception for aplurality of streams in FIG. 38 being null and communications method #Abeing supported, control signal generator 2308 in the base stationdetermines to not transmit a phase-changed modulated signal, and outputscontrol signal 2309 including such information. This is becausecommunications scheme #A does not support transmission or reception of aplurality of modulated signals for a plurality of streams.

Based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 being null and communications method #A beingsupported, control signal generator 2308 in the base station determinesto use error correction encoding scheme #C, and outputs control signal2309 including such information. This is because communications scheme#A supports error correction encoding scheme #C.

For example, as illustrated in FIG. 41 , since this is supported bycommunications method #A, the above-described operations are performedso that the base station or AP does not transmit a plurality ofmodulated signals for a plurality of streams, whereby the base stationor AP can achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datatransmission efficiency in the system including the base station or APand terminal, due to the communications method #A modulated signal beingaccurately transmitted.

As a second example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 41 , and supports the following.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #B” described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, since the reception device has the configurationillustrated in FIG. 41 , even if the communication partner transmits aplurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals, the terminaldoes not support reception of such.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofa plurality of modulated signals and phase change is implemented, theterminal does not support reception of such.

The terminal supports a single-carrier scheme and a multi-carrier schemesuch as OFDM.

The terminal supports decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C”,“error correction encoding scheme #D” as an error correction encodingscheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 that supports the abovetransmits reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #B is supported from supported scheme 3801.

Moreover, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams illustrated in FIG. 38 , control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station knows that the terminal, which is thecommunication partner, cannot demodulate the plurality of modulatedsignals for the plurality of streams.

Accordingly, based on information 3601 relating to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 38 beingnull, control information signal generator 2308 in the base stationdetermines to not transmit a phase-changed modulated signal, and outputscontrol signal 2309 including such information. This is because theterminal does not support “reception for a plurality of streams”.

Based on information 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support inFIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the base station outputscontrol signal 2309 including information indicating that the terminal,which is the communication partner, supports a multi-carrier schemeand/or a single-carrier scheme.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation outputs control signal 2309 including information indicatingthat the terminal, which is the communication partner, supports errorcorrection encoding scheme #C and/or error correction encoding scheme#D.

Accordingly, the above-described operations are performed so that thebase station or AP does not transmit a plurality of modulated signalsfor a plurality of streams, whereby the base station or AP can achievean advantageous effect of an improvement in data transmission efficiencyin the system including the base station or AP and terminal, due to thesingle stream modulated signal being accurately transmitted.

As a third example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 41 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

The reception device of the terminal supports reception under“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B” described inEmbodiment A2.

Accordingly, even if the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of a plurality of modulated signals using either one of“communications scheme #A” or “communications scheme #B”, the terminaldoes not support reception of such.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofa plurality of modulated signals and phase change is implemented, theterminal does not support reception of such.

Single-carrier schemes are supported in either one of “communicationsscheme #A” or “communications scheme #B”.

Regarding error correction encoding schemes, the terminal supportsdecoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C” as “communicationsscheme #A”, and “error correction encoding scheme #C” and “errorcorrection encoding scheme #D” as “communications scheme #B”.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from the reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Moreover, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams illustrated in FIG. 38 , control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station knows that the terminal does notsupport reception for a plurality of streams.

Accordingly, based on information 3601 relating to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 38 beingnull and communications scheme #A being supported, control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station determines to not transmit aphase-changed modulated signal, and outputs control signal 2309including such information. This is because terminal A does not supporttransmission or reception of a plurality of modulated signals for aplurality of streams.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows whether theterminal supports a single-carrier scheme and knows whether the terminalsupports a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM from information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38 .

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the above-described operations are performed so that thebase station or AP does not transmit a plurality of modulated signalsfor a plurality of streams, whereby the base station or AP can achievean advantageous effect of an improvement in data transmission efficiencyin the system including the base station or AP and terminal, due to thesingle stream modulated signal being accurately transmitted.

As a fourth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 41 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

The reception device of the terminal supports reception under“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B” described inEmbodiment A2.

Accordingly, even if the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of a plurality of modulated signals using either one of“communications scheme #A” or “communications scheme #B”, the terminaldoes not support reception of such.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofa plurality of modulated signals and phase change is implemented, theterminal does not support reception of such.

The terminal supports a single-carrier scheme as “communications scheme#A”, and supports both a single-carrier scheme and a multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM as “communications scheme #B”.

Regarding error correction encoding schemes, the terminal supportsdecoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C” as “communicationsscheme #A”, and “error correction encoding scheme #C” and “errorcorrection encoding scheme #D” as “communications scheme #B”.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from the reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Moreover, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams illustrated in FIG. 38 , control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station knows that the terminal does notsupport reception for a plurality of streams.

Accordingly, based on information 3601 relating to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 38 beingnull and communications scheme #A being supported, control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station determines to not transmit aphase-changed modulated signal, and outputs control signal 2309including such information. This is because terminal A does not supporttransmission or reception of a plurality of modulated signals for aplurality of streams.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows whether theterminal supports a single-carrier scheme and knows whether the terminalsupports a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM from information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38 .

Here, information 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support isrequired to have a configuration such as the following.

Information 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support is 4-bitinformation, and the 4 bits are expressed as g0, g1, g2, and g3.

When the terminal supports single-carrier demodulation forcommunications scheme #A, (g0, g1)=(0, 0) is transmitted, when theterminal supports multi-carrier scheme demodulation such as OFDM forcommunications scheme #A, (g0, g1)=(0, 1) is transmitted, and when theterminal supports single-carrier demodulation and multi-carrier schemedemodulation such as OFDM for communications scheme #A, (g0, g1)=(1, 1)is transmitted.

When the terminal supports single-carrier demodulation forcommunications scheme #B, (g2, g3)=(0, 0) is transmitted, when theterminal supports multi-carrier scheme demodulation such as OFDM forcommunications scheme #B, (g2, g3)=(0, 1) is transmitted, and when theterminal supports single-carrier demodulation and multi-carrier schemedemodulation such as OFDM for communications scheme #B, (g2, g3)=(1, 1)is transmitted.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the above-described operations are performed so that thebase station or AP does not transmit a plurality of modulated signalsfor a plurality of streams, whereby the base station or AP can achievean advantageous effect of an improvement in data transmission efficiencyin the system including the base station or AP and terminal, due to thesingle stream modulated signal being accurately transmitted.

As a fifth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”, even if the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals, the terminal supports reception of such. Moreover, in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals and phase change is implemented, the terminal supportsreception of such.

The terminal supports only single-carrier schemes.

The terminal supports only decoding of “error correction encoding scheme#C” as an error correction encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from the reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that in “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such and in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows that theterminal supports demodulation of modulated signals with phase changesbased on information 3601 relating to support for demodulation ofmodulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 38 .

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports only single-carrier schemes based on information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38 .

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a sixth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”, even if the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals, the terminal supports reception of such. Moreover, in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

When the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals and phase change is implemented, the terminal does notsupport reception of such.

Only single-carrier scheme is supported.

The terminal supports decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C”and decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #D” as an errorcorrection encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from the reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that in “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such and in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows that theterminal does not support demodulation of modulated signals with phasechanges based on information 3601 relating to support for demodulationof modulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 38 . Accordingly, thebase station or AP transmits a modulated signal without implementing aphase change upon transmission of a plurality of streams of modulatedsignals to the terminal.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports only single-carrier schemes based on information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38 .

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and decoding of error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a seventh example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”, even if the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals, the terminal supports reception of such. Moreover, in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

The terminal supports a single-carrier scheme as “communications scheme#A”, and supports both a single-carrier scheme and a multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM as “communications scheme #B”. However, only in thecase of a communications scheme #B multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM,implementation of a phase change by the communication partner upontransmitting a plurality of streams of modulated signals is possible.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals and phase change is implemented, the terminal supportsreception of such.

The terminal supports decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C”and decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #D” as an errorcorrection encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2 and thisembodiment, a terminal having the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8that supports the above generates reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and, for example, transmits receptioncapability notification symbol 3502 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from the reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that in “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such and in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows that theterminal does not support demodulation of modulated signals with phasechanges based on information 3601 relating to support for demodulationof modulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 38 . Accordingly, thebase station or AP transmits a modulated signal without implementing aphase change upon transmission of a plurality of streams of modulatedsignals to the terminal. Note that as described above, when the terminalobtains information indicating “demodulation of modulated signals withphase changes is supported” from information 3601 relating to “supportfor demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes”, the terminalunderstands that this is only when the scheme is “communications scheme#B”.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports single-carrier schemes as “communications scheme #A”and supports single-carrier schemes and multi-carrier schemes such asOFDM as “communications scheme #B” based on information 3802 relating tomulti-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38 (here, as described above, aconfiguration is acceptable in which the terminal notifies statusregarding (i) support of a single-carrier scheme of “communicationsscheme #A” and support of a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM, and (ii)support of a single-carrier scheme of “communications scheme #B” andsupport of a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM to the base station orAP).

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and decoding of error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As an eighth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”, even if the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals, the terminal supports reception of such. Moreover, in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Accordingly, in a single-carrier scheme of “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams of aplurality of modulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such.However, in a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM of “communicationsscheme #B”, even if the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of a plurality of modulated signals, the terminal does notsupport reception of such. Moreover, in the case of a single-carrierscheme of “communications scheme #A”, when the communication partnertransmits a single stream, the terminal supports reception of such (butdoes not support reception of a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM).

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals and phase change is implemented, the terminal supportsreception of such.

The terminal supports decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C”and decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #D” as an errorcorrection encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from the reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Moreover, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that even when the base station transmits aplurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals, the terminalsupports reception of such in the case of a single-carrier scheme of“communications scheme #B”, and that even when the base stationtransmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals,the terminal does not support reception of such in the case of amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM of “communications scheme #B”.Moreover, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that in “communications scheme #A” and“communications scheme #B”, even if the base station transmits a singlestream of a modulated signal, the terminal supports reception of such.

Here, information 3702 relating to support for reception for a pluralityof streams is required to have a configuration such as the following.

Information 3702 relating to support for reception for a plurality ofstreams is 2-bit information, and the 2 bits are expressed as h0 and h1.

In the case of a single-carrier scheme of “communications scheme #B”,when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals and the terminal supports demodulation, h0=1 istransmitted, and when the terminal does not support demodulation, h0=0is transmitted.

In the case of a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM of “communicationsscheme #B”, when the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of modulated signals and the terminal supports demodulation,h1=1 is transmitted, and when the terminal does not supportdemodulation, h1=0 is transmitted.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows that theterminal supports demodulation of modulated signals with phase changesbased on information 3601 relating to support for demodulation ofmodulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 38 .

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports only single-carrier schemes based on information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38 .

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a ninth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”, even if the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals, the terminal supports reception of such. Moreover, in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream of a modulated signal,the terminal supports reception of such.

In “communications scheme #B”, the base station or AP can transmit aplurality of modulated signals for a plurality of streams in the case ofa single-carrier scheme and a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM.However, only in the case of a communications scheme #B multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM, implementation of a phase change by thecommunication partner upon transmitting a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals is possible. Thus, when the communication partnertransmits a plurality of streams of modulated signals and phase changeis implemented, the terminal supports reception of such.

The terminal supports decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C”and decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #D” as an errorcorrection scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Based on information 3702 relating to support for reception for aplurality of streams in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in thebase station knows that in “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such, and in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Moreover, based on information 3802 relating to multi-carrier schemesupport in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the base stationknows whether the terminal supports a single-carrier scheme, supports amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM, or supports both a single-carrierscheme and a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM.

When the terminal supports a single-carrier scheme, upon control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station knowing this, control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station ignores information 3601 relating tosupport for demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes in FIG.38 , and this is interpreted as not supporting demodulation (since, inthe case of single-carrier scheme, phase-change is not supported). Whenthe terminal supports a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM or supportsboth a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM and a single-carrier scheme,based on information 3601 relating to support for demodulation ofmodulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 38 , control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station obtains information indicating thatthe terminal supports a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM or informationindicating that it is not.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and decoding of error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a tenth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”, even if the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals, the terminal supports reception of such. Moreover, in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

In “communications scheme #B”, the base station or AP can transmit aplurality of modulated signals for a plurality of streams in the case ofa single-carrier scheme and a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM.

Then, in the case of a single-carrier scheme, when the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of modulated signals, whetherto implement a phase change or not can be set, and in the case of amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM, when the communication partnertransmits a plurality of streams of modulated signals, whether toimplement a phase change or not can be set.

The terminal supports decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C”and decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #D” as an errorcorrection scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Based on information 3702 relating to support for reception for aplurality of streams in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in thebase station knows that in “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such, and in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Moreover, based on information 3802 relating to multi-carrier schemesupport in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the base stationknows whether the terminal supports a single-carrier scheme, supports amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM, or supports both a single-carrierscheme and a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows whether theterminal supports phase change, based on information 3601 relating tosupport for demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes in FIG.38 .

Here, information 3802 relating to support for demodulation of modulatedsignals with phase changes is required to have a configuration such asthe following.

Information 3802 relating to support for demodulation of modulatedsignals with phase changes is 2-bit information, and the 2 bits areexpressed as k0 and k1.

In the case of a single-carrier scheme of “communications scheme #B”,when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams for aplurality of modulated signals and a phase change has been implemented,when the terminal supports demodulation, k0=1 is transmitted, and whenthe terminal does not support demodulation, k0=0 is transmitted.

In the case of a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM of “communicationsscheme #B”, when the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams for a plurality of modulated signals and a phase change has beenimplemented, when the terminal supports demodulation, k1=1 istransmitted, and when the terminal does not support demodulation, k1=0is transmitted.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As described above, the base station or AP obtains, from the terminal,which is the communication partner of the base station or AP,information relating to a scheme in which demodulation is supported bythe terminal, and based on that information, determines the number ofmodulated signals, the communications method of the modulated signals,and the signal processing method of the modulated signals, for example,and as a result, the base station or AP can accurately generate andtransmit a modulated signal receivable by the terminal, which makes itpossible to achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datatransmission efficiency in the system including the base station or APand terminal.

Here, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 38 , by configuring areception capability notification symbol of a plurality of items ofinformation, the base station or AP can easily determine the validity ofinformation included in the reception capability notification symbol,and as a result, it is possible to rapidly determine, for example, amodulated signal scheme and signal processing method to be used fortransmission.

Then, based on information on the reception ability symbol transmittedby the terminals, the base station or AP can improve data transmissionefficiency by transmitting modulated signals to each terminal using asuitable transmission method.

Note that the method of configuring the information on the receptioncapability notification symbol described in this embodiment is merelyone non-limiting example. Moreover, the order in which and timing atwhich the terminal transmits the reception capability notificationsymbols to the base station or AP described in this embodiment aremerely non-limiting examples.

Embodiment A5

In the present specification, one example of a configuration of atransmission device, such as a base station, access point, broadcaststation, illustrated in FIG. 1 was described. In this embodiment,another example of a configuration of a transmission device, such as abase station, access point, broadcast station that is illustrated inFIG. 44 and different from FIG. 1 will be described.

In FIG. 44 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 1 share likereference marks. Accordingly, repeated description will be omitted. InFIG. 44 , the point of difference from FIG. 1 is the inclusion of aplurality of error correction encoders. In FIG. 44 , there are two errorcorrection encoders (note that the number of error correction encodersis not limited to one in the case of FIG. 1 or two in the case of FIG.44 ; for example, three or more may be provided, and the mapper may usethe data output by each of the error correction encoders to performmapping).

In FIG. 44 , error correction encoder 102_1 receives inputs of firstdata 101_1 and control signal 100, error correction encodes first data101_1 based on information on the error correction encoding methodincluded in control signal 100, and outputs encoded data 103_1.

Mapper 104_1 receives inputs of encoded data 103_1 and control signal100, and based on information on the modulation scheme included incontrol signal 100, performs mapping on encoded data 103_1, and outputsmapped signal 105_1.

Error correction encoder 102_1 receives inputs of second data 101_2 andcontrol signal 100, error correction encodes second data 101_2 based oninformation on the error correction encoding method included in controlsignal 100, and outputs encoded data 103_2.

Mapper 104_2 receives inputs of encoded data 103_2 and control signal100, and based on information on the modulation scheme included incontrol signal 100, performs mapping on encoded data 103_2, and outputsmapped signal 105_2.

Then, even when operations described in this embodiment are performedwith respect to the configuration of the transmission device illustratedin FIG. 44 , implementation just like in FIG. 1 is possible and the sameadvantageous effects are also obtainable.

Note that, for example, the transmission device such as a base station,AP, or broadcast station may switch between transmitting a modulatedsignal with the configuration illustrated in FIG. 1 and transmitting amodulated signal with the configuration illustrated in FIG. 44 .

Embodiment A6

Examples of configurations of signal processor 106 described withreference to, for example FIG. 1 , are illustrated in FIG. 20 , FIG. 21, and FIG. 22 . Next, an example of operations performed by phasechangers 205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , and FIG. 22 willbe given.

As described in Embodiment 4, the phase change value of phase changer205A is expressed as w(i), and the phase change value of phase changer205B is expressed as y(i). Here, z1(i) and z2(t) are expressed as inEquation (52). The phase change cycle of phase changer 205A is N, andthe phase change cycle of phase changer 205B is N. However, N is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 3. In other words, the numberof transmission streams or number of transmission modulated signals isan integer that is greater than 2. Here, phase change value w(i) andphase change value y(i) are applied as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.137} \right\rbrack &  \\{{w(i)} = e^{j({\frac{\pi \times i}{N} + \Delta})}} & {{Equation}(137)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.138} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y(i)} = e^{j({\frac{{- \pi} \times i}{N} + \Omega})}} & {{Equation}(138)}\end{matrix}$

Note that A in Equation (137) and Ω in Equation (138) are real numbers(in one extremely simple, non-limiting example, A and Ω are both zero).When set in this manner, the peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) ofsignal z1(t) (or z1(i)), and the PAPR of signal z2(t) (or z2(t)) in FIG.20 , FIG. 21 , and FIG. 22 is, in the case of a single-carrier scheme,are the same. Accordingly, the phase noise in radio unit 107_A and 108_Bin, for example, FIG. 1 , and the linear required criteria for thetransmission power unit are the same, which is advantageous since lowpower consumption is easily achievable and a common radio unitconfiguration can be used (note that there is a high probability thatthe same advantageous effects can be achieved when a multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM is used).

Phase changer w(i) and y(i) may be applied in the following manner.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.139} \right\rbrack &  \\{{w(i)} = e^{j({\frac{{- \pi} \times i}{N} + \Delta})}} & {{Equation}(139)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.140} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y(i)} = e^{j({\frac{\pi \times i}{N} + \Omega})}} & {{Equation}(140)}\end{matrix}$

Even when applied as in Equation (139) and Equation (140), the sameadvantageous effects as above can be achieved.

Phase changer w(i) and y(i) may be applied in the following manner.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.141} \right\rbrack &  \\{{w(i)} = e^{j({\frac{k \times \pi \times i}{N} + \Delta})}} & {{Equation}(141)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.142} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y(i)} = e^{j({\frac{{- k} \times \pi \times i}{N} + \Omega})}} & {{Equation}(142)}\end{matrix}$

Note that k is an integer other than 0 (for example, k may be 1, may be−1, may be 2, and may be −2; these are non-limiting examples). Even whenapplied as in Equation (141) and Equation (142), the same advantageouseffects as above can be achieved.

Embodiment A7

Examples of configurations of signal processor 106 described withreference to, for example FIG. 1 , are illustrated in FIG. 31 , FIG. 32, and FIG. 33. Next, an example of operations performed by phasechangers 205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 willbe given.

As described in Embodiment 7, in phase changer 205B, for example, aphase change of y(i) is applied to s2(t). Accordingly, whenphase-changed signal 2801B is expressed as s2′(i), s2′(i) can beexpressed as s2′(i)=y(i)×s2(t) (i is a symbol number (i is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0)).

In phase changer 205A, for example, a phase change of w(i) is applied tos1(t). Accordingly, when phase-changed signal 2901A is expressed ass1′(i), s1′(i) can be expressed as s1′(i)=w(i)×s1(i) (i is a symbolnumber (i is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0)). The phasechange cycle of phase changer 205A is N, and the phase change cycle ofphase changer 205B is N. However, N is an integer that is greater thanor equal to 3. In other words, the number of transmission streams ornumber of transmission modulated signals is an integer that is greaterthan 2. Here, phase change value w(i) and phase change value y(i) areapplied as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.143} \right\rbrack &  \\{{w(i)} = e^{j({\frac{\pi \times i}{N} + \Delta})}} & {{Equation}(143)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.144} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y(i)} = e^{j({\frac{{- \pi} \times i}{N} + \Omega})}} & {{Equation}(144)}\end{matrix}$

Note that A in Equation (143) and Ω in Equation (144) are real numbers(in one extremely simple, non-limiting example, A and Ω are both zero).When set in this manner, the peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) ofsignal z1(t) (or z1(i)), and the PAPR of signal z2(t) (or z2(t)) in FIG.31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 is, in the case of a single-carrier scheme,are the same. Accordingly, the phase noise in radio units 107_A and108_B in, for example, FIG. 1 , and the linear required criteria for thetransmission power unit are the same, which is advantageous since lowpower consumption is easily achievable and a common radio unitconfiguration can be used (note that there is a high probability thatthe same advantageous effects can be achieved when a multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM is used).

Phase changer w(i) and y(i) may be applied in the following manner.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.145} \right\rbrack &  \\{{w(i)} = e^{j({\frac{{- \pi} \times i}{N} + \Delta})}} & {{Equation}(145)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.146} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y(i)} = e^{j({\frac{\pi \times i}{N} + \Omega})}} & {{Equation}(146)}\end{matrix}$

Even when applied as in Equation (145) and Equation (146), the sameadvantageous effects as above can be achieved.

Phase changer w(i) and y(i) may be applied in the following manner.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.147} \right\rbrack &  \\{{w(i)} = e^{j({\frac{k \times \pi \times i}{N} + \Delta})}} & {{Equation}(147)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.148} \right\rbrack &  \\{{y(i)} = e^{j({\frac{{- k} \times \pi \times i}{N} + \Omega})}} & {{Equation}(148)}\end{matrix}$

Note that k is an integer other than 0 (for example, k may be 1, may be−1, may be 2, and may be −2; these are non-limiting examples). Even whenapplied as in Equation (147) and Equation (148), the same advantageouseffects as above can be achieved.

(Supplemental Information 5)

The embodiments of the present specification may be implemented formulti-carrier schemes such as OFDM and may be implemented forsingle-carrier schemes. Hereinafter, additional information will begiven for cases in which a single-carrier scheme is applied.

For example, in Embodiment 1, using, for example, Equation (1) toEquation (36) and FIG. 2 , or in other embodiments, using FIG. 18 toFIG. 22 and FIG. 28 to FIG. 33 , signal z1(i) and signal z2(t) (orsignal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)) are generated, and signal z1(i) andsignal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)) are transmitted fromthe transmission device at the same time and at the same frequency (samefrequency band). Note that i is a symbol number.

Here, for example, in cases in which a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDMis used, as described in Embodiments 1 through 6, signal z1(i) andsignal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)) are taken as functionsof a frequency (carrier number), functions of time and frequency, orfunctions of time, and, for example, are arranged as follows.

Signal z1(i) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)) arearranged along the frequency axis.

Signal z1(i) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)) arearranged along the time axis.

Signal z1(i) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)) arearranged along both the frequency and time axis.

Next, a specific example will be given.

FIG. 45 illustrates an example of a method of arranging symbols on thetime axis for signal z1(t) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signalz2′(i)).

In FIG. 45 , for example, zq(0) is shown. Here, q is 1 or 2.Accordingly, zq(0) in FIG. 45 indicates “in z1(i) and z2(t), when symbolnumber i=0, z1(0) and z2(0)”. Similarly, zq(1) indicates “in z1(i) andz2(t), when symbol number i=1, z1(1) and z2(1)” (in other words, zq(X)indicates “in z1(i) and z2(t), when symbol number i=X, z1(X) andz2(X)”). Note that this also applies to FIG. 46 , FIG. 47 , FIG. 48 ,FIG. 49 , and FIG. 50 .

As illustrated in FIG. 45 , symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at time 0, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1 is arranged attime 1, symbol zq(2) whose symbol number i=2 is arranged at time 2,symbol zq(3) whose symbol number i=3 is arranged at time 3, and so on.With this, symbols are arranged on the time axis for signal z1(i) andsignal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)). However, FIG. 45merely illustrates one example; the relationship between time and symbolnumber is not limited to this example.

FIG. 46 illustrates an example of a method of arranging symbols on thefrequency axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) andsignal z2′(i)).

As illustrated in FIG. 46 , symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at carrier 0, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1 is arrangedat carrier 1, symbol zq(2) whose symbol number i=2 is arranged atcarrier 2, symbol zq(3) whose symbol number i=3 is arranged at carrier3, and so on. With this, symbols are arranged on the frequency axis forsignal z1(i) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)).However, FIG. 46 merely illustrates one example; the relationshipbetween frequency and symbol number is not limited to this example.

FIG. 47 illustrates an example of a method of arranging symbols on thetime and frequency axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(t) (or signalz1′(i) and signal z2′(i)).

As illustrated in FIG. 47 , symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at time 0 and carrier 0, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1is arranged at time 0 and carrier 1, symbol zq(2) whose symbol numberi=2 is arranged at time 1 and carrier 0, symbol zq(3) whose symbolnumber i=3 is arranged at time 1 and carrier 1, and so on. With this,symbols are arranged on the time and frequency axis for signal z1(i) andsignal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)). However, FIG. 47merely illustrates one example; the relationship between time andfrequency and symbol number is not limited to this example.

FIG. 48 illustrates a second example of an arrangement symbols on thetime axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signalz2′(i)). As illustrated in FIG. 48 , symbol zq(0) whose symbol numberi=0 is arranged at time 0, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1 isarranged at time 16, symbol zq(2) whose symbol number i=2 is arranged attime 12, symbol zq(3) whose symbol number i=3 is arranged at time 5, andso on. With this, symbols are arranged on the time axis for signal z1(i)and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)). However, FIG. 48merely illustrates one example; the relationship between time and symbolnumber is not limited to this example.

FIG. 49 illustrates a second example of an arrangement symbols on thefrequency axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) andsignal z2′(i)).

As illustrated in FIG. 49 , symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at carrier 0, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1 is arrangedat carrier 16, symbol zq(2) whose symbol number i=2 is arranged atcarrier 12, symbol zq(3) whose symbol number i=3 is arranged at carrier5, and so on. With this, symbols are arranged on the frequency axis forsignal z1(t) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)).However, FIG. 49 merely illustrates one example; the relationshipbetween frequency and symbol number is not limited to this example.

FIG. 50 illustrates an example of an arrangement of symbols on the timeand frequency axis for signal z1(t) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i)and signal z2′(i)).

As illustrated in FIG. 50 , symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at time 1 and carrier 1, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1is arranged at time 3 and carrier 3, symbol zq(2) whose symbol numberi=2 is arranged at time 1 and carrier 0, symbol zq(3) whose symbolnumber i=3 is arranged at time 1 and carrier 3, and so on. With this,symbols are arranged on the time and frequency axis for signal z1(i) andsignal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)). However, FIG. 50merely illustrates one example; the relationship between time andfrequency and symbol number is not limited to this example.

Moreover, in cases where a single-carrier scheme is used, after signalz1(i) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)) aregenerated, symbols are arranged along the time axis. Accordingly, asdescribed above, signal z1(i) and signal z2(t) (or signal z1′(i) andsignal z2′(i)) are generated, symbols are arranged along the time axis,such as illustrated in FIG. 45 and FIG. 48 . However, FIG. 45 and FIG.48 merely illustrate examples; the relationship between time and symbolnumber is not limited to these examples.

Moreover, various frame configurations are described in the presentspecification. The modulated signals having a frame configurationdescribed in the present specification are transmitted by a base stationor AP using a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM. Here, when a terminalcommunicating with the base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal,the modulated signal to be transmitted by the terminal is preferably asingle-carrier scheme modulated signal (as a result of the base stationor AP using the OFDM scheme, it is possible to concurrently transmit adata symbol group to a plurality of terminals; moreover, as a result ofthe terminal using a single-carrier scheme, power consumption can bereduced).

Using part of a frequency band used by the modulated signal transmittedby the base station or AP, the terminal may implement a time divisionduplex (TDD) scheme for modulation scheme transmission.

In the present specification, phase changer 205A and/or phase changer205B are described as implementing a phase change.

Here, when the phase change cycle of phase changer 205A is expressed asNA, and NA is an integer that is greater than or equal to 3, that is tosay, the number of transmission streams or the number of modulatedsignals is an integer greater than 2, there is a high probability thatthe reception device in the communication partner can achieve abeneficial data reception quality.

Similarly, when the phase change cycle of phase changer 205B isexpressed as NB, and NB is an integer that is greater than or equal to3, that is to say, the number of transmission streams or the number ofmodulated signals is an integer greater than 2, there is a highprobability that the reception device in the communication partner canachieve a beneficial data reception quality.

As a matter of course, the embodiments may be carried out by combining aplurality of the exemplary embodiments and other contents described inthe present specification.

Embodiment A8

In this embodiment, an operational example of a communications devicebased on the operations described in, for example, Embodiment 7 andSupplemental Information 1, will be given.

First Example

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a configuration of a modulated signaltransmitted by a base station or AP according to this embodiment.

In FIG. 51 , time is represented on the horizontal axis. As illustratedin FIG. 51 , the transmission device in the base station or AP performs“single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” and subsequentlyperforms “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.

FIG. 52 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when singlestream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG. 51 is performed.

In FIG. 52 , time is represented on the horizontal axis. As illustratedin FIG. 52 , the base station or AP transmits preamble 5201 andsubsequently transmits control information symbol 5201.

Note that preamble 5201 conceivably includes a symbol for the terminal,which is the communication partner of the base station or AP, to performsignal detection, time synchronization, frequency synchronization,frequency offset estimation, channel estimation, and/or framesynchronization. For example, preamble 5201 is conceivably a PSK (phaseshift keying) scheme symbol.

Control information symbol 5201 is a symbol including, for example,information relating to the communications method of the modulatedsignal transmitted by the base station and AP and/or informationrequired by the terminal to demodulate a data symbol. However, theinformation included in control information symbol 5202 is not limitedto this example; control information symbol 5202 may include data (adata symbol), and may include other control information.

Moreover, the configuration of the symbols included in the single streammodulated signal is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 52 ,and the symbols included in the single stream modulated signal are notlimited to the example illustrated in FIG. 52 .

FIG. 53 illustrates one example of a frame configuration whenmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51 isperformed.

In FIG. 53 , time is represented on the horizontal axis. As illustratedin FIG. 53 , the base station or AP transmits preamble 5301,subsequently transmits control information symbol 5302, and subsequentlytransmits, for example, data symbol 5303.

Note that regarding at least data symbols, a plurality of modulatedsignals for a plurality of streams are transmitted at the same time andat the same frequency. Note that preamble 5301 conceivably includes asymbol for the terminal, which is the communication partner of the basestation or AP, to perform signal detection, time synchronization,frequency synchronization, frequency offset estimation, channelestimation, and/or frame synchronization. For example, preamble 5301 isconceivably a PSK scheme symbol. Moreover, as a result of a symbol forchannel estimation being transmitted from a plurality of antennas,demodulation of a data symbol included in, for example, data symbol 5303becomes possible.

Control information symbol 5302 is a symbol including, for example,information relating to the communications method of the modulatedsignal transmitted by the base station and AP and/or informationrequired by the terminal to demodulate a data symbol. However, theinformation included in control information symbol 5302 is not limitedto this example; control information symbol 5302 may include data (adata symbol), and may include other control information.

Moreover, the symbols included in the plurality of modulated signals forplurality of streams are not limited to the example illustrated in FIG.53 .

Note that hereinafter, the scheme used for “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5101” in FIG. 51 may be a single-carrier scheme, andthe scheme used for “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission5102” in FIG. 51 may be a single-carrier scheme or a multi-carrierscheme. Note that in the following description, the multi-carrier schemeis exemplified as the OFDM scheme (however, note that the multi-carrierscheme used is not limited to the OFDM scheme).

One characteristic of this embodiment is that CDD(CSD) as described inSupplemental Information 1 is implemented upon performing single streammodulated signal transmission 5101 using a single-carrier scheme in FIG.51 .

Then, upon performing multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission5102 in FIG. 51 , phase change is switched between implementation andnon-implementation.

Next, operations performed by the transmission device in the basestation will be described with reference to FIG. 54 .

FIG. 54 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 in, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 or FIG. 44 .

Multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402 has the configurationillustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG.21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG.33 . Multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402 receives inputsof mapped signal 5401A (s1(t)), mapped signal 5401B (s2(t)), and controlsignal 5400. Here, mapped signal 5401A (s1(t)) corresponds to mappedsignal 201A, mapped signal 5401B (s2(t)) corresponds to mapped signal201B, and control signal 5400 corresponds to control signal 200.Multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402 performs processingdescribed with reference to, for example, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 ,FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 ,FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , and outputs signals 5403A, 5403B.

Note that signal 5403A corresponds to 208A in FIG. 2, and 5403Bcorresponds to 210B in FIG. 2 . Signal 5403A corresponds to 210A in FIG.18 , and 5403B corresponds to 208B in FIG. 18 . Signal 5403A correspondsto 210A in FIG. 19, and 5403B corresponds to 210B in FIG. 19 . Signal5403A corresponds to 208A in FIG. 20, and 5403B corresponds to 210B inFIG. 20 . Signal 5403A corresponds to 210A in FIG. 21, and 5403Bcorresponds to 208B in FIG. 21 . Signal 5403A corresponds to 210A inFIG. 22, and 5403B corresponds to 210B in FIG. 22 . Signal 5403Acorresponds to 208A in FIG. 28 , and 5403B corresponds to 210B in FIG.28 . Signal 5403A corresponds to 210A in FIG. 29, and 5403B correspondsto 208B in FIG. 29 . Signal 5403A corresponds to 210A in FIG. 30, and5403B corresponds to 210B in FIG. 30 . Signal 5403A corresponds to 208Ain FIG. 31, and 5403B corresponds to 210B in FIG. 31 . Signal 5403Acorresponds to 210A in FIG. 32, and 5403B corresponds to 208B in FIG. 32. Signal 5403A corresponds to 208A in FIG. 33 , and 5403B corresponds to210B in FIG. 33 .

Then, based on information included in control signal 200 relating towhether it is time to perform single stream modulated signaltransmission or time to perform multi-stream multi-modulated-signaltransmission, when multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402determines that it is time to perform multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission, each signal processor operates, andsignals 5403A, 5403B are generated and output.

Inserter 5405 receives inputs of mapped signal 5401A, preamble andcontrol symbol signal 5404, and control signal 5400, and based oninformation included in control signal 5400 relating to whether it istime to perform single stream modulated signal transmission or time toperform multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission, when inserter5405 determines that it is time to perform single stream modulatedsignal transmission, for example, inserter 5405 generates and outputs(single-carrier scheme) signal 5406 in accordance with the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 52 , based on mapped signal 5401A andpreamble and control symbol signal 5404.

Note that in FIG. 54 , inserter 5405 is illustrated as receiving aninput of mapped signal 5401A, but when generating a signal in accordancewith the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 52 , mapped signal5401A is not used.

CDD (CSD) processor 5407 receives inputs of (single-carrier scheme)signal 5406 in accordance with the frame configuration and controlsignal 5400, and when control signal 5400 indicates that it is time toperform single stream modulated signal transmission, performs CDD(CSD)processing on (single-carrier scheme) signal 5406 in accordance with theframe configuration and outputs CDD (CSD) processed signal 5408 inaccordance with the frame configuration.

Selector 5409A receives inputs of signal 5403A, signal 5406 inaccordance with the frame configuration, and control signal 5400, andbased on control signal 5400, selects either signal 5403A or signal 5406in accordance with frame configuration, and outputs selected signal5410A.

For example, in single stream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG.51 , selector 5409A outputs signal 5406 in accordance with the frameconfiguration as selected signal 5410A, and in multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51 , selector 5409Aoutputs signal 5403A as selected signal 5410A.

Selector 5409B receives inputs of signal 5403B, CDD (CSD) processedsignal 5408 in accordance with the frame configuration, and controlsignal 5400, and based on control signal 5400, selects either signal5403B or CDD (CSD) processed signal 5408 in accordance with the frameconfiguration, and outputs selected signal 5410B.

For example, in single stream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG.51 , selector 5409B outputs CDD (CSD) processed signal 5408 inaccordance with the frame configuration as selected signal 5410B, and inmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51 ,selector 5409B outputs signal 5403B as selected signal 5410B.

Note that selected signal 5410A corresponds to processed signal 106_A inFIG. 1 , FIG. 44 , and selected signal 5410B corresponds to processedsignal 106_B in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44 .

FIG. 55 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_A,107_B in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44 .

OFDM scheme radio unit 5502 receives inputs of processed signal 5501 andcontrol signal 5500, and when information included in control signal5500 relating to whether either OFDM scheme or single-carrier scheme hasbeen selected indicates that OFDM scheme has been selected, processesprocessed signal 5501 and outputs OFDM scheme modulated signal 5503.

Note that OFDM is presented as an example, but another multi-carrierscheme may be used.

Single-carrier scheme radio unit 5504 receives inputs of processedsignal 5501 and control signal 5500, and when information included incontrol signal 5500 relating to whether either OFDM scheme orsingle-carrier scheme has been selected indicates that single-carrierscheme has been selected, processes processed signal 5501 and outputssingle-carrier scheme modulated signal 5505.

Selector 5506 receives inputs of OFDM scheme modulated signal 5503,single-carrier scheme modulated signal 5505, and control signal 5500,and when information included in control signal 5500 relating to whethereither OFDM scheme or single-carrier scheme has been selected indicatesthat OFDM scheme has been selected, outputs OFDM scheme modulated signal5503 as selected signal 5507, and when information included in controlsignal 5500 relating to whether either OFDM scheme or single-carrierscheme has been selected indicates that single-carrier scheme has beenselected, outputs single-carrier scheme modulated signal 5505 asselected signal 5507.

Note that when radio unit 107_A has the configuration illustrated inFIG. 55 , processed signal 5501 corresponds to signal 106_A, controlsignal 5500 corresponds to control signal 100, and selected signal 5507corresponds to 108_A. Moreover, when radio unit 107_B has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 55 , processed signal 5501 correspondsto signal 106_B, control signal 5500 corresponds to control signal 100,and selected signal 5507 corresponds to 108_B.

Hereinafter, the operations described above will be described furtherwith reference to the description of Embodiment 7.

Example 1-1

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD (CSD) processing is not performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG.28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 do not implementa phase change. Accordingly, control information (u11) for (controllingON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7is ignored in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.Note that in such cases, phase changer 209A and/or 209B need not beincluded in multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402illustrated in FIG. 54 .

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51 , in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is alwaysperformed. In such cases, control information (u11) for (controllingON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7is not necessary.

Example 1-2

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD (CSD) processing is not performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG.28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 do not implementa phase change. Accordingly, control information (u11) for (controllingON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7is ignored in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.Note that in such cases, phase changer 209A and/or 209B need not beincluded in multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402illustrated in FIG. 54 .

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD))described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51 ,FIG. 52 , and/or FIG. 53 , in “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5101” in FIG. 51 , control information (u11) for(controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) indicates“ON”, and in “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG.51 , CDD (CSD) processing is performed.

Example 1-3

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD (CSD) processing is performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG.28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 implements aphase change or performs CDD (CSD) processing. Accordingly, controlinformation (u11) for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity(CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7 is ignored in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51 , in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is alwaysperformed. In such cases, control information (u11) for (controllingON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7is not necessary.

Example 1-4

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD (CSD) processing is performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG.28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 implements aphase change or performs CDD (CSD) processing. Accordingly, controlinformation (u11) for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity(CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7 is ignored in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is controlled via control information(u 11) for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD))described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51 ,FIG. 52 , and/or FIG. 53 , in “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5101” in FIG. 51 , control information (u11) for(controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) indicates“ON”, and in “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG.51 , CDD (CSD) processing is performed.

Example 1-5

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,whether CDD (CSD) processing is performed or not is selectable, and in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, asingle-carrier scheme or OFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, based on control information (u11) for (controlling ON/OFFof) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7, phasechanger 209A and/or 209B in, for example, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 ,FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 ,FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 selects whether to (i) implement a phase change orperform CDD (CSD) or (ii) do not implement a phase change or do notperform CDD (CSD).

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51 , in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is alwaysperformed. In such cases, control information (u11) for (controllingON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7is not necessary.

Example 1-6

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,whether CDD (CSD) processing is performed or not is selectable, and in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, asingle-carrier scheme or OFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, based on control information (u11) for (controlling ON/OFFof) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7, phasechanger 209A and/or 209B in, for example, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 ,FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 ,FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 selects whether to (i) implement a phase change orperform CDD (CSD) or (ii) do not implement a phase change or do notperform CDD (CSD).

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD))described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51 ,FIG. 52 , and/or FIG. 53 , in “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5101” in FIG. 51 , control information (u11) for(controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) indicates“ON”, and in “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG.51 , CDD (CSD) processing is performed.

Second Example

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a configuration of a modulated signaltransmitted by a base station or AP according to this embodiment. AsFIG. 51 has already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

FIG. 52 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when singlestream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG. 51 is performed. AsFIG. 52 has already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

FIG. 53 illustrates one example of a frame configuration whenmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51 isperformed. As FIG. 53 has already been described, repeated descriptionwill be omitted.

Note that hereinafter, the scheme used for “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5101” in FIG. 51 may be a single-carrier scheme, andthe scheme used for “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission5102” in FIG. 51 may be a single-carrier scheme or a multi-carrierscheme. Note that in the following description, the multi-carrier schemeis exemplified as the OFDM scheme (however, note that the multi-carrierscheme used is not limited to the OFDM scheme).

One characteristic of this embodiment is that CDD(CSD) as described inSupplemental Information 1 is implemented upon performing single streammodulated signal transmission 5101 using a single-carrier scheme in FIG.51 .

Then, upon performing multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission5102 in FIG. 51 , phase change is switched between implementation andnon-implementation.

Next, operations performed by the transmission device in the basestation will be described with reference to FIG. 56 .

FIG. 56 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 in, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 or FIG. 44 . In FIG. 56 , components that operatethe same as in FIG. 54 share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeateddescription will be omitted.

CDD (CSD) processor 5601 receives inputs of (single-carrier scheme)signal 5406 in accordance with the frame configuration and controlsignal 5400, and when control signal 5400 indicates that it is time toperform single stream modulated signal transmission, performs CDD(CSD)processing on (single-carrier scheme) signal 5406 in accordance with theframe configuration and outputs CDD (CSD) processed signal 5602 inaccordance with the frame configuration.

Selector 5409A receives inputs of signal 5403A, CDD (CSD) processedsignal 5602 in accordance with the frame configuration, and controlsignal 5400, and based on control signal 5400, selects either signal5403A or CDD (CSD) processed signal 5602 in accordance with the frameconfiguration in accordance with frame configuration, and outputsselected signal 5410A.

For example, in single stream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG.51 , selector 5409A outputs CDD (CSD) processed signal 5602 inaccordance with the frame configuration as selected signal 5410A, and inmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51 ,selector 5409A outputs signal 5403A as selected signal 5410A.

FIG. 55 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_A,107_B in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44 . As FIG. 55 has already been described,repeated description will be omitted

Example 2-1

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD (CSD) processing is not performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG.28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 do not implementa phase change. Accordingly, control information (u11) for (controllingON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7is ignored in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.Note that in such cases, phase changer 209A and/or 209B need not beincluded in multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402illustrated in FIG. 56

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51 , in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is alwaysperformed. In such cases, control information (u11) for (controllingON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7is not necessary.

Example 2-2

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD (CSD) processing is not performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG.28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 do not implementa phase change.

Accordingly, control information (u11) for (controlling ON/OFF of)cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7 is ignoredin “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”. Note that insuch cases, phase changer 209A and/or 209B need not be included inmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402 illustrated in FIG.54 .

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD))described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51 ,FIG. 52 , and/or FIG. 53 , in “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5101” in FIG. 51 , control information (u11) for(controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) indicates“ON”, and in “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG.51 , CDD (CSD) processing is performed.

Example 2-3

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD (CSD) processing is performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG.28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 implements aphase change or performs CDD (CSD) processing. Accordingly, controlinformation (u11) for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity(CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7 is ignored in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51 , in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is alwaysperformed. In such cases, control information (u11) for (controllingON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7is not necessary.

Example 2-4

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD (CSD) processing is performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG.28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 implements aphase change or performs CDD (CSD) processing. Accordingly, controlinformation (u11) for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity(CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7 is ignored in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD))described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51 ,FIG. 52 , and/or FIG. 53 , in “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5101” in FIG. 51 , control information (u11) for(controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) indicates“ON”, and in “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG.51 , CDD (CSD) processing is performed.

Example 2-5

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,whether CDD (CSD) processing is performed or not is selectable, and in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, asingle-carrier scheme or OFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, based on control information (u11) for (controlling ON/OFFof) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7, phasechanger 209A and/or 209B in, for example, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 ,FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 ,FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 selects whether to (i) implement a phase change orperform CDD (CSD) or (ii) do not implement a phase change or do notperform CDD (CSD).

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51 , in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is alwaysperformed. In such cases, control information (u11) for (controllingON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7is not necessary.

Example 2-6

In FIG. 51 , in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,whether CDD (CSD) processing is performed or not is selectable, and in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, asingle-carrier scheme or OFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, based on control information (u11) for (controlling ON/OFFof) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7, phasechanger 209A and/or 209B in, for example, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 ,FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 ,FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 selects whether to (i) implement a phase change orperform CDD (CSD) or (ii) do not implement a phase change or do notperform CDD (CSD).

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for (cyclically/regularly)changing the phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible.Accordingly, phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of aphase change operation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase changeoperation by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlledvia the control information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF ofoperation for (cyclically/regularly) changing the phase change value ona per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD (CSD)) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD))described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51 ,FIG. 52 , and/or FIG. 53 , in “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5101” in FIG. 51 , control information (u11) for(controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) indicates“ON”, and in “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG.51 , CDD (CSD) processing is performed.

Third Example

FIG. 57 illustrates one example of a configuration of a modulated signaltransmitted by a base station or AP according to this embodiment.

In FIG. 57 , time is represented on the horizontal axis. Operations thatare the same as in FIG. 51 share like reference marks. As illustrated inFIG. 57 , the transmission device in the base station or AP performs“single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” and subsequentlyperforms “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” again.

FIG. 52 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when singlestream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG. 57 is performed. AsFIG. 52 has already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

FIG. 58 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when singlestream modulated signal transmission 5701 in FIG. 57 is performed.

In FIG. 58 , time is represented on the horizontal axis. As illustratedin FIG. 58 , the base station or AP transmits preamble 5801,subsequently transmits control information symbol 5802, and subsequentlytransmits, for example, data symbol 5803. Note that preamble 5801,control information symbol, 5802, and, for example, data symbol 5803 areeach transmitted via a single stream.

Preamble 5801 conceivably includes a symbol for the terminal, which isthe communication partner of the base station or AP, to perform signaldetection, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, frequencyoffset estimation, channel estimation, and/or frame synchronization. Forexample, preamble 5801 is conceivably a PSK scheme symbol.

Control information symbol 5802 is a symbol including, for example,information relating to the communications method of the modulatedsignal transmitted by the base station and AP and/or informationrequired by the terminal to demodulate a data symbol. However, theinformation included in control information symbol 5802 is not limitedto this example; control information symbol 5802 may include othercontrol information.

Note that hereinafter, the scheme used for “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5101” in FIG. 57 may be a single-carrier scheme, andthe scheme used for “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”in FIG. 57 may be a single-carrier scheme or a multi-carrier scheme.Note that in the following description, the multi-carrier scheme isexemplified as the OFDM scheme (however, note that the multi-carrierscheme used is not limited to the OFDM scheme).

One characteristic of this embodiment is that CDD(CSD) as described inSupplemental Information 1 is implemented upon performing single streammodulated signal transmission 5101 using a single-carrier scheme in FIG.51 .

Example 3-1

In FIG. 57 , in “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”, CDD(CSD) processing is not performed, and in “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5701”, a single-carrier scheme or OFDM scheme can beselected.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed, itis possible to select “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission”instead of “single stream modulated signal transmission”. Note thatsince “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission” has alreadybeen described, repeated description will be omitted.

Next, operations performed by the transmission device in the basestation will be described with reference to FIG. 54 .

FIG. 54 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 in, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 or FIG. 44 . As the general operations illustratedin FIG. 54 have already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

In this example, the characteristic feature is that, in FIG. 57 , when“single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” is performed, CDD(CSD) processing is performed, and when “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5701” is performed, CDD (CSD) processing is not performed.

As the operations performed by inserter 5405 have already beendescribed, repeated description will be omitted. CDD (CSD) unit 5407switches the CDD (CSD) processing ON and OFF based on control signal5400. CDD (CSD) unit 5407 knows the timing of the “single streammodulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG. 57 from information includedin control signal 5400 indicating whether it is time to transmit aplurality of modulated signals for a plurality of streams or time totransmit a single stream modulated signal. In such cases, CDD (CSD) unit5407 determines to perform cyclic delay diversity based on controlinformation (u11) included in control signal 5400 for (controllingON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7.Accordingly, when “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” inFIG. 57 is performed, CDD (CSD) unit 5407 performs signal processing forcyclic delay diversity, and outputs CDD (CSD) processed signal 5408 inaccordance with the frame configuration.

CDD (CSD) unit 5407 knows the timing of the “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5701” in FIG. 57 from information included in thecontrol signal indicating whether it is time to transmit a plurality ofmodulated signals for a plurality of streams or time to transmit asingle stream modulated signal. CDD (CSD) unit 5407 determines to notperform cyclic delay diversity based on control information (u11)included in control signal 5400 for (controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delaydiversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7. Accordingly, when“single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” in FIG. 57 isperformed, CDD (CSD) unit 5407 does not perform signal processing forcyclic delay diversity, and, for example, does not output a signal.

Selector 5409A receives inputs of signal 5403A, signal 5406 inaccordance with the frame configuration, and control signal 5400, andbased on control signal 5400, selects either signal 5403A or signal 5406in accordance with frame configuration, and outputs selected signal5410A. Accordingly, when “single stream modulated signal transmission5101” is performed and when “single stream modulated signal transmission5701” is performed, in either case, selector 5409A outputs signal 5406in accordance with the frame configuration as selected signal 5410A.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” is performed,selector 5409B outputs CDD (CSD) processed signal 5408 in accordancewith the frame configuration as selected signal 5410B, and when “singlestream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed, for example,does not output selected signal 5410B.

As the operations performed by radio units 107_A, 107_B in the basestation illustrated in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44 have already been described,repeated description will be omitted.

Example 3-2

In FIG. 57 , in “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”,whether CDD (CSD) processing is performed or not is selectable, and in“single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”, a single-carrierscheme or OFDM scheme can be selected.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed, itis possible to select “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission”instead of “single stream modulated signal transmission”. Note thatsince “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission” has alreadybeen described, repeated description will be omitted.

Next, operations performed by the transmission device in the basestation will be described with reference to FIG. 54 .

FIG. 54 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 in, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 or FIG. 44 . As the general operations illustratedin FIG. 54 have already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

In this example, the characteristic feature is that, in FIG. 57 , when“single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” is performed, CDD(CSD) processing is performed, and when “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5701” is performed, whether to perform CDD (CSD) processingor not is selectable.

As the operations performed by inserter 5405 have already beendescribed, repeated description will be omitted.

CDD (CSD) unit 5407 switches the CDD (CSD) processing ON and OFF basedon control signal 5400. CDD (CSD) unit 5407 knows the timing of the“single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG. 57 frominformation included in control signal 5400 indicating whether it istime to transmit a plurality of modulated signals for a plurality ofstreams or time to transmit a single stream modulated signal. In suchcases, CDD (CSD) unit 5407 determines to perform cyclic delay diversitybased on control information (u11) included in control signal 5400 for(controlling ON/OFF of) cyclic delay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described inEmbodiment 7. Accordingly, when “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5101” in FIG. 57 is performed, CDD (CSD) unit 5407 performssignal processing for cyclic delay diversity, and outputs CDD (CSD)processed signal 5408 in accordance with the frame configuration.

CDD (CSD) unit 5407 knows the timing of the “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5701” in FIG. 57 from information included in thecontrol signal indicating whether it is time to transmit a plurality ofmodulated signals for a plurality of streams or time to transmit asingle stream modulated signal. When “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5701” is performed, CDD (CSD) unit 5407 determines to notperform cyclic delay diversity based on control information (u11)included in control signal 5400 for (controlling the ON/OFF of) cyclicdelay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7. Accordingly, when“single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” in FIG. 57 isperformed, CDD (CSD) unit 5407 does not perform signal processing forcyclic delay diversity, and, for example, does not output a signal.

Next, operations different from this example will be described.

CDD (CSD) unit 5407 knows the timing of the “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5701” in FIG. 57 from information included in thecontrol signal indicating whether it is time to transmit a plurality ofmodulated signals for a plurality of streams or time to transmit asingle stream modulated signal. When “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5701” is performed, CDD (CSD) unit 5407 determines toperform cyclic delay diversity based on control information (u11)included in control signal 5400 for controlling (the ON/OFF of) cyclicdelay diversity (CDD (CSD)) described in Embodiment 7. Accordingly, when“single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” in FIG. 57 isperformed, CDD (CSD) unit 5407 performs signal processing for cyclicdelay diversity, and outputs CDD (CSD) processed signal 5408 inaccordance with the frame configuration.

Selector 5409A receives inputs of signal 5403A, signal 5406A inaccordance with the frame configuration, and control signal 5400, andbased on control signal 5400, selects either signal 5403A or signal 5406in accordance with frame configuration, and outputs selected signal5410A. Accordingly, when “single stream modulated signal transmission5101” is performed and when “single stream modulated signal transmission5701” is performed, in either case, selector 5409A outputs signal 5406in accordance with the frame configuration as selected signal 5410A.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” is performed,selector 5409B outputs CDD (CSD) processed signal 5408 in accordancewith the frame configuration as selected signal 5410B.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed,when selector 5409B determines to not perform CDD (CSD) processing in“single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”, selector 5409B, forexample, does not output selected signal 5410B.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed,when selector 5409B determines to perform CDD (CSD) processing in“single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”, selector 5409Boutputs CDD (CSD) processed signal 5408 in accordance with the frameconfiguration as selected signal 5410B.

As the operations performed by radio units 107_A, 107_B in the basestation illustrated in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44 have already been described,repeated description will be omitted.

As described above, control over whether to implement a phase change ornot and control over whether to perform CDD (CSD) or not based on, forexample, the number of transmission streams and/or the transmissionmethod can be done in an appropriate manner. This makes it possible toachieve an advantageous effect in which it is possible to improve datareception quality of the communication partner. An advantageouscharacteristic is that, by performing CDD (CSD), the probability thatdata reception quality of the communication partner will improveincreases, and, in particular, when single stream transmission isperformed, it is possible to effectively use the plurality oftransmitting antennas of the transmission device. Another advantageouscharacteristic is that, when performing multi-stream transmission, basedthe propagation/communications environment and/or phase change supportby the communication partner, for example, it is possible to achievefavorable data reception quality by controlling whether a phase changeis implemented or not.

Note that although FIG. 54 is used as an example of a portion of theconfiguration of signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 and/or FIG.44 , the configurations illustrated in any one of FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 ,FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 ,FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 may be implemented.

For example, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 ,FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 ,FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , when single stream transmission isperformed, mapped signal 201B of s2(t) is nullified.

In weighting synthesizer 203, as precoding matrix F, for example, any ofthe following can be applied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.149} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}\beta & 0 \\\beta & 0\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(149)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.150} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}0 & \beta \\0 & \beta\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(150)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.151} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}\alpha & 0 \\\beta & 0\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(151)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.152} \right\rbrack &  \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}0 & \alpha \\0 & \beta\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(152)}\end{matrix}$

Note that α may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be animaginary number. Note that β may be a real number, and, alternatively,may be an imaginary number. However, α is not zero, and β is not zero.

The above was described in terms of expressions, the signal may be splitinstead of implementing the weighting synthesis (calculation using amatrix) as per the expressions above.

In single stream cases, phase changers 205A, 205B do not implement aphase change (the input signal is output as-is).

Moreover, in single stream cases, phase changers 209A, 209B may performsignal processing for CDD (CSD) instead of implementing a phase change.

Embodiment A9

In Supplemental Information 4, for example, it is stated that phasechangers may be included before and after weighting synthesizer 203 inthe configurations illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG.19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31, FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 .

In this embodiment, supplemental information regarding this point willbe given.

A first example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 59 . In FIG. 59 ,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. As illustrated in FIG. 59 , phasechanger 5901A receives inputs of mapped signal 201A (s1(t)) and controlsignal 200, and, for example, based information on the phase changemethod included in control signal 200, implements a phase change onmapped signal 201A (s1(t)) and outputs phase-changed signal 5902A.

Similarly, phase changer 5901B receives inputs of mapped signal 201B(s2(t)) and control signal 200, and, for example, based information onthe phase change method included in control signal 200, implements aphase change on mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) and outputs phase-changedsignal 5902B.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2 , and phase-changed signal 206B is input intoinserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 .

A second example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 60 . In FIG. 60 ,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

Unlike FIG. 59 , in FIG. 60 , only phase changer 205B is inserted afterweighting synthesizer 203.

Then, weighting synthesized signal 204A is input into inserter 207Aillustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 , and phase-changed signal 206B isinput into inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 .

A third example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 61 . In FIG. 61 ,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

Unlike FIG. 60 , in FIG. 61 , phase changer 205A is inserted afterweighting synthesizer 203 on the top line.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2 , and weighting synthesized signal 204B is inputinto inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 .

A fourth example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 62 . In FIG. 62 ,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

Unlike FIG. 59 , in FIG. 62 , only phase changer 5901B is insertedbefore the weighting synthesizer.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2 , and phase-changed signal 206B is input intoinserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 .

A fifth example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 63 . In FIG. 63 ,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

Unlike FIG. 62 , in FIG. 63 , phase changer 5901A is inserted beforeweighting synthesizer 203 on the top line.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2 , and phase-changed signal 206B is input intoinserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 .

A sixth example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 64 . In FIG. 64 ,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

In FIG. 64 , phase changers 5901B, 205B are present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the bottom line.

Then, weighting synthesized signal 204A is input into inserter 207Aillustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 , and phase-changed signal 206B isinput into inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 .

A seventh example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 65 . In FIG. 65 ,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

In FIG. 65 , phase changers 5901B, 205A are present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the bottom and top lines, respectively.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2 , and weighting synthesized signal 204B is inputinto inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 .

An eighth example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 66 . In FIG. 66 ,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

In FIG. 66 , phase changers 5901A, 205B are present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the top and bottom lines, respectively.

Then, weighting synthesized signal 204B is input into inserter 207Aillustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 , and phase-changed signal 206B isinput into inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 .

A ninth example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 67 . In FIG. 67 ,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

In FIG. 67 , phase changers 5901A, 205A are present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the top line.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2 , and weighting synthesized signal 204B is inputinto inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2 .

The embodiments described in the present specification may beimplemented using these configurations.

The phase change method used by phase changers 5901A, 5901B, 205A, and205B in FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG.65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 is, for example, set according to controlsignal 200.

Embodiment A10

In this embodiment, an example of a robust communications method will begiven.

First Example

FIG. 68 illustrates operations performed by, for example, mapper 104 inFIG. 1 of a base station or AP.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 6801 and control signal6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified by controlsignal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those described below,and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to 100 in FIG. 1 , encodeddata 6801 corresponds to 103 in FIG. 1 , mapper 6802 corresponds to 104in FIG. 1 , mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 in FIG. 1 , andmapped signal 6801B corresponds to 105_2 in FIG. 1 .

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), and bit c3(k) as encoded data 6801. Note that k is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0.

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c0(k) and c1(k) toobtain mapped signal a(k).

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c2(k) and c3(k) toobtain mapped signal b(k).

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c0(k) and c1(k) toobtain mapped signal a′(k).

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c2(k) and c3(k) toobtain mapped signal b′(k).

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k, isexpressed as a(k), s2(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803B whose symbolnumber i=2k, is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1), i.e., mapped signal 6803Awhose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1), i.e.,mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as a′(k).

Next, the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) and b′(k)”will be described.

FIG. 69 illustrates an example of a distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-quadrature Q plane when QPSK is used, and illustrates therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1.

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 0] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and quadrature component Q is set to z (whichmatches signal point 6901). Note that z is a real number that is greaterthan 0.

When bits [x0 x1]=[01] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and quadrature component Q is set to z (whichmatches signal point 6902).

When bits [x0 x1]=[10] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and quadrature component Q is set to −z (whichmatches signal point 6903).

When bits [x0 x1]=[11] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and quadrature component Q is set to −z (whichmatches signal point 6904).

FIG. 70 illustrates an example of a distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-quadrature Q plane when QPSK is used, and illustrates therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1.However, “the relationship between signal points for the values for bitx0 and bit x1” in FIG. 69 and “the relationship between signal pointsfor the values for bit x0 and bit x1” in FIG. 70 are different.

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 0] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and quadrature component Q is set to −z (whichmatches signal point 7003). Note that z is a real number that is greaterthan 0.

When bits [x0 x1]=[01] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and quadrature component Q is set to −z (whichmatches signal point 7004)

When bits [x0 x1]=[10] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and quadrature component Q is set to z (whichmatches signal point 7001).

When bits [x0 x1]=[11] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and quadrature component Q is set to z (whichmatches signal point 7002).

FIG. 71 illustrates an example of a distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-quadrature Q plane when QPSK is used, and illustrates therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1.However, “the relationship between signal points for the values for bitx0 and bit x1” in FIG. 71 is different from “the relationship betweensignal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1” in FIG. 69 and “therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1”in FIG. 70 .

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 0] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and quadrature component Q is set to z (whichmatches signal point 7102). Note that z is a real number that is greaterthan 0.

When bits [x0 x1]=[01] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and quadrature component Q is set to z (whichmatches signal point 7101).

When bits [x0 x1]=[10] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and quadrature component Q is set to −z (whichmatches signal point 7104).

When bits [x0 x1]=[11] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and quadrature component Q is set to −z (whichmatches signal point 7103).

FIG. 72 illustrates an example of an distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-quadrature Q plane when QPSK is used, and illustrates therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1.However, “the relationship between signal points for the values for bitx0 and bit x1” in FIG. 72 is different from “the relationship betweensignal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1” in FIG. 69 , “therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1”in FIG. 70 , and “the relationship between signal points for the valuesfor bit x0 and bit x1” in FIG. 71 .

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 0] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and quadrature component Q is set to −z (whichmatches signal point 7204). Note that z is a real number that is greaterthan 0.

When bits [x0 x1]=[01] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and quadrature component Q is set to −z (whichmatches signal point 7203).

When bits [x0 x1]=[10] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and quadrature component Q is set to z (whichmatches signal point 7202).

When bits [x0 x1]=[11] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and quadrature component Q is set to z (whichmatches signal point 7201).

For example, in order to generate a(k), the mapping illustrated in FIG.69 is used. For example, c0(k)=0 and c1(k)=0, signal point 6901 ismapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 69 , and signal point 6901corresponds to a(k).

In order to generate a′(k), the mapping to be used is set to any one ofthe mapping illustrated in FIG. 69 , the mapping illustrated in FIG. 70, the mapping illustrated in FIG. 71 , or the mapping illustrated inFIG. 72 .

<1>

In order to generate a′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 69 , since c0(k)=0 and c1(k)=0, signal point6901 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 69 , and signalpoint 6901 corresponds to a′(k).

<2>

In order to generate a′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 70 , since c0(k)=0 and c1(k)=0, signal point7003 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 70 , and signalpoint 7003 corresponds to a′(k).

<3>

In order to generate a′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 71 , since c0(k)=0 and c1(k)=0, signal point7102 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 71 , and signalpoint 7102 corresponds to a′(k).

<4>

In order to generate a′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 72 , since c0(k)=0 and c1(k)=0, signal point7204 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 72 , and signalpoint 7204 corresponds to a′(k).

As described above, the relationship between “bits (for example x0, x1)to be transmitted for generation of a(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” and the relationship between “bits (for example x0, x1) to betransmitted for generation of a′(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” may be the same, and, alternatively, may be different.

An example of a case in which the relationships are the same is one inwhich FIG. 69 is used to generate a(k) and FIG. 69 is used to generatea′(k) as described above.

Examples of cases in which the relationships are different include thosein which FIG. 69 is used to generate a(k) and FIG. 70 is used togenerate a′(k), FIG. 69 is used to generate a(k) and FIG. 71 is used togenerate a′(k), and FIG. 69 is used to generate a(k) and FIG. 72 is usedto generate a′(k), as described above.

Other examples include “the modulation scheme for generating a(k) andthe modulation scheme for generating a′(k) are different” and “thesignal point distribution in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane forgenerating a(k) and the signal point distribution in the in-phaseI-quadrature Q plane for generating a′(k) are different”.

For example, as described above, QPSK may be used as the modulationscheme for generating a(k), and a signal point distribution modulationscheme other than QPSK may be used as the modulation scheme forgenerating a′(k). Moreover, the signal point distribution in thein-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating a(k) may be thedistribution illustrated in FIG. 69 , and the signal point distributionin the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating a′(k) may be adistribution different from that illustrated in FIG. 69 .

Note that “different signal point distributions in the in-phaseI-quadrature Q plane” means, for example, when the coordinates of foursignal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating a(k)are distributed as illustrated in FIG. 69 , at least one of the foursignal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating a′(k)does not overlap with any one of the four signal points in FIG. 69 .

For example, in order to generate b(k), the mapping illustrated in FIG.69 is used. For example, c2(k)=0 and c3(k)=0, signal point 6901 ismapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 69 , and signal point 6901corresponds to b(k).

In order to generate b′(k), the mapping to be used is set to any one ofthe mapping illustrated in FIG. 69 , the mapping illustrated in FIG. 70, the mapping illustrated in FIG. 71 , or the mapping illustrated inFIG. 72 .

<5>

In order to generate b′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 69 , since c2(k)=0 and c3(k)=0, signal point6901 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 69 , and signalpoint 6901 corresponds to b′(k).

<6>

In order to generate b′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 70 , since c2(k)=0 and c3(k)=0, signal point7003 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 70 , and signalpoint 7003 corresponds to b′(k).

<7>

In order to generate b′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 71 , since c2(k)=0 and c3(k)=0, signal point7102 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 71 , and signalpoint 7102 corresponds to b′(k).

<8>

In order to generate b′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 72 , since c2(k)=0 and c3(k)=0, signal point7204 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 72 , and signalpoint 7204 corresponds to b′(k).

As described above, the relationship between “bits (for example x0, x1)to be transmitted for generation of b(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” and the relationship between “bits (for example x0, x1) to betransmitted for generation of b′(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” may be the same, and, alternatively, may be different.

An example of a case in which the relationships are the same is one inwhich FIG. 69 is used to generate b(k) and FIG. 69 is used to generateb′(k) as described above.

Examples of cases in which the relationships are different include thosein which FIG. 69 is used to generate b(k) and FIG. 70 is used togenerate b′(k), FIG. 69 is used to generate b(k) and FIG. 71 is used togenerate b′(k), and FIG. 69 is used to generate b(k) and FIG. 72 is usedto generate b′(k), as described above.

Other examples include “the modulation scheme for generating b(k) andthe modulation scheme for generating b′(k) are different” and “thesignal point distribution in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane forgenerating b(k) and the signal point distribution in the in-phaseI-quadrature Q plane for generating b′(k) are different”.

For example, as described above, QPSK may be used as the modulationscheme for generating b(k), and a signal point distribution modulationscheme other than QPSK may be used as the modulation scheme forgenerating b′(k). Moreover, the signal point distribution in thein-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating b(k) may be thedistribution illustrated in FIG. 69 , and the signal point distributionin the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating b′(k) may be adistribution different from that illustrated in FIG. 69 .

Note that “different signal point distributions in the in-phaseI-quadrature Q plane” means, for example, when the coordinates of foursignal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating b(k)are distributed as illustrated in FIG. 69 , at least one of the foursignal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating b′(k)does not overlap with any one of the four signal points in FIG. 69 .

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 inFIG. 1 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to 105_2 FIG. 1 , mappedsignal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B are applied with a phase changeand/or weighting synthesis processing based on, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 ,FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 .

Second Example

Hereinbefore, the transmission device included in the base station or APwas exemplified as having the configuration in FIG. 1 , but hereoperations for when the transmission device in the base station or APhas the configuration illustrated in FIG. 73 , which differs from FIG. 1, will be described.

In FIG. 73 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereofwill be omitted.

Mapper 7301 illustrated in FIG. 73 receives inputs of encoded data103_1, 103_2, and control signal 100, performs mapping based oninformation relating to a mapping method included in control signal 100,and outputs mapped signals 105_1, 105_2.

FIG. 74 illustrates operations performed by mapper 7301 illustrated inFIG. 73 . In FIG. 74 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 68share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereofwill be omitted.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 7401_1, 7401_2, and controlsignal 6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified bycontrol signal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those describedbelow, and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to 100 in FIG. 73 , encodeddata 7401_1 corresponds to 103_1 in FIG. 73 , encoded data 7401_2corresponds to 103_2 in FIG. 73 , mapper 6802 corresponds to 7301 inFIG. 73 , mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 in FIG. 73 , andmapped signal 6801B corresponds to 105_2 in FIG. 73 .

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bit c0(k) and bit c1(k) asencoded data 7401_1, and bit c2(k), and bit c3(k) as encoded data7401_2. Note that k is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0.

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c0(k) and c1(k) toobtain mapped signal a(k).

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c2(k) and c3(k) toobtain mapped signal b(k).

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c0(k) and c1(k) toobtain mapped signal a′(k).

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c2(k) and c3(k) toobtain mapped signal b′(k).

[Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented ass1(i=2k), mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented ass2(i=2k), mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is representedas s1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k, isexpressed as a(k), s2(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803B whose symbolnumber i=2k, is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1), i.e., mapped signal 6803Awhose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1), i.e.,mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as a′(k).

Next, the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) and b′(k)”will be described with reference to FIG. 69 , FIG. 70 , FIG. 71 , andFIG. 72 .

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 inFIG. 73 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to 105_2 FIG. 73 , mappedsignal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B are applied with a phase changeand/or weighting synthesis processing based on, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 ,FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 73 .

Third Example

Hereinbefore, the transmission device included in the base station or APwas exemplified as having the configuration in FIG. 1 , but hereoperations for when the transmission device in the base station or APhas the configuration illustrated in FIG. 73 , which differs from FIG. 1, will be described.

In FIG. 73 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereofwill be omitted.

Mapper 7301 illustrated in FIG. 73 receives inputs of encoded data103_1, 103_2, and control signal 100, performs mapping based oninformation relating to a mapping method included in control signal 100,and outputs mapped signals 105_1, 105_2.

FIG. 75 illustrates operations performed by mapper 7301 illustrated inFIG. 73 . In FIG. 75 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 68 ,FIG. 74 share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated descriptionthereof will be omitted.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 7401_1, 7401_2, and controlsignal 6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified bycontrol signal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those describedbelow, and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to 100 in FIG. 73 , encodeddata 7401_1 corresponds to 103_1 in FIG. 73 , encoded data 7401_2corresponds to 103_2 in FIG. 73 , mapper 6802 corresponds to 7301 inFIG. 73 , mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 in FIG. 73 , andmapped signal 6801B corresponds to 105_2 in FIG. 73 .

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bit c0(k) and bit c2(k) asencoded data 7401_1, and bit c1(k), and bit c3(k) as encoded data7401_2. Note that k is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0.

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c0(k) and c1(k) toobtain mapped signal a(k).

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c2(k) and c3(k) toobtain mapped signal b(k).

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c0(k) and c1(k) toobtain mapped signal a′(k).

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on c2(k) and c3(k) toobtain mapped signal b′(k).

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k, isexpressed as a(k), s2(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803B whose symbolnumber i=2k, is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1), i.e., mapped signal 6803Awhose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1), i.e.,mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as a′(k).

Next, the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) and b′(k)”will be described with reference to FIG. 69 , FIG. 70 , FIG. 71 , andFIG. 72 .

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 inFIG. 73 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to 105_2 FIG. 73 , mappedsignal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B are applied with a phase changeand/or weighting synthesis processing based on, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 ,FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 73 .

Fourth Example

FIG. 76 illustrates operations performed by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 of abase station or AP. In FIG. 76 , components that operate the same as inFIG. 68 share like reference marks.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 6801 and control signal6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified by controlsignal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those described below,and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to 100 in FIG. 1 , encodeddata 6801 corresponds to 103 in FIG. 1 , mapper 6802 corresponds to 104in FIG. 1 , mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 in FIG. 1 , andmapped signal 6801B corresponds to 105_2 in FIG. 1 .

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), bit c3(k), bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bit c6(k), and bit c7(k) asencoded data 6801. Note that k is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0.

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), and bit c3(k), to obtain mapped signal a(k).

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bitc6(k), and bit c7(k), to obtain mapped signal b(k).

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), and bit c3(k), to obtain mapped signal a′(k).

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bitc6(k), and bit c7(k), to obtain mapped signal b′(k).

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k, isexpressed as a(k), s2(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803B whose symbolnumber i=2k, is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1), i.e., mapped signal 6803Awhose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1), i.e.,mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as a′(k).

Regarding the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) andb′(k)”, as described above, for example, the relationship between “bits(for example x0, x1, x2, x3 (x2 and x3 are added since there are 16signal points)) to be transmitted for generation of a(k) and thedistribution of signal points” and the relationship between “bits (forexample x0 x1, x2, x3) to be transmitted for generation of a′(k) and thedistribution of signal points” may be the same, and, alternatively, maybe different.

Other examples include “the modulation scheme for generating a(k) andthe modulation scheme for generating a′(k) are different” and “thesignal point distribution in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane forgenerating a(k) and the signal point distribution in the in-phaseI-quadrature Q plane for generating a′(k) are different”.

Note that “different signal point distributions in the in-phaseI-quadrature Q plane” means, for example, when the coordinates of 16signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating a(k),at least one of the 16 signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Qplane for generating a′(k) does not overlap with any one of the 16signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating a(k).

Regarding the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) andb′(k)”, as described above, for example, the relationship between “bits(for example x0, x1, x2, and x3 (x2 and x3 are added since there are 16signal points)) to be transmitted for generation of b(k) and thedistribution of signal points” and the relationship between “bits (forexample x0 x1, x2, x3) to be transmitted for generation of b′(k) and thedistribution of signal points” may be the same, and, alternatively, maybe different.

Other examples include “the modulation scheme for generating b(k) andthe modulation scheme for generating b′(k) are different” and “thesignal point distribution in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane forgenerating b(k) and the signal point distribution in the in-phaseI-quadrature Q plane for generating b′(k) are different”.

Note that “different signal point distributions in the in-phaseI-quadrature Q plane” means, for example, when the coordinates of 16signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating b(k),at least one of the 16 signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Qplane for generating b′(k) does not overlap with any one of the 16signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for generating b(k).

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 inFIG. 1 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to 105_2 FIG. 1 , mappedsignal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B are applied with a phase changeand/or weighting synthesis processing based on, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 ,FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 .

Fifth Example

Hereinbefore, the transmission device included in the base station or APwas exemplified as having the configuration in FIG. 1 , but hereoperations for when the transmission device in the base station or APhas the configuration illustrated in FIG. 73 , which differs from FIG. 1, will be described.

In FIG. 73 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereofwill be omitted.

Mapper 7301 illustrated in FIG. 73 receives inputs of encoded data103_1, 103_2, and control signal 100, performs mapping based oninformation relating to a mapping method included in control signal 100,and outputs mapped signals 105_1, 105_2.

FIG. 77 illustrates operations performed by mapper 7301 illustrated inFIG. 73 . In FIG. 77 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 68 ,FIG. 74 share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated descriptionthereof will be omitted.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 7401_1, 7401_2, and controlsignal 6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified bycontrol signal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those describedbelow, and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to 100 in FIG. 73 , encodeddata 7401_1 corresponds to 103_1 in FIG. 73 , encoded data 7401_2corresponds to 103_2 in FIG. 73 , mapper 6802 corresponds to 7301 inFIG. 73 , mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 in FIG. 73 , andmapped signal 6801B corresponds to 105_2 in FIG. 73 .

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bits c0(k), c1(k), c2(k),and c3(k) as encoded data 7401_1, and bits c4(k), c5(k), c6(k), andc7(k) as encoded data 7401_2. Note that k is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0.

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), and bit c3(k), to obtain mapped signal a(k).

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bitc6(k), and bit c7(k), to obtain mapped signal b(k).

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), and bit c3(k), to obtain mapped signal a′(k).

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bitc6(k), and bit c7(k), to obtain mapped signal b′(k)

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k, isexpressed as a(k), s2(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803B whose symbolnumber i=2k, is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1), i.e., mapped signal 6803Awhose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1), i.e.,mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as a′(k).

Next, the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) and b′(k)”will be described with reference to the fourth example.

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 inFIG. 73 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to 105_2 FIG. 73 , mappedsignal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B are applied with a phase changeand/or weighting synthesis processing based on, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 ,FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 73 .

Sixth Example

Hereinbefore, the transmission device included in the base station or APwas exemplified as having the configuration in FIG. 1 , but hereoperations for when the transmission device in the base station or APhas the configuration illustrated in FIG. 73 , which differs from FIG. 1, will be described.

In FIG. 73 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereofwill be omitted.

Mapper 7301 illustrated in FIG. 73 receives inputs of encoded data103_1, 103_2, and control signal 100, performs mapping based oninformation relating to a mapping method included in control signal 100,and outputs mapped signals 105_1, 105_2.

FIG. 78 illustrates operations performed by mapper 7301 illustrated inFIG. 73 . In FIG. 78 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 68 ,FIG. 74 share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated descriptionthereof will be omitted.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 7401_1, 7401_2, and controlsignal 6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified bycontrol signal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those describedbelow, and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to 100 in FIG. 73 , encodeddata 7401_1 corresponds to 103_1 in FIG. 73 , encoded data 7401_2corresponds to 103_2 in FIG. 73 , mapper 6802 corresponds to 7301 inFIG. 73 , mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 in FIG. 73 , andmapped signal 6801B corresponds to 105_2 in FIG. 73 .

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bits c0(k), c1(k), c4(k),and c5(k) as encoded data 7401_1, and bits c2(k), c3(k), c6(k), andc7(k) as encoded data 7401_2. Note that k is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0.

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), and bit c3(k), to obtain mapped signal a(k).

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bitc6(k), and bit c7(k), to obtain mapped signal b(k).

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), and bit c3(k), to obtain mapped signal a′(k).

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bitc6(k), and bit c7(k), to obtain mapped signal b′(k).

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k, isexpressed as a(k), s2(i=2k), i.e., mapped signal 6803B whose symbolnumber i=2k, is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1), i.e., mapped signal 6803Awhose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1), i.e.,mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1, is expressed as a′(k).

Next, the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) and b′(k)”will be described with reference to the fourth example.

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to 105_1 inFIG. 73 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to 105_2 FIG. 73 , mappedsignal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B are applied with a phase changeand/or weighting synthesis processing based on, for example, FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 ,FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 73 .

As described above, as a result of the transmission device transmittinga modulated signal, advantageous effects such as the reception devicebeing able to achieve high data reception quality, and, for example, inenvironments in which direct waves are dominant, favorable datareception quality can be realized are achievable.

Note that a configuration in which the communications method(transmission method) described in this embodiment is selectable by thebase station or AP and a configuration in which the terminal describedin Embodiments A1, A2, and A4 transmit a reception capabilitynotification symbol may be combined.

For example, when the terminal notifies the base station or AP that itsupports phase change demodulated via information 3601 relating tosupport for demodulation of modulated signals with phase changes in FIG.38 , or notifies the base station or AP that it supports thetransmission method (communications method) described in this embodimentvia information 3702 relating to support for reception for a pluralityof streams, the base station or AP can determine to transmit a pluralityof modulated signals for a plurality of streams via the transmissionmethod (communications method) described in this embodiment and thentransmit the modulated signals. Accordingly, the terminal can achievehigh data reception quality, and the base station or AP takes intoconsideration the communications method supported by the terminal andthe communications environment, for example, and accurately generatesand transmits a modulated signal receivable by the terminal to achievean advantageous effect of an improvement in data transmission efficiencyin the system including the base station or AP and terminal.

Embodiment A11

In this embodiment, using the examples described in Embodiment A1,Embodiment A2, and Embodiment A4, another implementation method foroperations performed by the terminal will be given.

FIG. 24 illustrates one example of a configuration of a terminal. Asthis example has already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

FIG. 41 illustrates one example of a configuration of reception device2404 in the terminal illustrated in FIG. 24 . As operations have alreadybeen described in Embodiment A4 in detail, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 42 illustrates an example of a frame configuration upon singlemodulated signal transmission by a base station or AP, which is thecommunication partner of the terminal, using a multi-carriertransmission scheme such as OFDM. In FIG. 42 , components that operatethe same as in FIG. 4 share like reference marks. As operations havealready been described in Embodiment A4 in detail, description will beomitted from this embodiment.

For example, the transmission device in the base station illustrated inFIG. 1 may transmit a single stream modulated signal having the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 42 .

FIG. 43 illustrates an example of a frame configuration upon singlemodulated signal transmission by a base station or AP, which is thecommunication partner of the terminal, using a single-carriertransmission scheme. In FIG. 43 , components that operate the same as inFIG. 39 share like reference marks.

For example, the transmission device in the base station illustrated inFIG. 1 may transmit a single stream modulated signal having the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 43 .

For example, the transmission device in the base station illustrated inFIG. 1 may transmit a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals having the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 and/or FIG.5 .

Furthermore, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 may transmit a plurality of streams of a pluralityof modulated signals having the frame configuration illustrated in FIG.39 and/or FIG. 40 .

FIG. 79 illustrates an example of data included in the receptioncapability notification symbol (3502) transmitted by the terminalillustrated in FIG. 35 , different from the examples illustrated in FIG.36 , FIG. 37 , and FIG. 38 . Note that in FIG. 79 , operations that arethe same as in FIG. 36 , FIG. 37 , and FIG. 38 share like referencemarks. Moreover, duplicate description of components that perform thesame operations as in FIG. 36 , FIG. 37 , and FIG. 38 will be omitted.

Data 7901 relating to “supported precoding method” in FIG. 79 will bedescribed.

When the base station or AP transmits a plurality of modulated signalsfor a plurality of streams, a single precoding method is selected fromamong a plurality of precoding schemes, and weighted synthesis isperformed according to the selected precoding method (by, for example,weighting synthesizer 203 illustrated in FIG. 2 ) to generate amodulated signal to be transmitted. Note that, as described in thepresent specification, the base station or AP may perform a phasechange.

Here, data for the terminal to notify the base station or AP of “whetherthe base station or AP is capable of demodulating the modulated signalwhen any one of the precoding is implemented” is data 7901 related to“supported precoding method”.

For example, assume that the base station or AP may possibly support“Equation (33) or Equation (34)” as precoding method #A and support“θ=π/4 radians in Equation (15) or Equation (16)” as precoding method #Bupon generating a plurality of streams of modulated signals.

Upon generating a plurality of streams of modulated signals, assume thebase station or AP selects one of precoding method #A and precodingmethod #B and implements precoding (weighted synthesis) based on theselected precoding method, and transmits the modulated signals.

Here, the terminal transmits modulated signals including “information onwhether, upon the base station or AP transmitting a plurality ofmodulated signals using precoding method #A, the terminal is capable ofreceiving the modulated signals, demodulating the modulated signals andobtaining data” and “information on whether, upon the base station or APtransmitting a plurality of modulated signals using precoding method #B,the terminal is capable of receiving the modulated signals, demodulatingthe modulated signals and obtaining data”, and by receiving thesemodulated signals, the base station or AP can know of “whether theterminal, which is the communication partner, supports precoding method#A and/or precoding method #B and can demodulate the modulated signals”.

For example, information 7901 on supported precoding method illustratedin FIG. 79 and included in reception capability notification symbol(3502) that is transmitted by the terminal is configured as follows.

Information 7901 on supported precoding method is configured of twobits, bit m0 and bit m1, and the terminal transmits bit m0 and bit m1 tothe base station or AP, which is the communication partner, asinformation 7901 on supported precoding method.

If the terminal receives modulated signals generated using precodingmethod #A by the base station or AP and can demodulate (supportsdemodulation of) the received modulated signals, the terminal sets m0 to1, and transmits, to the base station or AP, which is the communicationpartner, bit m0 as part of information 7901 on supported precodingmethod.

Moreover, if the terminal receives modulated signals generated usingprecoding method #A by the base station or AP but does not supportdemodulation of the received modulated signals, the terminal sets m0 to0, and transmits, to the base station or AP, which is the communicationpartner, bit m0 as part of information 7901 on supported precodingmethod.

If the terminal receives modulated signals generated using precodingmethod #B by the base station or AP and can demodulate (supportsdemodulation of) the received modulated signals, the terminal sets m1 to1, and transmits, to the base station or AP, which is the communicationpartner, bit m1 as part of information 7901 on supported precodingmethod.

Moreover, if the terminal receives modulated signals generated usingprecoding method #B by the base station or AP but does not supportdemodulation of the received modulated signals, the terminal sets m1 to0, and transmits, to the base station or AP, which is the communicationpartner, bit m1 as part of information 7901 on supported precodingmethod.

Next, a specific operational example will be given.

As a first example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”, even if the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals, the terminal supports reception of such. Moreover, in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals and phase change is implemented, the terminal supportsreception of such.

The reception device of the terminal supports a single-carrier schemeand an OFDM scheme.

The reception device of the terminal supports decoding of “errorcorrection encoding scheme #C” and decoding of “error correctionencoding scheme #D” as an error correction encoding scheme.

The reception device of the terminal supports reception under “precodingmethod #A” and “precoding method #B” described above.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 79 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 79 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 79 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Note that in the case of the first example, bit m0 and bit m1 ofinformation 7901 on supported precoding method are set to 1 and 1,respectively.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 79 , control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that even if the communication partner transmitsa plurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals, the terminalsupports reception of such and in “communications scheme #A” and“communications scheme #B”, even if the communication partner transmitsa single stream modulated signal, the terminal supports reception ofsuch.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows that theterminal supports demodulation of modulated signals with phase changesbased on information 3601 relating to support for demodulation ofmodulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 79 .

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports a single-carrier scheme and an OFDM scheme based oninformation 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 79 .

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 79 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and decoding of error correction encoding scheme #D.

Based on information 7901 relating to supported precoding method in FIG.79 , control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports reception under precoding method #A and receptionunder precoding method #B.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a second example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 41 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, even if the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of a plurality of modulated signals, the reception device of theterminal does not support reception of such.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofa plurality of modulated signals and phase change is implemented, theterminal does not support reception of such.

The reception device of the terminal supports a single-carrier schemeand an OFDM scheme.

The reception device of the terminal supports decoding of “errorcorrection encoding scheme #C” and decoding of “error correctionencoding scheme #D” as an error correction encoding scheme.

The reception device of the terminal does not support reception under“precoding method #A” and “precoding method #B” described above.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 79 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 79 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 79 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 79 , control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that in “even if the communication partnertransmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals,the terminal does not support reception of such”.

Accordingly, based on information 3601 relating to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 79 beingnull, control signal generator 2308 in the base station determines tonot transmit a phase-changed modulated signal, and outputs controlsignal 2309 including such information.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station determines thatinformation 7901 related to supported precoding method in FIG. 79 isnull and the plurality of modulated signals for the plurality of streamswill not be transmitted, and outputs control signal 2309 including suchinformation.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports a single-carrier scheme and an OFDM scheme based oninformation 3601 relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 79 .

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 79 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and decoding of error correction encoding scheme #D.

For example, the terminal has the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 ,and thus operates are described above to prevent the plurality ofmodulated signals for the plurality of streams from being transmitted bythe base station or AP to allow the base station or AP to accuratelytransmit modulated signals that can be demodulated and decoded by theterminal. This makes it possible to achieve an advantageous effect of animprovement in data transmission efficiency in the system including thebase station or AP and terminal.

As a third example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”, even if the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals, the terminal supports reception of such. Moreover, in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals and phase change is implemented, the terminal supportsreception of such.

The reception device of the terminal supports a single-carrier schemeand an OFDM scheme.

The reception device of the terminal supports decoding of “errorcorrection encoding scheme #C” and decoding of “error correctionencoding scheme #D” as an error correction encoding scheme.

The reception device of the terminal supports reception of “precodingmethod #A” described above.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 79 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 79 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 79 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Note that in the case of the third example, bit m0 and bit m1 ofinformation 7901 on supported precoding method are set to 1 and 0,respectively.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 79 , control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that even if the communication partner transmitsa plurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals, the terminalsupports reception of such and in “communications scheme #A” and“communications scheme #B”, even if the communication partner transmitsa single stream modulated signal, the terminal supports reception ofsuch.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows that theterminal supports demodulation of modulated signals with phase changesbased on information 3601 relating to support for demodulation ofmodulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 79 .

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports a single-carrier scheme and an OFDM scheme based oninformation 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 79 .

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 79 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and decoding of error correction encoding scheme #D.

Then, based on information 7901 relating to supported precoding methodin FIG. 79 , control signal generator 2308 in the base station knowsthat the terminal supports reception under precoding method #A.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a fourth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”, even if the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals, the terminal supports reception of such. Moreover, in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

The reception device of the terminal supports single-carrier schemes.Note that in a single-carrier scheme, the base station, which is thecommunication partner, does not support “implementation of a phasechange for a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals,and does not support “implementations of precoding”.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofa plurality of modulated signals and phase change is implemented, theterminal does not support reception of such.

The reception device of the terminal supports decoding of “errorcorrection encoding scheme #C” and decoding of “error correctionencoding scheme #D” as an error correction encoding scheme.

The reception device of the terminal supports reception of “precodingmethod #A” described above.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 79 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 79 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 79 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Accordingly, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 79 , control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that even if the communication partner transmitsa plurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals, the terminalsupports reception of such, and in “communications scheme #A” and“communications scheme #B”, even if the communication partner transmitsa single stream modulated signal, the terminal supports reception ofsuch.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports single-carrier schemes based on information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 79 .

Accordingly, based on information 3601 relating to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 79 beingnull, control signal generator 2308 in the base station determines tonot transmit a phase-changed modulated signal, and outputs controlsignal 2309 including such information. Control signal generator 2308 inthe base station determines that information 7901 related to supportedprecoding method in FIG. 79 is null, and outputs control information2309 indicating that precoding method #A is supported.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 79 , control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and decoding of error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a fifth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 41 , and, for example, supports thefollowing.

For example, the reception device of the terminal supports receptionunder “communications scheme #A” described in Embodiment A2.

Accordingly, even if the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of a plurality of modulated signals, the terminal does notsupport reception of such.

Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofa plurality of modulated signals and phase change is implemented, theterminal does not support reception of such.

Furthermore, even if the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of a plurality of modulated signals generated using “precodingmethod #A”, the terminal does not support reception of such, and even ifthe communication partner transmits a plurality of streams of aplurality of modulated signals generated using “precoding method #B”,the terminal does not support reception of such.

Only single-carrier scheme is supported.

The terminal supports only decoding of “error correction encoding scheme#C” as an error correction encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 79 and, for example, transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 in accordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 79 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 79 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A is supported from supported scheme 3801.

Based on information 3601 related to support for demodulation ofmodulated signals with phase changes in FIG. 79 being null andcommunications scheme #A being supported, control signal generator 2308in the base station determines to not transmit modulated signalsimplemented with a phase change, and outputs control signal 2309including such information. This is because communications scheme #Adoes not support multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission orreception.

Based on information 3702 relating to support for reception for aplurality of streams in FIG. 79 being null and communications method #Abeing supported, control signal generator 2308 in the base stationdetermines to not transmit a plurality of modulated signals for aplurality of streams, and outputs control signal 2309 including suchinformation. This is because communications scheme #A does not supporttransmission or reception of a plurality of modulated signals for aplurality of streams.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station determines thatinformation 7901 related to supported precoding method in FIG. 79 isnull since communications scheme #A is supported, determines not totransmit the plurality of modulated signals for the plurality ofstreams, and outputs control signal 2309 including such information.

Based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 79 being null and communications method #A beingsupported, control signal generator 2308 in the base station determinesto use error correction encoding scheme #C, and outputs control signal2309 including such information. This is because communications scheme#A supports error correction encoding scheme #C.

For example, as illustrated in FIG. 41 , since communications method #Ais supported, the above-described operations are performed so that thebase station or AP does not transmit a plurality of modulated signalsfor a plurality of streams, whereby the base station or AP can achievean advantageous effect of an improvement in data transmission efficiencyin the system including the base station or AP and terminal, due to thecommunications method #A modulated signal being accurately transmitted.

As described above, the base station or AP obtains, from the terminal,which is the communication partner of the base station or AP,information relating to a scheme in which demodulation is supported bythe terminal, and based on that information, determines the number ofmodulated signals, the communications method of the modulated signals,and the signal processing method of the modulated signals, for example,and as a result, the base station or AP can accurately generate andtransmit a modulated signal receivable by the terminal, which makes itpossible to achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datatransmission efficiency in the system including the base station or APand terminal.

Here, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 79 , by configuring areception capability notification symbol of a plurality of items ofinformation, the base station or AP can easily determine the validity ofinformation included in the reception capability notification symbol,and as a result, it is possible to rapidly determine, for example, amodulated signal scheme and signal processing method to be used fortransmission.

Then, based on information on the reception capability notificationsymbol transmitted by the terminals, the base station or AP can improvedata transmission efficiency by transmitting modulated signals to eachterminal using a suitable transmission method.

Note that the method of configuring the information on the receptioncapability notification symbol described in this embodiment is merelyone non-limiting example. Moreover, the order in which and timing atwhich the terminal transmits the reception capability notificationsymbols to the base station or AP described in this embodiment aremerely non-limiting examples.

Embodiment B1

In this embodiment, an example of a specific phase change method usedunder a single-carrier (SC) scheme will be described.

In this embodiment, a case in which the base station or AP and theterminal communicate with each other will be supposed. Here, one exampleof the configuration of the transmission device in the base station orAP is as illustrated in FIG. 1 . Since this configuration has beendescribed in other embodiments, repeated description will be omitted.

FIG. 81 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of transmissionsignal 108_A illustrated in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 81 , time is represented onthe horizontal axis (accordingly, this relates to a single-carrierscheme signal).

As illustrated in FIG. 81 , in transmission signal 108_A, the basestation or AP transmits preamble 8101 from time t1 to time t20,transmits guard 8102 using time t21 through time t30, transmits datasymbol 8103 using time t31 through time t60, transmits guard 8104 usingt61 through t70, and transmits data symbol 8105 using t71 through t100.

FIG. 82 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of transmissionsignal 108_B illustrated in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 82 , time is represented onthe horizontal axis (accordingly, this relates to a single-carrierscheme signal).

As illustrated in FIG. 82 , in transmission signal 108_B, the basestation or AP transmits preamble 8201 from time t1 to time t20,transmits guard 8202 using time t21 through time t30, transmits datasymbol 8203 using time t31 through time t60, transmits guard 8204 usingt61 through t70, and transmits data symbol 8205 using t71 through t100.

Note that preamble 8101 and 8201 are symbols for channel estimation bythe terminal, which is the communication partner of the base station orAP, and, for example, the mapping method is PSK (phase shift keying)known to the base station and terminal. Preambles 8101 and 8201 aretransmitted at the same time using the same frequency.

Guards 8102 and 8202 are symbols that are inserted upon generation ofsingle-carrier scheme modulated signals. Guards 8102 and 8202 aretransmitted at the same time using the same frequency.

Data symbols 8103 and 8203 are data symbols for the base station or APto transmit data to the terminal. Data symbols 8103 and 8203 aretransmitted at the same time using the same frequency.

Guards 8104 and 8204 are symbols that are inserted upon generation ofsingle-carrier scheme modulated signals. Guards 8104 and 8204 aretransmitted at the same time using the same frequency.

Data symbols 8105 and 8205 are data symbols for the base station or APto transmit data to the terminal. Data symbols 8105 and 8205 aretransmitted at the same time using the same frequency.

Similar to Embodiment 1, the base station or AP generates mapped signals1(t) and mapped signal s2(t). When data symbols 8102 and 8105 includeonly mapped signal s1(t), data symbols 8202 and 8205 include only mappedsignal s2(t). Moreover, when data symbols 8102 and 8105 include onlymapped signal s2(t), data symbols 8202 and 8205 include only mappedsignal s1(t). When data symbols 8102 and 8105 include both mapped signals1(t) and mapped signal s2(t), data symbols 8202 and 8205 include bothmapped signal s1(t) and mapped signal s2(t). As this has already beendescribed in, for example, Embodiment 1, detailed description will beomitted.

For example, the configuration of signal processor 106 illustrated inFIG. 1 is as illustrated in FIG. 2 . Hereinafter, two suitable examplesof when a single-carrier scheme is used will be given.

Suitable Example 1

As a first measure in the first example, a phase change is implementedin phase changer 205B, and a phase change is not implemented in phasechanger 209B. Note that control of this is performed by control signal200. Here, the signal corresponding to transmission signal 108A in FIG.1 is signal 208A in FIG. 2 , and the signal corresponding totransmission signal 108B in FIG. 1 is signal 210B in FIG. 2 .

As a second measure in the first example, a phase change is implementedin phase changer 205B, and phase changer 209B is omitted. Here, thesignal corresponding to transmission signal 108A in FIG. 1 is signal208A in FIG. 2 , and the signal corresponding to transmission signal108B in FIG. 1 is signal 208B in FIG. 2 .

In suitable Example 1, either one of the first and second measures maybe implemented.

Next, operations performed by phase changer 205B will be described.Similar to the description given in Embodiment 1, in phase changer 205B,a phase change is implemented on a data symbol. Similar to Embodiment 1,the phase change value of symbol number i in phase changer 205B isexpressed as y(i). y(i) is applied with the following equation.[MATH. 153]y(i)=e ^(jλ(i))  Equation (153)

In FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 , data symbols are present at i=t31, t32, t33 . .. t58, t59, and t60, and i=t71, t72, t73 . . . t98, t99, and t100. Here,one important condition is that either one of Equation (154) andEquation (155) is satisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.154} \right\rbrack &  \\{{\frac{\pi}{2}{radians}} < {{\lambda(i)} - {\lambda\left( {i - 1} \right)}} < {\pi{radians}}} & {{Equation}(154)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.155} \right\rbrack &  \\{{\pi{radians}} < {{\lambda(i)} - {\lambda\left( {i - 1} \right)}} < {\frac{3\pi}{2}{radians}}} & {{Equation}(155)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Equation (154) and Equation (155), i=t32, t33, t34 . . .t58, t59, and t60, or i=t72, t73, t74 . . . t98, t99, t100. To rephrase“either one of Equation (154) and Equation (155) is satisfied”, whenλ(i)−λ(i−1) is greater than or equal to 0 radians and less than 2πradians, the value is as close to n as possible.

Taking into consideration the transmission spectrum, λ(i)−λ(i−1) need bea fixed value. As described in other embodiments, in environments inwhich direct waves are dominant, it is important λ(i) be switchedregularly by the reception device in the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station or AP, in order to achievegood data reception quality. The cycle of λ(i) may be increased asneeded. For example, consider a case in which the cycle is set to 5 orhigher.

When cycle X=2×n+1 (note that n is an integer that is greater than orequal to 2), it is sufficient if the following conditions are satisfied.

When i satisfies i=t32, t33, t34 . . . t58, t59, and t60, or i=t72, t73,t74 . . . t98, t99, t100, in any instance of i, Equation (156) issatisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.156} \right\rbrack &  \\{{{\lambda(i)} - {\lambda\left( {i - 1} \right)}} = {\pi - {\frac{\pi}{{2 \times n} + 1}{radians}}}} & {{Equation}(156)}\end{matrix}$

When cycle X=2×m (note that m is an integer that is greater than orequal to 3), it is sufficient if the following conditions are satisfied.

When i satisfies i=t32, t33, t34 . . . t58, t59, and t60, or i=t72, t73,t74 . . . t98, t99, t100, in any instance of i, Equation (157) issatisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.157} \right\rbrack &  \\{{{\lambda(i)} - {\lambda\left( {i - 1} \right)}} = {\pi - {\frac{\pi}{m}{radians}}}} & {{Equation}(157)}\end{matrix}$

It was stated that “when λ(i)−λ(i−1) is greater than or equal to 0radians and less than 2π radians, the value is as close to n aspossible”. This will be described next.

In FIG. 83 , a phase change is not implemented, that is to say, thespectrum of transmission signal 108A in FIG. 1 (signal 208A in FIG. 2 )is illustrated by solid line 8301 in FIG. 83 . In FIG. 83 , frequency isrepresented on the horizontal axis and amplitude is represented on thevertical axis.

In phase changer 205B illustrated in FIG. 2 , when λ(i)−λ(i−1) is set ton radians and a phase change is implemented, the spectrum oftransmission signal 108B in FIG. 1 is expressed by dotted line 8302 inFIG. 83 .

As illustrated in FIG. 83 , spectrum 8301 and spectrum 8302 effectivelypartially overlap. When transmission is performed to achieve this state,when the propagation environment of the base station and the terminal,which is the communication partner, is a multi-path environment, themulti-path effect on transmission signal 108A and the multi-path effecton transmission signal 108B are different, thereby improving thepossibility that spatial diversity can be achieved. The effect ofspatial diversity decreases as λ(i)−λ(i−1) nears 0.

Accordingly, “when λ(i)−λ(i−1) is greater than or equal to 0 radians andless than 2π radians, the value is as close to n as possible”.

However, when a phase change is implemented in phase changer 205B inFIG. 2 , as described in the present specification, in an environment inwhich direct waves are dominant, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect that the effect of data reception quality willincrease. Accordingly, when λ(i)−λ(i−1) is set to satisfy theabove-described conditions, in a multi-path environment, an environmentin which direct waves are dominant, or in both environments, it ispossible to achieve a superior advantageous effect, namely that highdata reception quality can be achieved by the terminal, which is thecommunication partner.

Suitable Example 2

In Example 2, phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change, andphase changer 209B does implement a phase change. Note that control ofthis is performed by control signal 200. Here, the signal correspondingto transmission signal 108A in FIG. 1 is signal 208A in FIG. 2 , and thesignal corresponding to transmission signal 108B in FIG. 1 is signal210B in FIG. 2 .

Next, operations performed by phase changer 209B will be described. Inphase changer 209B, in the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 82 ,a phase change is implemented on at least guards 8202 and 8204 and datasymbols 8203 and 8205. Note that a phase change may or may not beapplied to preamble 8201. The phase change value of phase changer 209Bis expressed as g(i). g(i) is applied with the following equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.158} \right\rbrack &  \\{{g(i)} = e^{j{\rho(i)}}} & {{Equation}(158)}\end{matrix}$

In FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 , data symbols and guards are present at i=t21,t22, t23 . . . t98, t99, and t100. Here, one important condition is thateither one of Equation (159) and Equation (160) is satisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.159} \right\rbrack &  \\{{\frac{\pi}{2}{radians}} < {{\rho(i)} - {\rho\left( {i - 1} \right)}} < {\pi{radians}}} & {{Equation}(159)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.160} \right\rbrack &  \\{{x{radians}} < {{\rho(i)} - {\rho\left( {i - 1} \right)}} < {\frac{3\pi}{2}{radians}}} & {{Equation}(160)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Equation (159) and Equation (160), i=t22, t23, t24 . . .t98, t99, and t100. To rephrase “either one of Equation (159) andEquation (160) is satisfied”, when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) is greater than or equalto 0 radians and less than 2n radians, the value is as close to n aspossible.

Taking into consideration the transmission spectrum, ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) need bea fixed value. As described in other embodiments, in environments inwhich direct waves are dominant, it is important ρ(i) be switchedregularly by the reception device in the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station or AP, in order to achievegood data reception quality. The cycle of ρ(i) may be increased asneeded. For example, consider a case in which the cycle is set to 5 orhigher.

When cycle X=2×n+1 (note that n is an integer that is greater than orequal to 2), it is sufficient if the following conditions are satisfied.

When i satisfies i=t22, t23, t24 . . . t98, t99, t100, in any instanceof i, Equation (161) is satisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.161} \right\rbrack &  \\{{{\rho(i)} - {\rho\left( {i - 1} \right)}} = {\pi - {\frac{\pi}{{2 \times n} + 1}{radians}}}} & {{Equation}(161)}\end{matrix}$

When cycle X=2×m (note that m is an integer that is greater than orequal to 3), it is sufficient if the following conditions are satisfied.

When i satisfies i=t22, t23, t24 . . . t98, t99, t100, in any instanceof i, Equation (162) is satisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.162} \right\rbrack &  \\{{{\rho(i)} - {\rho\left( {i - 1} \right)}} = {\pi - {\frac{\pi}{m}{radians}}}} & {{Equation}(162)}\end{matrix}$

It was stated that “when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) is greater than or equal to 0radians and less than 2π radians, the value is as close to n aspossible”. This will be described next.

In FIG. 83 , a phase change is not implemented, that is to say, thespectrum of transmission signal 108A in FIG. 1 (signal 208A in FIG. 2 )is illustrated by solid line 8301 in FIG. 83 . In FIG. 83 , frequency isrepresented on the horizontal axis and amplitude is represented on thevertical axis.

In phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 , when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) is set ton radians and a phase change is implemented, the spectrum oftransmission signal 108B in FIG. 1 is expressed by dotted line 8302 inFIG. 83 .

As illustrated in FIG. 83 , spectrum 8301 and spectrum 8302 effectivelypartially overlap. When transmission is performed to achieve this state,when the propagation environment of the base station and the terminal,which is the communication partner, is a multi-path environment, themulti-path effect on transmission signal 108A and the multi-path effecton transmission signal 108B are different, thereby improving thepossibility that spatial diversity can be achieved. The effect ofspatial diversity decreases as ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) nears 0.

Accordingly, “when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) is greater than or equal to 0 radians andless than 2π radians, the value is as close to n as possible”.

However, when a phase change is implemented in phase changer 209B inFIG. 2 , as described in the present specification, in an environment inwhich direct waves are dominant, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect that the effect of data reception quality willincrease. Accordingly, when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) is set to satisfy theabove-described conditions, in a multi-path environment, an environmentin which direct waves are dominant, or in both environments, it ispossible to achieve a superior advantageous effect, namely that highdata reception quality can be achieved by the terminal, which is thecommunication partner.

By setting the phase change value as described in the presentembodiment, in both an environment including multiple paths and in anenvironment which direct waves are dominant, it is possible to achievethe advantageous effect of improvement in data reception quality in theterminal, which is the communication partner. Note that one conceivableconfiguration for the reception device in the terminal is aconfiguration like the one illustrated in FIG. 8 , for example. However,as the operations illustrated in FIG. 8 have already been described inother embodiments, description will be omitted.

There are many methods for generating single-carrier scheme modulatedsignals. This embodiment can implement any of them for any of theschemes. Examples of single-carrier schemes include DFT (DiscreteFourier Transform)-Spread OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency DivisionMultiplexing), Trajectory Constrained DFT-Spread OFDM, OFDM based SC(Single Carrier), SC (Single Carrier)-FDMA (Frequency Division MultipleAccess), and Guard interval DFT-Spread OFDM.

Moreover, the phase change method according to this embodiment achievesthe same advantageous effects even when applied to a multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM. Note that when applied to a multi-carrier scheme,symbols may be aligned along the temporal axis, may be aligned along thefrequency axis (carrier axis), and may be aligned along both temporaland frequency axes. This is also explained in other embodiments.

Embodiment B2

In this embodiment, preferable examples of the precoding method used inthe transmission device in the base station or AP will be given.

In this embodiment, a case in which the base station or AP and theterminal communicate with each other will be supposed. Here, one exampleof the configuration of the transmission device in the base station orAP is as illustrated in FIG. 1 . Since this configuration has beendescribed in other embodiments, repeated description will be omitted.

Examples of the configuration of signal processor 106 in FIG. 1 areillustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22, FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , and FIG. 33 , andexamples of configurations including before and after weightingsynthesizer 203 are illustrated in FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62, FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 and FIG. 67 .

In this embodiment, preferable examples of the weighting synthesismethod used in weighting synthesizer 203 based on the modulation scheme(set) of mapped signal 201A (s1(t)) and mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) inFIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 ,FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 ,FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67will be given.

As a first example, the precoding method used in weighting synthesizer203 when mapped signal 201A (s1(t)) is BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying)and mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) is BPSK or when mapped signal 201A(s1(t)) is π/2 shift BPSK and mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) is π/2 shiftBPSK will be described.

First, a simple description of BPSK will be given. FIG. 84 illustratesan arrangement of signal points in an in-phase I-quadrature Q plane inthe case of BPSK. In FIG. 84, 8401 and 8402 indicate signal points. Forexample, at symbol number i=0, when “x0=0” is transmitted in a BPSKsymbol, the signal point is 8401, i.e., I=z, Q=0. Note that z is a realnumber that is greater than 0. When “x0=1” is transmitted in a BPSKsymbol, the signal point is 8402, i.e., I=−z, Q=0. However, therelationship between x0 and the signal points is not limited to theexample illustrated in FIG. 84 .

Next, a simple description of π/2 shift BPSK will be given. The symbolnumber is expressed as i. Note that i is an integer. When symbol numberi is an odd number, the signal points are arranged as illustrated inFIG. 84 . When symbol number i is an even number, the signal points arearranged as illustrated in FIG. 85 . However, the relationship betweenx0 and the signal points is not limited to the examples illustrated inFIG. 84 and FIG. 85 .

Next, FIG. 85 will be described. In FIG. 85, 8501 and 8502 indicatesignal points. At symbol number i=1, when “x0=0” is transmitted, thesignal point is 8501, i.e., I=0, Q=z. When “X0=1” is transmitted, thesignal point is 8502, i.e., I=0, Q=−z. However, the relationship betweenx0 and the signal points is not limited to the example illustrated inFIG. 85 .

As a different example of π/2 shift BPSK, when symbol number i is an oddnumber, the signal points are arranged as illustrated in FIG. 85 , andwhen symbol number i is an even number, the signal points are arrangedas illustrated in FIG. 84 . However, the relationship between x0 and thesignal points is not limited to the examples illustrated in FIG. 84 andFIG. 85 .

When the configuration of signal processor 106 in FIG. 1 is any one ofthe configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , or FIG. 60 , consider a case in which, forexample, precoding matrix F or F(i) used in weighting synthesizer 203 isonly a real number. For example, precoding matrix F is expressed withthe following equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.163} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}1 & {- 1} \\1 & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(163)}\end{matrix}$

For example, in the case of BPSK, the signal points of the signal afterprecoding in in-phase I-quadrature Q plane include three points, namely,signal points 8601, 8602, and 8603 illustrated in FIG. 86 (one pointoverlaps with a signal point).

In this state, consider a case in which, as illustrated in FIG. 1 ,transmission signals 108_A and 108_B are transmitted and in theterminal, which is the communication partner, the reception power ofeither of transmission signal 108_A or transmission signal 108_B is low.

Here, as illustrated in FIG. 86 , since there are only three signalpoints, a problem arises in which data reception quality is bad. Takingthis into consideration, a method is proposed in which precoding matrixF is comprised of not only real numbers. In one example, precodingmatrix F can be applied as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.164} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & j \\j & 1\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(164)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.165} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & j \\j & 1\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(165)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.166} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times 1} & {\alpha \times j} \\{\alpha \times j} & {\alpha \times 1}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(166)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.167} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}j & 1 \\1 & j\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(167)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.168} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}j & 1 \\1 & j\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(168)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.169} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{a \times j} & {\alpha \times 1} \\{\alpha \times 1} & {\alpha \times j}\end{pmatrix}.{}{or}}} & {{Equation}(169)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.170} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & j \\1 & {- j}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(170)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.171} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & j \\1 & {- j}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(171)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.172} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{a \times 1} & {\alpha \times j} \\{\alpha \times 1} & {\alpha \times j}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(172)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.173} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & {- j} \\1 & j\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(173)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.174} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & {- j} \\1 & j\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(174)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.175} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{a \times 1} & {{- \alpha} \times j} \\{\alpha \times 1} & {\alpha \times j}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(175)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.176} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}j & 1 \\{- j} & 1\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(176)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.177} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}j & 1 \\{- j} & 1\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(177)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.178} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times j} & {\alpha \times 1} \\{{- \alpha} \times j} & {\alpha \times 1}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(178)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.179} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{- j} & 1 \\j & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(179)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.180} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}{- j} & 1 \\j & 1\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(180)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.181} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{{- \alpha} \times j} & {\alpha \times 1} \\{\alpha \times j} & {\alpha \times 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(181)}\end{matrix}$

Note that α may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be animaginary number. However, α is not 0 (zero).

In weighting synthesizer 203, when precoding is performed using eitherone of the precoding matrices expressed in Equation (164) or Equation(181), the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane ofweighting synthesized signals 204A, 204B are arranged like signal points8701, 8702, 8703, and 8704 illustrated in FIG. 87 . Accordingly, whenthe base station or AP transmits transmission signals 108_A and 108_Band in the terminal, which is the communication partner, the receptionpower of either of transmission signal 108_A or transmission signal108_B is low, taking into consideration the state illustrated in FIG. 87, it is possible to achieve the advantageous effect of an improvement indata reception quality by the terminal.

Note that in the above description, the configuration of signalprocessor 106 in the transmission device in FIG. 1 included in the basestation or AP is described as being any one of the configurationsillustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22, FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , but in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 209A, and phase changer 209B in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19, FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , a phase changeneed not be implemented. Here, a phase change is not implemented oninput signals, and the signals are output as-is. For example, in FIG. 2, when phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change, signal 204Bbecomes signal 206B. When phase changer 209B does not perform a phasechange, signal 208B becomes signal 210B.

Phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 209A, and/or phasechanger 209B may be omitted. For example, in FIG. 2 , when phase changer205B is omitted, input 206B of inserter 207B corresponds to signal 204B.Moreover, when phase changer 209B is omitted, signal 210B corresponds tosignal 208B.

Next, as a second example, the precoding method used in weightingsynthesizer 203 when mapped signal 201A (s1(t)) is QPSK (QuadraturePhase Shift Keying) and mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) is QPSK will bedescribed.

First, a simple description of QPSK will be given. FIG. 85 illustratesan arrangement of signal points in an in-phase I-quadrature Q plane inthe case of QPSK. In FIG. 85, 8701, 8702, 8703, and 8704 indicate signalpoints. In a QPSK symbol, mapping of any one of signal points 8701,8702, 8703, and 8704 is performed on the two-bit input of x0, x1 toobtain in-phase component I, quadrature component Q.

When the configuration of signal processor 106 in FIG. 1 is any one ofthe configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , or FIG. 60 , for example, the following isapplied as the precoding matrix F used in weighting synthesizer 203.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.182} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 2 \\{- 2} & 1\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(182)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.183} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 2 \\{- 2} & 1\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(183)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.184} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 1} & {\beta \times 2} \\{{- \beta} \times 2} & {\beta \times 1}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(184)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.185} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}2 & 1 \\1 & {- 2}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(185)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.186} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}2 & 1 \\1 & {- 2}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(186)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.187} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 2} & {\beta \times 1} \\{\beta \times 1} & {{- \beta} \times 2}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(187)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.188} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & {- 2} \\2 & 1\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(188)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.189} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & {- 2} \\2 & 1\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(189)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.190} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 1} & {{- \beta} \times 2} \\{\beta \times 2} & {\beta \times 1}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(190)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.191} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{- 2} & 1 \\1 & 2\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(191)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.192} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}{- 2} & 1 \\1 & 2\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(192)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.193} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{{- \beta} \times 2} & {\beta \times 1} \\{\beta \times 1} & {\beta \times 2}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(193)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.194} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 2 \\2 & {- 1}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(194)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.195} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 2 \\2 & {- 1}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(195)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.196} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 1} & {\beta \times 2} \\{\beta \times 2} & {{- \beta} \times 1}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(196)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.197} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}2 & 1 \\{- 1} & 2\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(197)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.198} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}2 & 1 \\{- 1} & 2\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(198)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.199} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 2} & {\beta \times 1} \\{{- \beta} \times 1} & {\beta \times 2}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(199)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.200} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{- 1} & 2 \\2 & 1\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(200)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.201} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}{- 1} & 2 \\2 & 1\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(201)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.202} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{{- \beta} \times 1} & {\beta \times 2} \\{\beta \times 2} & {\beta \times 1}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(202)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.203} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}2 & {- 1} \\1 & 2\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(203)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.204} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}2 & {- 1} \\1 & 2\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(204)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.205} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 2} & {{- \beta} \times 1} \\{\beta \times 1} & {\beta \times 2}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(205)}\end{matrix}$

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.However, β is not 0 (zero).

In weighting synthesizer 203, when precoding is performed using eitherone of the precoding matrices expressed in Equation (182) or Equation(205), the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane ofweighting synthesized signals 204A, 204B do not overlap and are widelyspread apart. Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmitstransmission signals 108_A and 108_B and in the terminal, which is thecommunication partner, the reception power of either of transmissionsignal 108_A or transmission signal 108_B is low, taking intoconsideration the state of the signal points described above, it ispossible to achieve the advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality by the terminal.

Note that in the above description, it is described that theconfiguration of signal processor 106 in the transmission device in FIG.1 included in the base station or AP is any one of the configurationsillustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22, FIG. 59 , or FIG. 60 , phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phasechanger 209A, and phase changer 209B in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 ,FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , or FIG. 60 need not apply aphase change. Here, a phase change is not implemented on input signals,and the signals are output as-is. For example, (in FIG. 2 ) when phasechanger 205B does not implement a phase change, signal 204B correspondsto 206B. When phase changer 209B does not implement a phase change,signal 208B corresponds to signal 210B. When phase changer 205A does notimplement a phase change, signal 204A corresponds to signal 206A. Whenphase changer 209A does not implement a phase change, signal 208Acorresponds to 210B.

Phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 209A, and/or phasechanger 209B may be omitted. For example, (in FIG. 2 ) when phasechanger 205B is omitted, input 206B of inserter 207B corresponds tosignal 204B. When phase changer 209B is omitted, signal 210B correspondsto signal 208B. When phase changer 205A is omitted, input 206A ofinserter 207A corresponds to signal 204A. When phase changer 209A isomitted, signal 210A corresponds to signal 208A.

When the precoding matrices are set as described above, it is possibleto achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the terminal, which is the communication partner of the basestation or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined with otherembodiments, including Embodiment B1.

Embodiment B3

In this embodiment, the configuration method of the preamble and controlinformation symbol transmitted by the base station or AP and theoperations performed by the terminal, which is the communication partnerof the base station or AP will be described.

In Embodiment A8, the base station or AP is described as being able toselectively transmit a multi-carrier scheme, such as OFDM, modulatedsignal and a single-carrier scheme modulated signal (in particular, inthe second example).

In this embodiment, the configuration method and transmission method ofpreambles and control information symbols in such a case will bedescribed.

As described in Embodiment A8, the configuration of the transmissiondevice in the base station or AP is the configuration illustrated inFIG. 1 or FIG. 44. However, the transmission device in the base stationmay be configured so as to include one error correction encoderillustrated in FIG. 1 , and may be configured so as to include theplurality of error correction encoders illustrated in FIG. 44 .

Radio unit 107_A and radio unit 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44have the configuration illustrated in FIG. 55 , and are characterized inthat they can selectively switch between a single-carrier scheme and anOFDM scheme. Note that since operations pertaining to FIG. 55 havealready been described in Embodiment A8 in detail, description will beomitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 88 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal transmitted by the base station or AP. Time isrepresented on the horizontal axis.

The base station or AP first transmits preamble 8801, and subsequentlytransmits control information symbol (header block) 8802 and data symbol8803.

Preamble 8801 is a symbol for the reception device in the terminal,which is the communication partner of the base station or AP, toperform, for example, signal detection of a modulated signal transmittedby the base station or AP, frame synchronization, time synchronization,frequency synchronization, frequency offset estimation, and/or channelestimation. For example, preamble 8801 is configured as a PSK symbolknown to the base station and terminal.

control information symbol (also referred to as a header block) 8802 isa symbol for transmitting control information related to data symbol8803, and includes, for example, the transmission method of data symbol8803, such as information on whether the transmission method is asingle-carrier scheme or an OFDM scheme, information on whether thetransmission method is single stream transmission or multi-streamtransmission, information on the modulation scheme, and/or informationon the error correction encoding method used upon generating the datasymbols (for example, error correction code information, code lengthinformation, information on the encode rate of the error correctioncode). Moreover, control information symbol (also referred to as aheader block) 8802 may include, for example, information on the datalength to be transmitted.

Data symbol 8803 is a symbol for the base station or AP to transmitdata, and the transmission method of which is switched as describedabove.

Note that FIG. 88 is merely one non-limiting example of a frameconfiguration. Moreover, not each of preamble 8801, control informationsymbol 8802, and data symbol 8803 need be present in the frame. Forexample, a pilot symbol or reference symbol may be included in the datasymbol.

In this embodiment, as the transmission method for the data symbol, whena MIMO scheme (multi-stream transmission) and a single-carrier schemeare selected, when signal processor 106 includes any one of theconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 ,FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 ,FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , a phase change is not implemented byphase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and phasechanger 5901B. Then, as the transmission method for the data symbol,when a MIMO scheme (multi-stream transmission) and an OFDM scheme areselected, when signal processor 106 includes any one of theconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 ,FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 ,FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , switching can be performed for whethera phase change is implemented by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B.

Next, information v1, v2, v3, and v4 included in control informationsymbol (header block) 8802 illustrated in FIG. 88 and transmitted by thebase station or AP will be described.

TABLE 8 v1 transmission method 0 single-carrier scheme 1 OFDM scheme

Interpretation of Table 8 is as follows.

When the transmission scheme of data symbol 8803 in FIG. 88 is asingle-carrier scheme, v1 is set to 0 (v1=0), and the base station or APtransmits v1. When the transmission scheme of data symbol 8803 in FIG.88 is an OFDM scheme, v1 is set to 1 (v1=1), and the base station or APtransmits v1.

TABLE 9 v2 stream(s) to be transmitted 0 single stream 1 plural streams(MIMO)

Interpretation of Table 9 is as follows.

When single stream transmission is to be used upon transmitting datasymbol 8803 illustrated in FIG. 88 , v2 is set to 0 (v2=0), and the basestation or AP transmits v2. When a plurality of modulated signals are tobe transmitted at the same frequency and time using a plurality ofantennas upon transmitting data symbol 8803 illustrated in FIG. 88 , v2is set to 1 (v2=1), and the base station or AP transmits v2.

However, in Table 9, the meaning of v2=1 may be interpreted as“transmission other than single stream transmission”.

Moreover, a configuration method of information that can be interpretedthe same as in Table 9 includes a method of preparing a plurality ofbits and transmitting information on the number of transmission streams.

For example, when v21 and v22 are prepared and v21 and v22 are set suchthat v21=0 and v22=0, the base station or AP transmits a single stream,when v21 and v22 are set such that v21=1 and v22=0, the base station orAP transmits two streams, when v21 and v22 are set such that v21=0 andv22=1, the base station or AP transmits four streams, and when v21 andv22 are set such that v21=1 and v22=1, the base station or AP transmitseight streams. Then, the base station or AP transmits v21 and v22 ascontrol information.

TABLE 10 v3 phase changer operation 0 phase change not implementedcyclically/regularly (OFF) 1 phase change implementedcyclically/regularly (ON)

Interpretation of Table 10 is as follows.

When a plurality of modulated signals are transmitted at the samefrequency and time using a plurality of antennas upon transmitting datasymbol 8803 illustrated in FIG. 88 , and signal processor 106 has anyone of the configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 ,FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 ,FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 ,FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , when a phase change is notimplemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer5901A, and phase changer 5901B, v3 is set to 0 (v3=0), and the basestation or AP transmits v3. When a plurality of modulated signals aretransmitted at the same frequency and time using a plurality of antennasupon transmitting data symbol 8803 illustrated in FIG. 88 , and signalprocessor 106 has any one of the configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 ,FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , when aphase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B, v3 is set to 1 (v3=1), andthe base station or AP transmits v3.

TABLE 11 precoding method when phase change is v4 implementedcyclically/regularly 0 use precoding matrix #1 1 use precoding matrix #2

Interpretation of Table 11 is as follows.

When a plurality of modulated signals are transmitted at the samefrequency and time using a plurality of antennas upon transmitting datasymbol 8803 illustrated in FIG. 88 , and signal processor 106 has anyone of the configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 ,FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 ,FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 ,FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , when a phase change isimplemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer5901A, and phase changer 5901B, if precoding is to be performed usingprecoding matrix #1 in weighting synthesizer 203, v4 is set to 0 (v4=0),and the base station transmits v4. When a plurality of modulated signalsare transmitted at the same frequency and time using a plurality ofantennas upon transmitting data symbol 8803 illustrated in FIG. 88 , andsignal processor 106 has any one of the configurations illustrated inFIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 ,FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 ,FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67, when a phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phasechanger 205B, phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B, if precodingis to be performed using precoding matrix #2 in weighting synthesizer203, v4 is set to 1 (v4=1), and the base station transmits v4.

Hereinbefore, v1, v2 (or v21 and v22), v3, and v4 have been described.Hereinafter, details regarding v3 and v4 in particular will bedescribed.

As described above, as the transmission method for the data symbol, whena MIMO scheme (multi-stream transmission) and a single-carrier schemeare selected, when signal processor 106 includes any one of theconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 ,FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 ,FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , a phase change is not implemented byphase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and phasechanger 5901B.

Accordingly, when the base station or AP sets v1 to 0 (v1=0), and thetransmission scheme used for the data symbol in FIG. 88 is asingle-carrier scheme, (regardless of whether v2 indicates 0 or 1), theinformation on v3 is null (v3 may be set to 0 and may be set to 1)(then, when the data symbol in FIG. 88 is a single stream modulatedsignal or includes any one of the configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 ,FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , a phasechange is not implemented by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B, and a plurality ofmodulated signals are transmitted using a MIMO scheme. Note that thebase station or AP may have a configuration in which phase changer 205A,phase changer 205B, and phase changer 5901A are omitted).

On the other hand, as the transmission method for the data symbol, whena MIMO scheme (multi-stream transmission) and an OFDM scheme areselected, when signal processor 106 includes any one of theconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 ,FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 ,FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , switching can be performed for whethera phase change is implemented by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B.

Accordingly, when a single stream is used when the base station or APsets v1 to 1 (v1=1), the transmission scheme of the data symbol in FIG.88 is OFDM, v2 is set to 0 (v2=0) (or v21 and v22 are set to 0 (v21=0,v22=0)), and data symbol 8803 in FIG. 88 is transmitted, information onv3 is null (v3 may be set to 0 or 1) (here, the base station or APtransmits a single stream modulated signal).

When a plurality of modulated signals are transmitted at the samefrequency and time using a plurality of antennas when the base stationor AP sets v1 to 1 (v1=1), the transmission scheme of the data symbol inFIG. 88 is OFDM, v2 is set to 1 (v2=1) (or v21 and v22 are set tosomething other than 0 (something other than v21=0, v22=0)), and datasymbol 8803 in FIG. 88 is transmitted, information on v3 “the basestation or AP supports phase change”, and “reception is possible evenwhen the terminal, which is the communication partner of the basestation or AP, has performed a phase change” is valid. Then, when thesetting for v3 is valid, when the base station or AP does not implementa phase change in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer5901A, or phase changer 5901B, v3 is set to 0 (v3=0), and the basestation or AP transmits v3. When the base station or AP does implement aphase change in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, v3 is set to 1 (v3=1), and the basestation or AP transmits v3.

Note that since the determination of whether the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station or AP, is capable of receptioneven when a phase change is implemented has already been described inanother embodiment, repeated description will be omitted in thisembodiment. Moreover, when the base station or AP does not supportimplementation of a phase change, the base station or AP does notinclude phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A,phase changer 5901B.

Next, v4 will be described.

As described above, as the transmission method for the data symbol, whena MIMO scheme (multi-stream transmission) and a single-carrier schemeare selected, when signal processor 106 includes any one of theconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 ,FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 ,FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , a phase change is not implemented byphase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and phasechanger 5901B.

Accordingly, when the base station or AP sets v1 to 0 (v1=0), and thetransmission scheme used for the data symbol in FIG. 88 is asingle-carrier scheme, (regardless of whether v2 indicates 0 or 1), theinformation on v4 is null (v4 may be set to 0 and may be set to 1)(then, when the data symbol in FIG. 88 is a single-carrier schememodulated signal or includes any one of the configurations illustratedin FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 ,FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 ,FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67, a phase change is not implemented by phase changer 205A, phase changer205B, phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B, and a plurality ofmodulated signals are transmitted using a MIMO scheme. Note that thebase station or AP may have a configuration in which phase changer 205A,phase changer 205B, and phase changer 5901A are omitted).

On the other hand, as the transmission method for the data symbol, whena MIMO scheme (multi-stream transmission) and an OFDM scheme areselected, when signal processor 106 includes any one of theconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 ,FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 ,FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , switching can be performed for whethera phase change is implemented by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B.

Accordingly, when a single stream is used when the base station or APsets v1 to 1 (v1=1), the transmission scheme of the data symbol in FIG.88 is OFDM, v2 is set to 0 (v2=0) (or v21 and v22 are set to 0 (v21=0,v22=0)), and data symbol 8803 in FIG. 88 is transmitted, information onv4 is null (v4 may be set to 0 or 1) (here, the base station or APtransmits a single stream modulated signal).

When a plurality of modulated signals are transmitted at the samefrequency and time using a plurality of antennas when the base stationor AP sets v1 to 1 (v1=1), the transmission scheme of the data symbol inFIG. 88 is OFDM, v2 is set to 1 (v2=1) (or v21 and v22 are set tosomething other than 0 (something other than v21=0, v22=0)), and datasymbol 8803 in FIG. 88 is transmitted, there is a possibility thatinformation on v4 “the base station or AP supports phase change”, and“reception is possible even when the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station or AP, has performed a phasechange” is valid.

When the base station or AP does not implement a phase change in phasechanger 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phasechanger 5901B, v4 is null and may be set to 0 or 1 (and the base stationor AP transmits v4 information).

When the base station or AP does implement a phase change in phasechanger 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phasechanger 5901B, v4 information is valid, and in weighting synthesizer203, if precoding is to be performed using precoding matrix #1, v4 isset to 0 (v4=0), and the base station or AP transmits v4. In weightingsynthesizer 203, if precoding is to be performed using precoding matrix#2, v4 is set to 1 (v4=1), and the base station transmits v4.

Note that since the determination of whether the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station or AP, is capable of receptioneven when a phase change is implemented has already been described inanother embodiment, repeated description will be omitted in thisembodiment. Moreover, when the base station or AP does not supportimplementation of a phase change, the base station or AP does notinclude phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A,phase changer 5901B.

Although an example is given above in which control information symbol8802 includes information v1, v2, v3, and v4, the base station or APneed not transmit all of information v1, v2, v3, and v4 in controlinformation symbol 8802.

For example, regarding at least some of the signals in preamble 8801 inFIG. 88 , when the transmission method of data symbol 8803 differs inregard to being a single-carrier scheme or an OFDM scheme, the basestation or AP may transmit information v1 in the control informationsymbol. In such cases, based on the signal transmitted as preamble 8801,the terminal determines whether the transmission scheme of data symbol8803 is a single-carrier scheme or an OFDM scheme.

Note that, regarding at least some of the signals in preamble 8801 inFIG. 88 , when the transmission method of data symbol 8803 differs inregard to being a single-carrier scheme or an OFDM scheme, the basestation or AP may transmit information v1 in control information symbol8802. In such cases, based on one or both of (i) the signal transmittedas preamble 8801 and (ii) information v1 included in control informationsymbol 8802, the terminal determines whether the transmission scheme ofdata symbol 8803 is a single-carrier scheme or an OFDM scheme.

In the above description, an example is given in which the terminal candetermine the information known by information v1 based on a singleother than control information symbol 8802, but regarding informationv2, v3, and v4 as well, when the terminal can make a determination basedon a signal other than control information symbol 8802, information thatenables said determination need not be transmitted in controlinformation symbol 8802. However, similar to the example given regardinginformation v1, even information indicating that the terminal can makethe determination based on a signal other than control informationsymbol 8802 may be transmitted in control information symbol 8802.

Moreover, for example, when, depending on whether the transmissionscheme of data symbol 8803 is a single-carrier scheme or an OFDM scheme,control information symbol 8802 includes other control information inwhich the possible values are different, this other control informationmay be taken as information v1. In such cases, based on this othercontrol information, the terminal determines whether the transmissionscheme of data symbol 8803 is a single-carrier scheme or an OFDM scheme.

In the above description, when the transmission device in the basestation or AP has any one of the configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 ,FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 ,FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 ,FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , a phasechange need not be implemented in phase changer 209A, phase changer209B. Here, a phase change is not implemented on input signals, and thesignals are output as-is. For example, (in FIG. 2 ) when phase changer209B does not implement a phase change, signal 208B corresponds tosignal 210B. Moreover, when phase changer 209A does not implement aphase change, signal 208A corresponds to signal 210A. As anotherconfiguration, phase changer 209A and phase changer 209B may be omitted.For example, (in FIG. 2 ) when phase changer 209B is omitted, signal210B corresponds to signal 208B. When phase changer 209A is omitted,signal 210A corresponds to signal 208A.

Next, operations performed by the reception device of the terminal,which is the communication partner of the base station or AP, will bedescribed.

The configuration of the reception device of the terminal is illustratedin FIG. 89 . In FIG. 89 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 8share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereofwill be omitted.

Signal detector, synchronizer 8901 receives inputs of baseband signal804X, 804Y, detects preamble 8801 included in baseband signal 804X,804Y, performs signal detection, frame synchronization, timesynchronization, frequency synchronization, frequency offset estimation,etc., and outputs the result as system control signal 8902.

Channel estimation unit 805_1, 807_1 of modulated signal u1 and channelestimation unit 805_2 807_2 of modulated signal u2 receive an input ofsystem control signal 8902, and based on system control signal 8902, forexample, detect preamble 8801 and perform channel estimation.

Control information decoder (control information detector) 809 receivesinputs of baseband signal 804X, 804Y and system control signal 8902,detects control information symbol (header block) 8802 illustrated inFIG. 88 and included in baseband signal 804X, 804Y, performsdemodulation and decoding to obtain control information, and outputs theresult as control signal 810.

Then, signal processor 811, radio unit 803X, 803Y, antenna unit #X(801X), antenna unit #Y (801Y) receive an input of control signal 810,and may switch operations to be performed based on control signal 810.Note that details will be described later.

Control information decoder (control information detector) 809 receivesinputs of baseband signal 804X, 804Y and system control signal 8902,detects control information symbol (header block) 8802 illustrated inFIG. 88 and included in baseband signal 804X, 804Y, performsdemodulation and decoding, and at least obtains v1 in Table 8, v2 inTable 9, v3 in Table 10, and v4 in Table 11 transmitted by the basestation or AP. Hereinafter, a detailed example of operations performedby control information decoder (control information detector) 809 willbe given.

Consider a terminal capable of demodulating only a single-carrier schememodulated signal. In such a case, the terminal determines that v3information (v3 bit) obtained by control information decoder (controlinformation detector) 809 is null (v3 information (v3 bit) is notnecessary). Accordingly, since the modulated signal generated by thebase station or AP when a phase change is implemented in phase changer205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer5901B is not transmitted, signal processor 911 does not performcorresponding signal processing, but instead performs demodulationand/or decoding corresponding to signal processing under a differentscheme to obtain and output reception data 812.

More specifically, when the terminal receives a signal transmitted fromanother communications device such as the base station or AP, theterminal determines, based on preamble 8801 and control informationsymbol 8802, whether data symbol 8803 is an OFDM scheme modulated signalor a single-carrier scheme modulated signal. When determined to be anOFDM scheme modulated signal, since the terminal is not functionallyequipped to demodulate data symbol 8803, data symbol 8803 is notdemodulated. On the other hand, when determined to be a single-carrierscheme modulated signal, the terminal demodulates data symbol 8803.Here, the terminal determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803based on information obtained by control information decoder (controlinformation detector) 809. Here, since a phase change is not implementedcyclically/regularly on a single-carrier scheme modulated signal, theterminal uses, among control information obtained by control informationdecoder (control information detector) 809, control informationexcluding at least the bit corresponding to v3 information to determinethe demodulation method for data symbol 8803.

Consider a terminal capable of demodulating only a single streammodulated signal. In such a case, the terminal determines that v3information (v3 bit) obtained by control information decoder (controlinformation detector) 809 is null (v3 information (v3 bit) is notnecessary). Accordingly, since the modulated signal generated by thebase station or AP when a phase change is implemented in phase changer205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer5901B is not transmitted, signal processor 911 does not performcorresponding signal processing, but instead performs demodulationand/or decoding corresponding to signal processing under a differentscheme to obtain and output reception data 812.

More specifically, when the terminal receives a signal transmitted fromanother communications device such as the base station or AP, theterminal determines, based on preamble 8801 and control informationsymbol 8802, whether data symbol 8803 is a single stream modulatedsignal or a multi-stream modulated signal. When determined to be amulti-stream modulated signal, since the terminal is not functionallyequipped to demodulate data symbol 8803, data symbol 8803 is notdemodulated. On the other hand, when determined to be a single streammodulated signal, the terminal demodulates data symbol 8803. Here, theterminal determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803 based oninformation obtained by control information decoder (control informationdetector) 809. Here, since a phase change is not implementedcyclically/regularly on a single stream modulated signal, the terminaluses, among control information obtained by control information decoder(control information detector) 809, control information excluding atleast the bit corresponding to v3 information to determine thedemodulation method for data symbol 8803.

Even if the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal generatedwhen a phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, a terminal thatdoes not support demodulation of such a modulated signal determines thatv3 information (v3 bit) obtained by control information demodulator(control information detector) 809 is null (v3 information (v3 bit) isnot necessary). Accordingly, since the modulated signal generated by thebase station or AP when a phase change is implemented in phase changer205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer5901B is not transmitted, signal processor 911 does not performcorresponding signal processing, but instead performs demodulationand/or decoding corresponding to signal processing under a differentscheme to obtain and output reception data 812.

More specifically, when the terminal receives a signal transmitted fromanother communications device such as the base station or AP, theterminal demodulates and decodes data symbol 8803 based on preamble 8801and control information symbol 8802, but since “even if the base stationor AP transmits a modulated signal generated when a phase change isimplemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, the terminal does not supportdemodulation of such a modulated signal”, a phase change is notimplemented cyclically/regularly, and the terminal determines ademodulation method for data symbol 8803 using, from among controlinformation obtained by control information decoder (control informationdetector) 809, at least control information excluding at least the bitcorresponding to v3 information.

When the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal generated whena phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, when a terminal thatsupports demodulation of such a modulated signal determines in controlinformation demodulator (control information detector) 809 that themodulated signal is an OFDM scheme modulated signal from v1, v3information (v3 bit) is determined to be valid.

Here, control information decoder (control information detector) 809determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803 based on controlinformation including v3 information (v3 bit). Then, signal processor811 performs operations for demodulation and decoding using a methodbased on the determined demodulation method.

When the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal generated whena phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, when a terminal thatsupports demodulation of such a modulated signal determines in controlinformation demodulator (control information detector) 809 that themodulated signal is single-carrier scheme modulated signal from v1, v3information (v3 bit) is determined to be null (v3 information (v3 bit)is not necessary).

Here, control information decoder (control information detector) 809determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803 using controlinformation excluding at least the bit corresponding to v3 information.Then, signal processor 811 performs operations for demodulation anddecoding using a method based on the determined demodulation method.

When the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal generated whena phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, when a terminal thatsupports demodulation of such a modulated signal determines in controlinformation demodulator (control information detector) 809 that themodulated signal is a single stream modulated signal from v2 (or v21,v22), v3 information (v3 bit) is determined to be null (v3 information(v3 bit) is not necessary).

Here, control information decoder (control information detector) 809determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803 using controlinformation excluding at least the bit corresponding to v3 information.Then, signal processor 811 performs operations for demodulation anddecoding using a method based on the determined demodulation method.

Consider a terminal capable of demodulating only a single-carrier schememodulated signal. In such a case, the terminal determines that v4information (v4 bit) obtained by control information decoder (controlinformation detector) 809 is null (v4 information (v4 bit) is notnecessary). Accordingly, since the modulated signal generated by thebase station or AP when a phase change is implemented in phase changer205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer5901B is not transmitted, signal processor 911 does not performcorresponding signal processing, but instead performs demodulationand/or decoding corresponding to signal processing under a differentscheme to obtain and output reception data 812.

More specifically, when the terminal receives a signal transmitted fromanother communications device such as the base station or AP, theterminal determines, based on preamble 8801 and control informationsymbol 8802, whether data symbol 8803 is an OFDM scheme modulated signalor a single-carrier scheme modulated signal. When determined to be anOFDM scheme modulated signal, since the terminal is not functionallyequipped to demodulate data symbol 8803, data symbol 8803 is notdemodulated. On the other hand, when determined to be a single-carrierscheme modulated signal, the terminal demodulates data symbol 8803.Here, the terminal determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803based on information obtained by control information decoder (controlinformation detector) 809. Here, since a phase change is not implementedcyclically/regularly on a single-carrier scheme modulated signal, theterminal uses, among control information obtained by control informationdecoder (control information detector) 809, control informationexcluding at least the bit corresponding to (v3 information and) v4information to determine the demodulation method for data symbol 8803.

Consider a terminal capable of demodulating only a single streammodulated signal. In such a case, the terminal determines that v4information (v4 bit) obtained by control information decoder (controlinformation detector) 809 is null (v4 information (v4 bit) is notnecessary). Accordingly, since the modulated signal generated by thebase station or AP when a phase change is implemented in phase changer205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer5901B is not transmitted, signal processor 911 does not performcorresponding signal processing, but instead performs demodulationand/or decoding corresponding to signal processing under a differentscheme to obtain and output reception data 812.

More specifically, when the terminal receives a signal transmitted fromanother communications device such as the base station or AP, theterminal determines, based on preamble 8801 and control informationsymbol 8802, whether data symbol 8803 is a single stream modulatedsignal or a multi-stream modulated signal. When determined to be amulti-stream modulated signal, since the terminal is not functionallyequipped to demodulate data symbol 8803, data symbol 8803 is notdemodulated. On the other hand, when determined to be a single streammodulated signal, the terminal demodulates data symbol 8803. Here, theterminal determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803 based oninformation obtained by control information decoder (control informationdetector) 809. Here, since a phase change is not implementedcyclically/regularly on a single stream modulated signal, the terminaluses, among control information obtained by control information decoder(control information detector) 809, control information excluding atleast the bit corresponding to (v3 information and) v4 information todetermine the demodulation method for data symbol 8803.

Even if the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal generatedwhen a phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, a terminal thatdoes not support demodulation of such a modulated signal determines thatv4 information (v4 bit) obtained by control information demodulator(control information detector) 809 is null (v4 information (v4 bit) isnot necessary). Accordingly, since the modulated signal generated by thebase station or AP when a phase change is implemented in phase changer205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer5901B is not transmitted, signal processor 911 does not performcorresponding signal processing, but instead performs demodulationand/or decoding corresponding to signal processing under a differentscheme to obtain and output reception data 812.

More specifically, when the terminal receives a signal transmitted fromanother communications device such as the base station or AP, theterminal demodulates and decodes data symbol 8803 based on preamble 8801and control information symbol 8802, but since “even if the base stationor AP transmits a modulated signal generated when a phase change isimplemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, the terminal does not supportdemodulation of such a modulated signal”, a phase change is notimplemented cyclically/regularly, and the terminal determines ademodulation method for data symbol 8803 using, from among controlinformation obtained by control information decoder (control informationdetector) 809, at least control information excluding at least the bitcorresponding to (v3 information and) v4 information.

When the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal generated whena phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, when a terminal thatsupports demodulation of such a modulated signal determines in controlinformation demodulator (control information detector) 809 that themodulated signal is an OFDM scheme modulated signal from v1, v4information (v4 bit) is determined to be valid.

Here, control information decoder (control information detector) 809determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803 based on controlinformation including v4 information (v4 bit). Then, signal processor811 performs operations for demodulation and decoding using a methodbased on the determined demodulation method.

When the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal generated whena phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, when a terminal thatsupports demodulation of such a modulated signal determines in controlinformation demodulator (control information detector) 809 that themodulated signal is single-carrier scheme modulated signal from v1, v4information (v4 bit) is determined to be null (v4 information (v4 bit)is not necessary).

Here, control information decoder (control information detector) 809determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803 using controlinformation excluding at least the bit corresponding to (v3 informationand) v4 information. Then, signal processor 811 performs operations fordemodulation and decoding using a method based on the determineddemodulation method.

When the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal generated whena phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, when a terminal thatsupports demodulation of such a modulated signal determines in controlinformation demodulator (control information detector) 809 that themodulated signal is a single stream modulated signal from v2 (or v21,v22), v3 information (v3 bit) is determined to be null (v4 information(v4 bit) is not necessary).

Here, control information decoder (control information detector) 809determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803 using controlinformation excluding at least the bit corresponding to (v3 informationand) v4 information. Then, signal processor 811 performs operations fordemodulation and decoding using a method based on the determineddemodulation method.

By the base station or AP and the terminal, which is the communicationpartner of the base station or AP, operating as described in the presentembodiment, the base station or AP and the terminal can performcommunication accurately, and as a result, it is possible to achieve anadvantageous effect in that data reception quality is improved and datatransmission speed is improved. Moreover, when the base station or APuses an OFDM scheme and implements a phase change upon transmitting aplurality of streams, in an environment in which direct waves aredominant, the terminal, which is the communication partner, can achievean advantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality.

Embodiment C1

In this embodiment, an example of a specific phase change method usedunder a single-carrier (SC) scheme that differs from the exampledescribed in Embodiment B1 will be described.

In this embodiment, a case in which the base station or AP and theterminal communicate with each other will be supposed. Here, one exampleof the configuration of the transmission device in the base station orAP is as illustrated in FIG. 1 . Since this configuration has beendescribed in other embodiments, repeated description will be omitted.

FIG. 81 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of transmissionsignal 108_A illustrated in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 81 , time is represented onthe horizontal axis (accordingly, this relates to a single-carrierscheme signal).

As illustrated in FIG. 81 , in transmission signal 108_A, the basestation or AP transmits preamble 8101 from time t1 to time t20,transmits guard 8102 using time t21 through time t30, transmits datasymbol 8103 using time t31 through time t60, transmits guard 8104 usingt61 through t70, and transmits data symbol 8105 using t71 through t100.

FIG. 82 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of transmissionsignal 108_B illustrated in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 82 , time is represented onthe horizontal axis (accordingly, this relates to a single-carrierscheme signal).

As illustrated in FIG. 82 , in transmission signal 108_B, the basestation or AP transmits preamble 8201 from time t1 to time t20,transmits guard 8202 using time t21 through time t30, transmits datasymbol 8203 using time t31 through time t60, transmits guard 8204 usingt61 through t70, and transmits data symbol 8205 using t71 through t100.

Note that preamble 8101 and 8201 are symbols for channel estimation bythe terminal, which is the communication partner of the base station orAP, and, for example, the mapping method is PSK (phase shift keying)known to the base station and terminal. Preambles 8101 and 8201 aretransmitted at the same time using the same frequency.

Guards 8102 and 8202 are symbols that are inserted upon generation ofsingle-carrier scheme modulated signals. Guards 8102 and 8202 aretransmitted at the same time using the same frequency.

Data symbols 8103 and 8203 are data symbols for the base station or APto transmit data to the terminal. Data symbols 8103 and 8203 aretransmitted at the same time using the same frequency.

Guards 8104 and 8204 are symbols that are inserted upon generation ofsingle-carrier scheme modulated signals. Guards 8104 and 8204 aretransmitted at the same time using the same frequency.

Data symbols 8105 and 8205 are data symbols for the base station or APto transmit data to the terminal. Data symbols 8105 and 8205 aretransmitted at the same time using the same frequency.

Similar to Embodiment 1, the base station or AP generates mapped signals1(t) and mapped signal s2(t). When data symbols 8102 and 8105 includeonly mapped signal s1(t), data symbols 8202 and 8205 include only mappedsignal s2(t). Moreover, when data symbols 8102 and 8105 include onlymapped signal s2(t), data symbols 8202 and 8205 include only mappedsignal s1(t). When data symbols 8102 and 8105 include both mapped signals1(t) and mapped signal s2(t), data symbols 8202 and 8205 include bothmapped signal s1(t) and mapped signal s2(t). As this has already beendescribed in, for example, Embodiment 1, detailed description will beomitted.

For example, the configuration of signal processor 106 illustrated inFIG. 1 is as illustrated in FIG. 2 . Hereinafter, two suitable examplesof when a single-carrier scheme is used will be given.

Suitable Example 1

As a first measure in the first example, a phase change is implementedin phase changer 205B, and a phase change is not implemented in phasechanger 209B. Note that control of this is performed by control signal200. Here, the signal corresponding to transmission signal 108A in FIG.1 is signal 208A in FIG. 2 , and the signal corresponding totransmission signal 108B in FIG. 1 is signal 210B in FIG. 2 .

As a second measure in the first example, a phase change is implementedin phase changer 205B, and phase changer 209B is omitted. Here, thesignal corresponding to transmission signal 108A in FIG. 1 is signal208A in FIG. 2 , and the signal corresponding to transmission signal108B in FIG. 1 is signal 208B in FIG. 2 .

In suitable Example 1, either one of the first and second measures maybe implemented.

Next, operations performed by phase changer 205B will be described.Similar to the description given in Embodiment 1, in phase changer 205B,a phase change is implemented on a data symbol. Similar to Embodiment 1,the phase change value of symbol number i in phase changer 205B isexpressed as y(i). y(i) is applied with the following equation.[MATH. 206]y(i)=e ^(jλ(i))  Equation (206)

In FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 , data symbols are present at i=t31, t32, t33 . .. t58, t59, and t60, and i=t71, t72, t73 . . . t98, t99, and t100. Here,one important condition is that either one of Equation (207) andEquation (208) is satisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.207} \right\rbrack &  \\{{\frac{\pi}{2}{radians}}{} < {{\lambda(i)} - {\lambda\left( {i - 1} \right)}} < {\pi{radians}}} & {{Equation}(207)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.208} \right\rbrack &  \\{{\pi{radians}} < {{\lambda(i)} - {\lambda\left( {i - 1} \right)}} < {\frac{3\pi}{2}{radians}}} & {{Equation}(208)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Equation (207) and Equation (208), i=t32, t33, t34 . . .t58, t59, and t60, or i=t72, t73, t74 . . . t98, t99, t100. To rephrase“either one of Equation (207) and Equation (208) is satisfied”, whenλ(i)−λ(i−1) is greater than or equal to 0 radians and less than 2πradians, the value is as close to n as possible.

Taking into consideration the transmission spectrum, λ(i)−λ(i−1) need bea fixed value. As described in other embodiments, in environments inwhich direct waves are dominant, it is important λ(i) be switchedregularly by the reception device in the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station or AP, in order to achievegood data reception quality. The cycle of λ(i) may be increased asneeded. For example, consider a case in which the cycle is set to 5 orhigher.

When cycle X=2×n+1 (note that n is an integer that is greater than orequal to 2), it is sufficient if the following conditions are satisfied.

When i satisfies i=t32, t33, t34 . . . t58, t59, and t60, or i=t72, t73,t74 . . . t98, t99, t100, in any instance of i, Equation (209) issatisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.209} \right\rbrack &  \\{{{\lambda(i)} - {\lambda\left( {i - 1} \right)}} = {\pi + {\frac{\pi}{{2 \times n} + 1}{radians}}}} & {{Equation}(209)}\end{matrix}$

When cycle X=2×m (note that m is an integer that is greater than orequal to 3), it is sufficient if the following conditions are satisfied.

When i satisfies i=t32, t33, t34 . . . t58, t59, and t60, or i=t72, t73,t74 . . . t98, t99, t100, in any instance of i, Equation (210) issatisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.210} \right\rbrack &  \\{{{\lambda(i)} - {\lambda\left( {i - 1} \right)}} = {\pi + {\frac{\pi}{m}{radians}}}} & {{Equation}(210)}\end{matrix}$

It was stated that “when λ(i)−λ(i−1) is greater than or equal to 0radians and less than 2π radians, the value is as close to n aspossible”. This will be described next.

In FIG. 83 , a phase change is not implemented, that is to say, thespectrum of transmission signal 108A in FIG. 1 (signal 208A in FIG. 2 )is illustrated by solid line 8301 in FIG. 83 . In FIG. 83 , frequency isrepresented on the horizontal axis and amplitude is represented on thevertical axis.

In phase changer 205B illustrated in FIG. 2 , when λ(i)−λ(i−1) is set ton radians and a phase change is implemented, the spectrum oftransmission signal 108B in FIG. 1 is expressed by dotted line 8302 inFIG. 83 .

As illustrated in FIG. 83 , spectrum 8301 and spectrum 8302 effectivelypartially overlap. When transmission is performed to achieve this state,when the propagation environment of the base station and the terminal,which is the communication partner, is a multi-path environment, themulti-path effect on transmission signal 108A and the multi-path effecton transmission signal 108B are different, thereby improving thepossibility that spatial diversity can be achieved. The effect ofspatial diversity decreases as λ(i)−λ(i−1) nears 0.

Accordingly, “when λ(i)−λ(i−1) is greater than or equal to 0 radians andless than 2π radians, the value is as close to n as possible”.

However, when a phase change is implemented in phase changer 205B inFIG. 2 , as described in the present specification, in an environment inwhich direct waves are dominant, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect that the effect of data reception quality willincrease. Accordingly, when λ(i)−λ(i−1) is set to satisfy theabove-described conditions, in a multi-path environment, an environmentin which direct waves are dominant, or in both environments, it ispossible to achieve a superior advantageous effect, namely that highdata reception quality can be achieved by the terminal, which is thecommunication partner.

Suitable Example 2

In Example 2, phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change, andphase changer 209B does implement a phase change. Note that control ofthis is performed by control signal 200. Here, the signal correspondingto transmission signal 108A in FIG. 1 is signal 208A in FIG. 2 , and thesignal corresponding to transmission signal 108B in FIG. 1 is signal210B in FIG. 2 .

Next, operations performed by phase changer 209B will be described. Inphase changer 209B, in the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 82 ,a phase change is implemented on at least guards 8202 and 8204 and datasymbols 8203 and 8205. Note that a phase change may or may not beapplied to preamble 8201. The phase change value of phase changer 209Bis expressed as g(i). g(i) is applied with the following equation.[MATH. 211]g(i)=e ^(jρ(i))  Equation (211)

In FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 , data symbols and guards are present at i=t21,t22, t23 . . . t98, t99, and t100. Here, one important condition is thateither one of Equation (212) and Equation (213) is satisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.212} \right\rbrack &  \\{{\frac{\pi}{2}{radians}} < {{\rho(i)} - {\rho\left( {i - 1} \right)}} < {\pi{radians}}} & {{Equation}(212)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.213} \right\rbrack &  \\{{\pi{radians}} < {{\rho(i)} - {\rho\left( {i - 1} \right)}} < {\frac{3\pi}{2}{radians}}} & {{Equation}(213)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Equation (212) and Equation (213), i=t22, t23, t24 . . .t98, t99, and t100. To rephrase “either one of Equation (159) andEquation (160) is satisfied”, when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) is greater than or equalto 0 radians and less than 2n radians, the value is as close to n aspossible.

Taking into consideration the transmission spectrum, ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) need bea fixed value. As described in other embodiments, in environments inwhich direct waves are dominant, it is important ρ(i) be switchedregularly by the reception device in the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station or AP, in order to achievegood data reception quality. The cycle of ρ(i) may be increased asneeded. For example, consider a case in which the cycle is set to 5 orhigher.

When cycle X=2×n+1 (note that n is an integer that is greater than orequal to 2), it is sufficient if the following conditions are satisfied.

When i satisfies i=t22, t23, t24 . . . t98, t99, t100, in any instanceof i, Equation (214) is satisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.214} \right\rbrack &  \\{{{\rho(i)} - {\rho\left( {i - 1} \right)}} = {\pi + {\frac{\pi}{{2 \times n} + 1}{radians}}}} & {{Equation}(214)}\end{matrix}$

When cycle X=2×m (note that m is an integer that is greater than orequal to 3), it is sufficient if the following conditions are satisfied.

When i satisfies i=t22, t23, t24 . . . t98, t99, t100, in any instanceof i, Equation (215) is satisfied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.215} \right\rbrack &  \\{{{\rho(i)} - {\rho\left( {i - 1} \right)}} = {\pi + {\frac{\pi}{m}{radians}}}} & {{Equation}(215)}\end{matrix}$

It was stated that “when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) is greater than or equal to 0radians and less than 2π radians, the value is as close to n aspossible”. This will be described next.

In FIG. 83 , a phase change is not implemented, that is to say, thespectrum of transmission signal 108A in FIG. 1 (signal 208A in FIG. 2 )is illustrated by solid line 8301 in FIG. 83 . In FIG. 83 , frequency isrepresented on the horizontal axis and amplitude is represented on thevertical axis.

In phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 , when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) is set ton radians and a phase change is implemented, the spectrum oftransmission signal 108B in FIG. 1 is expressed by dotted line 8302 inFIG. 83 .

As illustrated in FIG. 83 , spectrum 8301 and spectrum 8302 effectivelypartially overlap. When transmission is performed to achieve this state,when the propagation environment of the base station and the terminal,which is the communication partner, is a multi-path environment, themulti-path effect on transmission signal 108A and the multi-path effecton transmission signal 108B are different, thereby improving thepossibility that spatial diversity can be achieved. The effect ofspatial diversity decreases as ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) nears 0.

Accordingly, “when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) is greater than or equal to 0 radians andless than 2π radians, the value is as close to n as possible”.

However, when a phase change is implemented in phase changer 209B inFIG. 2 , as described in the present specification, in an environment inwhich direct waves are dominant, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect that the effect of data reception quality willincrease. Accordingly, when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) is set to satisfy theabove-described conditions, in a multi-path environment, an environmentin which direct waves are dominant, or in both environments, it ispossible to achieve a superior advantageous effect, namely that highdata reception quality can be achieved by the terminal, which is thecommunication partner.

By setting the phase change value as described in the presentembodiment, in both an environment including multiple paths and in anenvironment which direct waves are dominant, it is possible to achievethe advantageous effect of improvement in data reception quality in theterminal, which is the communication partner. Note that one conceivableconfiguration for the reception device in the terminal is aconfiguration like the one illustrated in FIG. 8 , for example. However,as the operations illustrated in FIG. 8 have already been described inother embodiments, description will be omitted.

There are many methods for generating single-carrier scheme modulatedsignals. This embodiment can implement any of them for any of theschemes. Examples of single-carrier schemes include DFT (DiscreteFourier Transform)-Spread OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency DivisionMultiplexing), Trajectory Constrained DFT-Spread OFDM, OFDM based SC(Single Carrier), SC (Single Carrier)-FDMA (Frequency Division MultipleAccess), and Guard interval DFT-Spread OFDM.

Moreover, the phase change method according to this embodiment achievesthe same advantageous effects even when applied to a multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM. Note that when applied to a multi-carrier scheme,symbols may be aligned along the temporal axis, may be aligned along thefrequency axis (carrier axis), and may be aligned along both temporaland frequency axes. This is also explained in other embodiments.

(Supplemental Information 6)

In the present specification, one example of a configuration of thereception device in the terminal, which is the communication partner ofthe base station or AP, upon the transmission device in the base stationor AP transmitting a single stream modulated signal, is given in FIG. 41, but the configuration of a terminal that receives a single streammodulated signal is not limited to the configuration illustrated in FIG.41 . For example, the reception device in the terminal may include aplurality of receiving antennas. For example, in FIG. 8 , when channelestimation unit 805_2, 807_2 of modulated signal u2 does not operate,the channel estimation unit operates for a single modulated signal, andeven with such a configuration, a single stream modulated signal can bereceived.

Accordingly, in the description in the present specification, anembodiment described with reference to FIG. 41 may be replaced with thereception device configuration described above, and can operate in thesame manner and thus achieve the same advantageous effects.

Moreover, in the present specification, examples of configurations of areception capability notification symbol transmitted by the terminal aregiven in FIG. 38 and FIG. 79 . Here, advantageous effects related to theinclusion of a plurality of items of information were described.Hereinafter, a transmission method for the “plurality of items ofinformation” included in the reception capability notification symboltransmitted by the terminal will be described.

Configuration Example 1

For example, from among “information 3601 related to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes”, “information 3702related to support for reception of a plurality of streams”,“information 3801 related to supported schemes”, “information 3802related to multi-carrier scheme support”, and “information 3803 relatedto supported error correction encoding scheme” illustrated in FIG. 38 ,at least two of these items of information are transmitted in the sameframe or in the same sub-frame.

Configuration Example 2

For example, from among “information 3601 related to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes”, “information 3702related to support for reception of a plurality of streams”,“information 3801 related to supported schemes”, “information 3802related to multi-carrier scheme support”, “information 3803 related tosupported error correction encoding scheme”, and “information 7901related to supported precoding method” illustrated in FIG. 79 , at leasttwo of these items of information are transmitted in the same frame orin the same sub-frame.

Next, “frame” and “sub-frame” will be described.

FIG. 80 illustrates an example of a frame configuration. In FIG. 80 ,time is represented on the horizontal axis. For example, in FIG. 80 ,the frame includes preamble 8001, control information symbol 8002, anddata symbol 8003 (for example, the frame may: include at least preamble8001; include at least control information symbol 8002; include at leastpreamble 8001 and data symbol 8003; include at least preamble 8001 andcontrol information symbol 8002; include at least preamble 8001 and datasymbol 8003; or include at least preamble 8001, control informationsymbol 8002, and data symbol 8003).

The terminal transmits a reception capability notification symbol usingany one of preamble 8001, control information symbol 8002, or datasymbol 8003.

Note that FIG. 80 may be referred to as a sub-frame. FIG. 80 may also bereferred to something other than a frame or sub-frame.

As described above, as a result of the terminal transmitting the atleast two items of information included in the reception capabilitynotification symbol, the advantageous effects described in EmbodimentsA1, A2, A4, A11, etc., can be achieved.

Configuration Example 3

For example, from among “information 3601 related to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes”, “information 3702related to support for reception of a plurality of streams”,“information 3801 related to supported schemes”, “information 3802related to multi-carrier scheme support”, and “information 3803 relatedto supported error correction encoding scheme” illustrated in FIG. 38 ,at least two of these items of information are transmitted in the samepacket.

Configuration Example 4

For example, from among “information 3601 related to support fordemodulation of modulated signals with phase changes”, “information 3702related to support for reception of a plurality of streams”,“information 3801 related to supported schemes”, “information 3802related to multi-carrier scheme support”, “information 3803 related tosupported error correction encoding scheme”, and information 7901related to supported precoding method” illustrated in FIG. 79 , at leasttwo of these items of information are transmitted in the same packet.

Consider the frame illustrated in FIG. 80 . Assume the frame: includesat least preamble 8001 and data symbol 8003; includes at least controlinformation symbol 8002 and data symbol 8003; or includes at leastpreamble 8001, control information symbol 8002, and data symbol 8003.

In such cases, there are two types of methods for transmitting packets.

First Method:

Data symbol 8003 includes a plurality of packets. In such a case, atleast the two items of information included in the reception capabilitynotification symbol are transmitted via data symbol 8003.

Second Method:

The packet is transmitted via a plurality of frames of data symbols. Insuch a case, at least the two items of information included in thereception capability notification symbol are transmitted via a pluralityof frames.

As described above, as a result of the terminal transmitting the atleast two items of information included in the reception capabilitynotification symbol, the advantageous effects described in EmbodimentsA1, A2, A4, A11, etc., can be achieved.

Note that although the terminology “preamble” is used in FIG. 80 , thiselement may be referred to as something else. The “preamble” includes atleast one of the following symbols or signals: a symbol or signal forthe communication partner to detect a modulated signal; a symbol orsignal for the communication partner to perform channel estimation(propagation environment estimation); a symbol or signal for thecommunication partner to perform time synchronization; a symbol orsignal for the communication partner to perform frequencysynchronization; and a symbol or signal for the communication partner toperform frequency offset estimation.

Moreover, although the terminology “control information symbol” is usedin FIG. 80 , this element may be referred to as something else. The“control information symbol” is a symbol that includes at least one ofthe following items of information: information on the error correctionencoding scheme for generating a data symbol; information on themodulation scheme for generating a data symbol; information on thenumber of symbols in a data symbol; information related to thetransmission method of a data symbol; information required fortransmitting things other than a data symbol to the communicationpartner; and information other than a data symbol.

Note that the order in which preamble 8001, control information symbol8002, and data symbol 8003 are transmitted, i.e., the frameconfiguration method, is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG.80 .

Embodiments A1, A2, A4, A11, etc., describe an example in which theterminal transmits a reception capability notification symbol and thecommunication partner of the terminal is the base station or AP, butthese are non-limiting examples. For example, the base station or AP maytransmit a reception capability notification symbol, and thecommunication partner of the base station or AP may be the terminal.Moreover, the terminal may transmit a reception capability notificationsymbol and the communication partner of the terminal may be a terminal.Moreover, the base station or AP may transmit a reception capabilitynotification symbol, and the communication partner of the base stationor AP may be a base station or AP.

Note that in the phase change processing implemented on a precoded(weighting synthesized) signal, there are instances in which differentvalues are used for the phase change cycle N depending on whether asingle-carrier scheme frame is to be transmitted or an OFDM scheme frameis to be transmitted. This is because, for example, when the number ofdata symbols arranged in a frame differs between a single-carrier schemeand an OFDM scheme, there is a possibility that the preferred phasechance cycle differs between a single-carrier scheme and an OFDM scheme.In the above description, a cycle in the phase change processingimplemented on a precoded (weighting synthesized) signal is described,but when precoding (weighting synthesis) is not performed, a differentvalue may be used for the cycle in the phase change processingimplemented on the mapped signal depending on whether the scheme is asingle-carrier scheme or an OFDM scheme.

Embodiment C2

A variation of Embodiment B3 will be described. The configuration methodof the preamble and control information symbol transmitted by the basestation or AP and the operations performed by the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station or AP will be described.

As described in Embodiment A8, the configuration of the transmissiondevice in the base station or AP is the configuration illustrated inFIG. 1 or FIG. 44 . However, the transmission device in the base stationmay be configured so as to include one error correction encoderillustrated in FIG. 1 , and may be configured so as to include theplurality of error correction encoders illustrated in FIG. 44 .

Radio unit 107_A and radio unit 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1 , FIG. 44have the configuration illustrated in FIG. 55 , and are characterized inthat they can selectively switch between a single-carrier scheme and anOFDM scheme. Note that since operations pertaining to FIG. 55 havealready been described in Embodiment A8 in detail, description will beomitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 88 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal transmitted by the base station or AP. Time isrepresented on the horizontal axis.

The base station or AP first transmits preamble 8801, and subsequentlytransmits control information symbol (header block) 8802 and data symbol8803.

Preamble 8801 is a symbol for the reception device in the terminal,which is the communication partner of the base station or AP, toperform, for example, signal detection of a modulated signal transmittedby the base station or AP, frame synchronization, time synchronization,frequency synchronization, frequency offset estimation, and/or channelestimation. For example, preamble 8801 is configured as a PSK symbolknown to the base station and terminal.

Control information symbol (also referred to as a header block) 8802 isa symbol for transmitting control information related to data symbol8803, and includes, for example, the transmission method of data symbol8803, such as information on whether the transmission method is asingle-carrier scheme or an OFDM scheme, information on whether thetransmission method is single stream transmission or multi-streamtransmission, information on the modulation scheme, and/or informationon the error correction encoding method used upon generating the datasymbols (for example, error correction code information, code lengthinformation, information on the encode rate of the error correctioncode). Moreover, control information symbol (also referred to as aheader block) 8802 may include, for example, information on the datalength to be transmitted.

Data symbol 8803 is a symbol for the base station or AP to transmitdata, and regarding the transmission method, data symbol 8803 istransmitted either under a single-carrier scheme or an OFDM scheme, andthe modulation scheme and error correction encoding method of datasymbol 8803 may be switched between SISO or MIMO transmission.

Note that FIG. 88 is merely one non-limiting example of a frameconfiguration. Moreover, not each of preamble 8801, control informationsymbol 8802, and data symbol 8803 need be present in the frame. Forexample, a pilot symbol or reference symbol may be included in the datasymbol.

As described in Embodiment B3, in the data symbol, when signal processor106 includes any one of the configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG.18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30, FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 ,FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , switching can beperformed for whether a phase change is implemented by phase changer205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B.

Accordingly, information included in control information symbol (headerblock) 8802 illustrated in FIG. 88 and transmitted by the base stationor AP includes the v3 bits illustrated in Table 10 and the v4 bitsillustrated in Table 11.

Additionally, v5 bits defined as follows is also included in controlinformation symbol (header block) 8802 illustrated in FIG. 88 andtransmitted by the base station or AP.

TABLE 12 phase change value when phase change is v5 implementedcyclically/regularly 0 use phase change method #1 1 use phase changemethod #2

Interpretation of Table 12 is as follows.

When a plurality of modulated signals are transmitted at the samefrequency and time using a plurality of antennas upon transmitting datasymbol 8803 illustrated in FIG. 88 , and signal processor 106 has anyone of the configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 ,FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 ,FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 ,FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , when a phase change isimplemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, v5 is set to 0 (v5=0) in weightingsynthesizer 203 if a phase change is to be implemented using phasechange method #1, and the base station transmits v5. When a plurality ofmodulated signals are transmitted at the same frequency and time using aplurality of antennas upon transmitting data symbol 8803 illustrated inFIG. 88 , and signal processor 106 has any one of the configurationsillustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22, FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 ,FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 ,and FIG. 67 , when a phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A,phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, v5is set to 1 (v5=1) in weighting synthesizer 203 if a phase change is tobe implemented using phase change method #2, and the base stationtransmits v5.

One example will be described using Embodiment B1.

As a first example, phase change method #1 is when λ(i)−λ(i−1) indicatedin Equation (209) is set as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.216} \right\rbrack &  \\{{{\lambda(i)} - {\lambda\left( {i - 1} \right)}} = {\frac{9\pi}{8}{radians}}} & {{Equation}(216)}\end{matrix}$

Moreover, phase change method #2 is when λ(i)−λ(i−1) indicated inEquation (209) is set as follows.[MATH. 217]λ(i)−λ(i−1)=π radians  Equation (217)

As a second example, phase change method #1 is when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1)indicated in Equation (214) is set as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.217} \right\rbrack &  \\{{{\rho(i)} - {p\left( {i - 1} \right)}} = {\frac{9\pi}{8}{radians}}} & {{Equation}(217)}\end{matrix}$

Moreover, phase change method #2 is when ρ(i)−ρ(i−1) indicated inEquation (214) is set as follows.[MATH. 219]ρ(i)−ρ(i−1)=π radians  Equation (219)

Note that the schemes for phase change method #1 and phase change method#2 are not limited to the above examples; it is sufficient so long asthe phase change methods differ between phase change method #1 and phasechange method #2. Moreover, in the above examples, the phase changemethod is implemented in one location, but a phase change may beimplemented in two or more phase changers.

In the above examples, phase change method #1 is a method that improvesthe reception quality of terminal, which is the communication partner,in radio wave propagation environment in which the direct waves aredominant and in multi-path environments, and phase change method #2 is amethod that improves reception quality of the terminal, which is thecommunication partner, when the radio wave environment is, inparticular, a multi-path environment.

Accordingly, by the base station changing the phase change methodappropriately for the radio wave propagation environment in accordancewith the set value for v5, the terminal, which is the communicationpartner, is capable of achieving the advantageous effect of improvedreception quality.

Hereinafter, an operational example in which base station transmits v1,v2, v3, and v4 described in Embodiment B3 and transmits theabove-described v5 will be given.

For example, in the base station, when MIMO transmission is performed,i.e., when v2 is set to 1 (v2=1) and a phase change is not to beimplemented cyclically/regularly, i.e., v3 is set to 0 (v3=0), v5information is null (v5 may be set to 0 and may be set to 1).

In the base station, when MIMO transmission is performed, i.e., when v2is set to 1 (v2=1) and a phase change is to be implementedcyclically/regularly, i.e., v3 is set to 0 (v3=0), v5 information isvalid. Note that v5 may be interpreted as illustrated in Table 12.

Accordingly, when the terminal, which is the communication partner ofthe base station, obtains v2 and recognizes that v2=0, i.e., that it issingle stream transmission, the terminal uses control informationexcluding at least the bit corresponding to v5, and determines thedemodulation method for data symbol 8803.

Moreover, when the terminal, which is the communication partner of thebase station, obtains v2 and recognizes that v2=1, i.e., that it is MIMOtransmission, and obtains v3 and v3=0, i.e., a phase change is notimplemented cyclically/regularly, the terminal uses control informationexcluding at least the bit corresponding to v5, and determines thedemodulation method for data symbol 8803.

When the terminal, which is the communication partner of the basestation, obtains v2 and recognizes that v2=1, i.e., that it is MIMOtransmission, and obtains v3 and v3=1, i.e., a phase change isimplemented cyclically/regularly, the terminal uses control informationincluding the bit corresponding to v5, and determines the demodulationmethod for data symbol 8803.

By the base station or AP and the terminal, which is the communicationpartner of the base station or AP, operating as described in the presentembodiment, the base station or AP and the terminal can performcommunication accurately, and as a result, it is possible to achieve anadvantageous effect in that data reception quality is improved and datatransmission speed is improved.

Embodiment C3

In this embodiment, a variation of Embodiment C2 will be described.

In this embodiment, as the transmission method for the data symbol, whena MIMO scheme (multi-stream transmission) and a single-carrier schemeare selected, when signal processor 106 includes any one of theconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 ,FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 ,FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , a phase change is not implemented byphase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and phasechanger 5901B. Then, as the transmission method for the data symbol,when a MIMO scheme (multi-stream transmission) and an OFDM scheme areselected, when signal processor 106 includes any one of theconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 ,FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 ,FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , switching can be performed for whethera phase change is implemented by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B.

How v5 is handled in such situations will be described next.

As the transmission method for the data symbol, when a MIMO scheme(multi-stream transmission) and a single-carrier scheme are selected,when signal processor 106 includes any one of the configurationsillustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22, FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 ,FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 ,and FIG. 67 , a phase change is not implemented by phase changer 205A,phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B.

Accordingly, when the base station or AP sets v1 to 0 (v1=0), and thetransmission scheme used for the data symbol in FIG. 88 is asingle-carrier scheme, (regardless of whether v2 indicates 0 or 1), theinformation on v5 is null (v5 may be set to 0 and may be set to 1)(then, when the data symbol in FIG. 88 is a single-carrier schememodulated signal or includes any one of the configurations illustratedin FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 ,FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 ,FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67, a phase change is not implemented by phase changer 205A, phase changer205B, phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B, and a plurality ofmodulated signals are transmitted using a MIMO scheme. Note that thebase station or AP may have a configuration in which phase changer 205A,phase changer 205B, and phase changer 5901A are omitted).

On the other hand, as the transmission method for the data symbol, whena MIMO scheme (multi-stream transmission) and an OFDM scheme areselected, when signal processor 106 includes any one of theconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 28 , FIG. 29 , FIG. 30 , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 ,FIG. 33 , FIG. 59 , FIG. 60 , FIG. 61 , FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 ,FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , and FIG. 67 , switching can be performed for whethera phase change is implemented by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and phase changer 5901B.

Accordingly, when a single stream is transmitted when the base stationor AP sets v1 to 1 (v1=1), the transmission scheme of the data symbol inFIG. 88 is OFDM, v2 is set to 0 (v2=0) (or v21 and v22 are set to 0(v21=0, v22=0)), and data symbol 8803 in FIG. 88 is transmitted,information on v5 is null (v5 may be set to 0 or 1) (here, the basestation or AP transmits a single stream modulated signal).

When a plurality of modulated signals are transmitted at the samefrequency and time using a plurality of antennas when the base stationor AP sets v1 to 1 (v1=1), the transmission scheme of the data symbol inFIG. 88 is OFDM, v2 is set to 1 (v2=1) (or v21 and v22 are set tosomething other than 0 (something other than v21=0, v22=0)), and datasymbol 8803 in FIG. 88 is transmitted, there is a possibility thatinformation on v5 “the base station or AP supports phase change”, and“reception is possible even when the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station or AP, has performed a phasechange” is valid.

When the base station or AP does not perform a phase change in phasechanger 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phasechanger 5901B, v5 information is null, and v5 may be set to 0 or 1 (thebase station then transmits v5 information).

When the base station or AP does implement a phase change in phasechanger 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phasechanger 5901B, v5 information is valid, and in the phase changer, ifphase change is to be implemented using phase change method #1, v5 isset to 0 (v5=0), and the base station transmits v5. Moreover, in thephase changer, if phase change is to be implemented using phase changemethod #2, v5 is set to 1 (v5=1) and the base station transmits v5.

Note that since the determination of whether the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station or AP, is capable of receptioneven when a phase change is implemented has already been described inanother embodiment, repeated description will be omitted in thisembodiment. Moreover, when the base station or AP does not supportimplementation of a phase change, the base station or AP does notinclude phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A,phase changer 5901B.

Next, an example of operations performed by the terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station, will be given.

Consider a terminal capable of demodulating only a single-carrier schememodulated signal. In such a case, the terminal determines that v5information (v5 bit) obtained by control information demodulator(control information detector) 809 is null (v5 information (v5 bit) isnot necessary). Accordingly, since the modulated signal generated by thebase station or AP when a phase change is implemented in phase changer205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer5901B is not transmitted, signal processor 911 does not performcorresponding signal processing, but instead performs demodulationand/or decoding corresponding to signal processing under a differentscheme to obtain and output reception data 812.

More specifically, when the terminal receives a signal transmitted fromanother communications device such as the base station or AP, theterminal determines, based on preamble 8801 and control informationsymbol 8802, whether data symbol 8803 is an OFDM scheme modulated signalor a single-carrier scheme modulated signal. When determined to be anOFDM scheme modulated signal, since the terminal is not functionallyequipped to demodulate data symbol 8803, data symbol 8803 is notdemodulated. On the other hand, when determined to be a single-carrierscheme modulated signal, the terminal demodulates data symbol 8803.Here, the terminal determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803based on information obtained by control information decoder (controlinformation detector) 809. Here, since a phase change is not implementedcyclically/regularly on a single-carrier scheme modulated signal, theterminal uses, among control information obtained by control informationdecoder (control information detector) 809, control informationexcluding at least the bit corresponding to (v3 information and) v5information to determine the demodulation method for data symbol 8803.

When the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal generated whena phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, when a terminal thatsupports demodulation of such a modulated signal determines in controlinformation decoder (control information detector) 809 that themodulated signal is an OFDM scheme modulated signal from v1, v5information (v5 bit) is determined to be valid.

Here, control information decoder (control information detector) 809determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803 based on controlinformation including v5 information (v5 bit). Then, signal processor811 performs operations for demodulation and decoding using a methodbased on the determined demodulation method.

When the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal generated whena phase change is implemented in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 5901A, and/or phase changer 5901B, when a terminal thatsupports demodulation of such a modulated signal determines in controlinformation decoder (control information detector) 809 that themodulated signal is single-carrier scheme modulated signal from v1, v5information (v5 bit) is determined to be null (v5 information (v5 bit)is not necessary).

Here, control information decoder (control information detector) 809determines a demodulation method for data symbol 8803 using controlinformation excluding at least the bit corresponding to (v3 informationand) v5 information. Then, signal processor 811 performs operations fordemodulation and decoding using a method based on the determineddemodulation method.

By the base station or AP and the terminal, which is the communicationpartner of the base station or AP, operating as described in the presentembodiment, the base station or AP and the terminal can performcommunication accurately, and as a result, it is possible to achieve anadvantageous effect in that data reception quality is improved and datatransmission speed is improved. Moreover, when the base station or APuses an OFDM scheme and implements a phase change upon transmitting aplurality of streams, in an environment in which direct waves aredominant, the terminal, which is the communication partner, can achievean advantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality.

Embodiment C4

Next, a variation of Embodiment B2 will be described. The precodingmethod in weighting synthesizer 203 when mapped signal 201A (s1(t)) isQPSK (or π/2 shift QPSK) and mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) is QPSK (or π/2shift QPSK) will be described (note that in Embodiment B2, π/2 shiftQPSK may be used instead of QPSK).

When the configuration of signal processor 106 in FIG. 1 is any one ofthe configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , or FIG. 60 , for example, the following isapplied as the precoding matrix F used in weighting synthesizer 203.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.220} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}} \\1 & {- e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}}}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(220)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.221} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}} \\1 & {- e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}}}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(221)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.222} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 1} & {\beta \times e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}}} \\{\beta \times 1} & {{- \beta} \times e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}}}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(222)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.223} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & e^{j({\theta_{11} + \frac{\pi}{3}})} \\e^{j\theta_{21}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \frac{\pi}{3}})}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(223)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.224} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & e^{j({\theta_{11} + \frac{\pi}{3}})} \\e^{j\theta_{21}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \frac{\pi}{3}})}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(224)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.225} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \frac{\pi}{3}})}} \\e^{j\theta_{21}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \frac{\pi}{3}})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(225)}\end{matrix}$

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.However, β is not 0 (zero). Moreover, θ11 and θ21 are real numbers.

In weighting synthesizer 203, when precoding is performed using eitherone of the precoding matrices expressed in Equation (220) or Equation(225), the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane ofweighting synthesized signals 204A, 204B do not overlap and are widelyspread apart. Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmitstransmission signals 108_A and 108_B and in the terminal, which is thecommunication partner, the reception power of either of transmissionsignal 108_A or transmission signal 108_B is low, taking intoconsideration the state of the signal points described above, it ispossible to achieve the advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality by the terminal.

Precoding matrix F may be applied as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.226} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(226)}\end{matrix}$

Note that a, b, c, and d can be defined by imaginary numbers (and thusmay be real numbers). Here, in Equation (220) through Equation (225),since the absolute values of a, b, c, and d are equal, it is possible toachieve the advantageous effect that it is highly possible to achievediversity gain.

Note that in the above description, the configuration of signalprocessor 106 in transmission device that is illustrated in FIG. 1 andincluded in the base station or AP is exemplified as being any one ofthe configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , but a phase change need notbe implemented by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer209A, and/or phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG.19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 . Here, a phasechange is not implemented on input signals, and the signals are outputas-is. For example, (in FIG. 2 ,) in phase changer 205B, when a phasechange is not implemented, signal 204B corresponds to signal 206B. Whena phase change is not implemented in phase changer 209B, signal 208Bcorresponds to signal 210B. When a phase change is not implemented inphase changer 205A, signal 204A corresponds to signal 206A. When a phasechange is not implemented in phase changer 209A, signal 208A correspondsto signal 210B.

Phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 209A, and/or phasechanger 209B may be omitted. For example, (in FIG. 2 ,) when phasechanger 205B is omitted, input 206B of inserter 207B corresponds tosignal 204B. When phase changer 209B is omitted, signal 210B correspondsto signal 208B. When phase changer 205A is omitted, input 206A ofinserter 207A corresponds to signal 204A. When phase changer 209A isomitted, signal 210A corresponds to signal 208A.

When the precoding matrices are set as described above, it is possibleto achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the terminal, which is the communication partner of the basestation or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined with otherembodiments, including Embodiment B1.

Embodiment C5

Next, a variation of Embodiment B2 will be described. The precodingmethod used in weighting synthesizer 203 when mapped signal 201A (s1(t))is 16QAM (or π/2 shift 16QAM) and mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) is 16QAM(or π/2 shift 16QAM) will be described.

When the configuration of signal processor 106 in FIG. 1 is any one ofthe configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , or FIG. 60 , for example, the following isapplied as the precoding matrix F used in weighting synthesizer 203.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.227} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(227)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.228} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2_{+ 1}}}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(228)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.229} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(229)}\end{matrix}$

As a first method, in Equation (227), Equation (228), and Equation(229), α is defined as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.230} \right\rbrack &  \\{\alpha = \frac{5}{4}} & {{Equation}(230)}\end{matrix}$

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

As a second method, in Equation (227), Equation (228), and Equation(229), α is defined as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.231} \right\rbrack &  \\{\alpha = \frac{4}{5}} & {{Equation}(231)}\end{matrix}$

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

In weighting synthesizer 203, when precoding using any one of theprecoding matrices according to the first method using Equation (227),the first method using Equation (228), the first method using Equation(229), the second method using Equation (227), the second method usingEquation (228), and the second method using Equation (229) is performed,the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of weightingsynthesized signals 204A, 204B do not overlap and are widely spreadapart. Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmits transmissionsignals 108_A and 108_B and in the terminal, which is the communicationpartner, the reception power of either of transmission signal 108_A ortransmission signal 108_B is low, taking into consideration the state ofthe signal points described above, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality by theterminal.

Precoding matrix F may be applied as shown in Equation (226). Here, inthe first method using Equation (227), the first method using Equation(228), the first method using Equation (229), the second method usingEquation (227), the second method using Equation (228), and the secondmethod using Equation (229), since there is no big difference betweenthe absolute values of a, b, c, and d, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect that it is highly possible to achieve diversitygain.

Note that in the above description, the configuration of signalprocessor 106 in the transmission device in FIG. 1 included in the basestation or AP is described as being any one of the configurationsillustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22, FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , but in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 209A, and phase changer 209B in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19, FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , a phase changeneed not be implemented. Here, a phase change is not implemented oninput signals, and the signals are output as-is. For example, (in FIG. 2,) in phase changer 205B, when a phase change is not implemented, signal204B corresponds to signal 206B. When a phase change is not implementedin phase changer 209B, signal 208B corresponds to signal 210B. When aphase change is not implemented in phase changer 205A, signal 204Acorresponds to signal 206A. When a phase change is not implemented inphase changer 209A, signal 208A corresponds to signal 210B.

Phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 209A, and/or phasechanger 209B may be omitted. For example, (in FIG. 2 ,) when phasechanger 205B is omitted, input 206B of inserter 207B corresponds tosignal 204B. When phase changer 209B is omitted, signal 210B correspondsto signal 208B. When phase changer 205A is omitted, input 206A ofinserter 207A corresponds to signal 204A. When phase changer 209A isomitted, signal 210A corresponds to signal 208A.

When the precoding matrices are set as described above, it is possibleto achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the terminal, which is the communication partner of the basestation or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined with otherembodiments, including Embodiment B1.

Embodiment C6

Next, a variation of Embodiment B2 will be described. The precodingmethod used in weighting synthesizer 203 when mapped signal 201A (s1(t))is 64QAM (or π/2 shift 64QAM) and mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) is 64QAM(or π/2 shift 64QAM) will be described.

When the configuration of signal processor 106 in FIG. 1 is any one ofthe configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , or FIG. 60 , for example, the following isapplied as the precoding matrix F used in weighting synthesizer 203.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.232} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(232)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.233} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2_{+ 1}}}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}{or}}} & {{Equation}(233)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.234} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(234)}\end{matrix}$

As a first method, in Equation (232), Equation (233), and Equation(234), α is defined as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.235} \right\rbrack &  \\{\alpha = \frac{9}{8}} & {{Equation}(235)}\end{matrix}$

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

As a second method, in Equation (232), Equation (233), and Equation(234), α is defined as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.236} \right\rbrack &  \\{\alpha = \frac{8}{9}} & {{Equation}(236)}\end{matrix}$

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

In weighting synthesizer 203, when precoding using any one of theprecoding matrices according to the first method using Equation (232),the first method using Equation (233), the first method using Equation(234), the second method using Equation (232), the second method usingEquation (233), and the second method using Equation (234) is performed,the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of weightingsynthesized signals 204A, 204B do not overlap and are widely spreadapart. Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmits transmissionsignals 108_A and 108_B and in the terminal, which is the communicationpartner, the reception power of either of transmission signal 108_A ortransmission signal 108_B is low, taking into consideration the state ofthe signal points described above, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality by theterminal.

Precoding matrix F may be applied as shown in Equation (226). Here, inthe first method using Equation (232), the first method using Equation(233), the first method using Equation (234), the second method usingEquation (232), the second method using Equation (233), and the secondmethod using Equation (234), since there is no big difference betweenthe absolute values of a, b, c, and d, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect that it is highly possible to achieve diversitygain.

Note that in the above description, the configuration of signalprocessor 106 in the transmission device in FIG. 1 included in the basestation or AP is described as being any one of the configurationsillustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22, FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , but in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 209A, and phase changer 209B in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19, FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , a phase changeneed not be implemented. Here, a phase change is not implemented oninput signals, and the signals are output as-is. For example, (in FIG. 2,) in phase changer 205B, when a phase change is not implemented, signal204B corresponds to signal 206B. When a phase change is not implementedin phase changer 209B, signal 208B corresponds to signal 210B. When aphase change is not implemented in phase changer 205A, signal 204Acorresponds to signal 206A. When a phase change is not implemented inphase changer 209A, signal 208A corresponds to signal 210B.

Phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 209A, and/or phasechanger 209B may be omitted. For example, (in FIG. 2 ,) when phasechanger 205B is omitted, input 206B of inserter 207B corresponds tosignal 204B. When phase changer 209B is omitted, signal 210B correspondsto signal 208B. When phase changer 205A is omitted, input 206A ofinserter 207A corresponds to signal 204A. When phase changer 209A isomitted, signal 210A corresponds to signal 208A.

When the precoding matrices are set as described above, it is possibleto achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the terminal, which is the communication partner of the basestation or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined with otherembodiments, including Embodiment B1.

Embodiment C7

Next, a variation of Embodiment B2 will be described. The precodingmethod used in weighting synthesizer 203 when mapped signal 201A (s1(t))is 16QAM (or π/2 shift 16QAM) and mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) is 16QAM(or π/2 shift 16QAM) will be described.

When the configuration of signal processor 106 in FIG. 1 is any one ofthe configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , or FIG. 60 , for example, the following isapplied as the precoding matrix F used in weighting synthesizer 203.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.237} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(237)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.238} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(238)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.239} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(239)}\end{matrix}$

As a first method, in Equation (237), Equation (238), and Equation(239), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 240]α=4  Equation (240)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

As a second method, in Equation (237), Equation (238), and Equation(239), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 241]α=¼  Equation (241)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

In weighting synthesizer 203, when precoding using any one of theprecoding matrices according to the first method using Equation (237),the first method using Equation (238), the first method using Equation(239), the second method using Equation (237), the second method usingEquation (238), and the second method using Equation (239) is performed,the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of weightingsynthesized signals 204A, 204B do not overlap and are widely spreadapart. Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmits transmissionsignals 108_A and 108_B and in the terminal, which is the communicationpartner, the reception power of either of transmission signal 108_A ortransmission signal 108_B is low, taking into consideration the state ofthe signal points described above, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality by theterminal.

Note that in the above description, the configuration of signalprocessor 106 in the transmission device in FIG. 1 included in the basestation or AP is described as being any one of the configurationsillustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22, FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , but in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 209A, and phase changer 209B in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19, FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , a phase changeneed not be implemented. Here, a phase change is not implemented oninput signals, and the signals are output as-is. For example, (in FIG. 2,) in phase changer 205B, when a phase change is not implemented, signal204B corresponds to signal 206B. When a phase change is not implementedin phase changer 209B, signal 208B corresponds to signal 210B. When aphase change is not implemented in phase changer 205A, signal 204Acorresponds to signal 206A. When a phase change is not implemented inphase changer 209A, signal 208A corresponds to signal 210B.

Phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 209A, and/or phasechanger 209B may be omitted. For example, (in FIG. 2 ,) when phasechanger 205B is omitted, input 206B of inserter 207B corresponds tosignal 204B. When phase changer 209B is omitted, signal 210B correspondsto signal 208B. When phase changer 205A is omitted, input 206A ofinserter 207A corresponds to signal 204A. When phase changer 209A isomitted, signal 210A corresponds to signal 208A.

When the precoding matrices are set as described above, it is possibleto achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the terminal, which is the communication partner of the basestation or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined with otherembodiments, including Embodiment B1.

Embodiment C8

Next, a variation of Embodiment B2 will be described. The precodingmethod used in weighting synthesizer 203 when mapped signal 201A (s1(t))is 64QAM (or π/2 shift 64QAM) and mapped signal 201B (s2(t)) is 64QAM(or π/2 shift 64QAM) will be described.

When the configuration of signal processor 106 in FIG. 1 is any one ofthe configurations illustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 ,FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , or FIG. 60 , for example, the following isapplied as the precoding matrix F used in weighting synthesizer 203.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.242} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(242)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.243} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(243)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.244} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(244)}\end{matrix}$

As a first method, in Equation (242), Equation (243), and Equation(244), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 245]α=8  Equation (245)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

As a second method, in Equation (242), Equation (243), and Equation(244), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 246]α=⅛  Equation (246)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

In weighting synthesizer 203, when precoding using any one of theprecoding matrices according to the first method using Equation (242),the first method using Equation (243), the first method using Equation(244), the second method using Equation (242), the second method usingEquation (243), and the second method using Equation (244) is performed,the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of weightingsynthesized signals 204A, 204B do not overlap and are widely spreadapart. Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmits transmissionsignals 108_A and 108_B and in the terminal, which is the communicationpartner, the reception power of either of transmission signal 108_A ortransmission signal 108_B is low, taking into consideration the state ofthe signal points described above, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality by theterminal.

Note that in the above description, the configuration of signalprocessor 106 in the transmission device in FIG. 1 included in the basestation or AP is described as being any one of the configurationsillustrated in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22, FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , but in phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B,phase changer 209A, and phase changer 209B in FIG. 2 , FIG. 18 , FIG. 19, FIG. 20 , FIG. 21 , FIG. 22 , FIG. 59 , and FIG. 60 , a phase changeneed not be implemented. Here, a phase change is not implemented oninput signals, and the signals are output as-is. For example, (in FIG. 2,) in phase changer 205B, when a phase change is not implemented, signal204B corresponds to signal 206B. When a phase change is not implementedin phase changer 209B, signal 208B corresponds to signal 210B. When aphase change is not implemented in phase changer 205A, signal 204Acorresponds to signal 206A. When a phase change is not implemented inphase changer 209A, signal 208A corresponds to signal 210B.

Phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B, phase changer 209A, and/or phasechanger 209B may be omitted. For example, (in FIG. 2 ,) when phasechanger 205B is omitted, input 206B of inserter 207B corresponds tosignal 204B. When phase changer 209B is omitted, signal 210B correspondsto signal 208B. When phase changer 205A is omitted, input 206A ofinserter 207A corresponds to signal 204A. When phase changer 209A isomitted, signal 210A corresponds to signal 208A.

When the precoding matrices are set as described above, it is possibleto achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the terminal, which is the communication partner of the basestation or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined with otherembodiments, including Embodiment B1.

Embodiment D1

In this embodiment, preferable examples of the precoding method used inthe transmission device in the base station or AP and based onEmbodiment B2 will be given.

Consider a case in which the base station or AP and the terminalcommunicate with each. FIG. 90 illustrates an example of theconfiguration of the transmission device in the base station AP in sucha case. In FIG. 90 , objects that operate the same as in FIG. 1 sharelike reference marks, and repeated description of such objects will beomitted.

Error correction encoder 102 receives inputs of data 101 and controlsignal 100, and based on information related to the error correctioncode included in control signal 100, performs error correction encoding,and outputs encoded data 103.

Mapper 104 receives inputs of encoded data 103 and control signal 100,and based on information on the modulated signal included in controlsignal 100, performs mapping in accordance with the modulation scheme,and outputs mapped signal (baseband signal) 105_1.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signal 105_1, signalgroup 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processing based oncontrol signal 100, and outputs signal-processed signal 106_A.

Radio unit 107_A receives inputs of signal-processed signal 106_A andcontrol signal 100, and based on control signal 100, processessignal-processed signal 106_A and outputs transmission signal 108_A.Transmission signal 108_A is then output as radio waves from antennaunit #A (109_A).

FIG. 91 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 90 . Note that in FIG. 91 , operations that arethe same as in FIG. 2 share like reference marks, and duplicatedescription thereof is omitted.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 receives inputs of mapped signal201A (corresponding to mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 90 ) and controlsignal 200 (corresponding to control signal 100 in FIG. 90 ), performsweighting synthesis (precoding) based on control signal 200, and outputsweighted signal 204A.

Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed as s1(t) and weighted signal 204Ais expressed as z1(t). Note that one example oft is time (s1(t), z1(t)are defined as complex numbers (accordingly, they may be real numbers)).

Weighting synthesizer 203 then performs weighted synthesis on the twosymbols s1(2i−1) and s1(2i) in mapped signal 201A s1(t), and outputs thetwo symbols z1(2i−1) and z1(2i) in weighted signal 204A z1(t). Morespecifically, the following calculation is performed.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.247} \right\rbrack &  \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z1\left( {{2i} - 1} \right)} \\{z1\left( {2i} \right)}\end{pmatrix} = {{\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s1\left( {{2i} - 1} \right)} \\{s1\left( {2i} \right)}\end{pmatrix}} = {F\begin{pmatrix}{s1\left( {{2i} - 1} \right)} \\{s1\left( {2i} \right)}\end{pmatrix}}}} & {{Equation}(247)}\end{matrix}$

Note that F is a matrix for weighted synthesis, and a, b, c, and d canbe defined as complex numbers. Accordingly, a, b, c, and d can bedefined as complex numbers (may be real numbers). Note that i is asymbol number (note that here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 1).

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal (pa(t)) (t is time) (251A), preamble signal 252,control information symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and basedon information on the frame configuration included in control signal200, outputs baseband signal 208A based on the frame configuration.

FIG. 92 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by the transmission device illustrated in FIG. 90 .Time is represented on the horizontal axis. 9201 is a preamble, and is,for example, a symbol for the reception device that receives themodulated signal transmitted by the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 90 to implement time synchronization, frame synchronization, signaldetection, frequency synchronization, frequency offset estimation, etc.9202 is a control information symbol, and is, for example, a symbol fortransmitting control information, such as the modulation scheme, errorcorrection encoding scheme, and/or transmission method of a data symbol.

9203 is a data symbol, and is a symbol for transmitting z1(2i−1) andz1(2i) described above. Since the frame configuration illustrated inFIG. 92 is a single-carrier scheme frame configuration, z1(2i−1) andz1(2i) are arranged in order along the time axis. For example, symbolsare arranged along the time axis in the order of z1(2i−1) and z1(2i).Note that the transmission device illustrated in FIG. 90 may include aninterleaver for shifting the order of the symbols, and depending on theshifting of the order of the symbols, z1(2i−1) and z1(2i) need not betemporally adjacent. Moreover, in FIG. 92 , a pilot symbol is notincluded, but a pilot symbol may be included in the frame. Moreover,symbols other than those illustrated in FIG. 92 may be included in theframe.

FIG. 93 illustrates one example of a frame configuration different fromFIG. 92 of a modulated signal transmitted by the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 90 . Frequency is represented on the horizontalaxis, and time is represented on the vertical axis. 9301 is a pilotsymbol, and is, for example a symbol for the reception device thatreceives the modulated signal transmitted by the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 90 to implement channel estimation, etc. 9303 issome other type of symbol, including, for example, a preamble andcontrol information symbol. The preamble is a symbol for the receptiondevice that receives the modulated signal transmitted by thetransmission device illustrated in FIG. 90 to implement timesynchronization, frame synchronization, signal detection, frequencysynchronization, frequency offset estimation, etc., and the controlinformation symbol is a symbol for transmitting control information onthe modulation scheme, error correction encoding scheme, transmissionmethod, etc., of a data symbol.

9302 is a data symbol, and is a symbol for transmitting z1(2i−1) andz1(2i) described above. Since the frame configuration illustrated inFIG. 93 is a multi-carrier transmission scheme frame configuration suchas an OFDM frame configuration, z1(2i−1) and z1(2i) may be arranged inorder along the time axis, and may be arranged in order along thefrequency axis. Note that the transmission device illustrated in FIG. 90may include an interleaver for shifting the order of the symbols, anddepending on the shifting of the order of the symbols, z1(2i−1) andz1(2i) need not be temporally adjacent, and need not be adjacent on thefrequency axis. Moreover, the frame may include symbols other than thoseillustrated n FIG. 93 .

A suitable example of a weighting synthesis method for weightingsynthesizer 203 in FIG. 91 when signal processor 106 in FIG. 90 has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 91 will be described.

As a first example, the precoding method used in weighting synthesizer203 in FIG. 91 when mapped signal 201A (s1(t)) is BPSK (Binary PhaseShift Keying) or when mapped signal 201A (s1(t)) is π/2 shift BPSK willbe described.

Consider a case in which the matrix F or F(i) for the weightingsynthesis to be used in weighting synthesizer 203 in FIG. 91 includesonly real numbers. For example, the matrix F for weighting synthesis isexpressed as shown in the following equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.248} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}1 & {- 1} \\1 & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(248)}\end{matrix}$

For example, in the case of BPSK, the signal points of the signal afterprecoding in in-phase I-quadrature Q plane include three points, namely,signal points 8601, 8602, and 8603 illustrated in FIG. 86 (one pointoverlaps with a signal point).

Consider a case in which, under the conditions above, as illustrated inFIG. 1 , z1(2i−1) and z1(2i) are transmitted and in the terminal, whichis the communication partner, the reception power of z1(2i, z1(2i−1) orz1(2i) is low.

Here, as illustrated in FIG. 86 , since there are only three signalpoints, a problem arises in which data reception quality is bad. Takingthis into consideration, a method is proposed in which precoding matrixF for weighting synthesis is comprised of not only real numbers. As anexample, matrix F for weighting synthesis is applied as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.249} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}1 & j \\j & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(249)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.250} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & j \\j & 1\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(250)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.251} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times 1} & {\alpha \times j} \\{\alpha \times j} & {\alpha \times 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(251)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.252} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}j & 1 \\1 & j\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(252)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.253} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}j & 1 \\1 & j\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(253)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.254} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times j} & {\alpha \times 1} \\{\alpha \times 1} & {\alpha \times j}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(254)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.255} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}1 & j \\1 & {- j}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(255)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.256} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & j \\1 & {- j}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(256)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.257} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times 1} & {\alpha \times j} \\{\alpha \times 1} & {{- \alpha} \times j}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(257)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.258} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}1 & {- j} \\1 & j\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(258)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.259} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & {- j} \\1 & j\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(259)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.260} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times 1} & {{- \alpha} \times j} \\{\alpha \times 1} & {\alpha \times j}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(260)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.261} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}j & 1 \\{- j} & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(261)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.262} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}j & 1 \\{- j} & 1\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(262)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.263} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times j} & {\alpha \times 1} \\{{- \alpha} \times j} & {\alpha \times 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(263)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.264} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{- j} & 1 \\j & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(264)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.265} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\alpha}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}{- j} & 1 \\j & 1\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(265)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.266} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{{- \alpha} \times j} & {\alpha \times 1} \\{\alpha \times j} & {\alpha \times 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(266)}\end{matrix}$

Note that a may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be animaginary number. However, a is not 0 (zero).

When weighting synthesis using either of the matrices illustrated inEquation (249) or Equation (266) for weighting synthesis is performed inweighting synthesizer 203 illustrated in FIG. 91 , the signal points inthe in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of weighting synthesized signal 204Aare aligned in the order of signal point 8701, 8702, 8703, and 8704 inFIG. 87 . Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmitstransmission signal 108_A and in the terminal, which is thecommunication partner, the reception power of either of z1(2i−1) orz1(2i) is low, taking into consideration the state illustrated in FIG.87 , it is possible to achieve the advantageous effect of an improvementin data reception quality by the terminal.

Next, as a second example, a suitable example of a weighting synthesismethod to be used in weighting synthesizer 203 when mapped signal 201A(s1(t)) is QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) will be described.

When signal point processor 106 in FIG. 90 has the configurationillustrated in FIG. 91 , in one example of matrix F for weightingsynthesis to be used by weighting synthesizer 203, the following may beapplied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.267} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}1 & 2 \\{- 2} & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(267)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.268} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 2 \\{- 2} & 1\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(268)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.269} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 1} & {\beta \times 2} \\{{- \beta} \times 2} & {\beta \times 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(269)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.270} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}2 & 1 \\1 & {- 2}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(270)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.271} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}2 & 1 \\1 & {- 2}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(271)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.272} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 2} & {\beta \times 1} \\{\beta \times 1} & {{- \beta} \times 2}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(272)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.273} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}1 & {- 2} \\2 & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(273)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.274} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & {- 2} \\2 & 1\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(274)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.275} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 1} & {{- \beta} \times 2} \\{\beta \times 2} & {\beta \times 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(275)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.276} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{- 2} & 1 \\1 & 2\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(276)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.277} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}{- 2} & 1 \\1 & 2\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(277)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.278} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{{- \beta} \times 2} & {\beta \times 1} \\{\beta \times 1} & {\beta \times 2}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(278)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.279} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}1 & 2 \\2 & {- 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(279)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.280} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & 2 \\2 & {- 1}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(280)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.281} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 1} & {\beta \times 2} \\{\beta \times 2} & {{- \beta} \times 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(281)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.282} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}2 & 1 \\{- 1} & 2\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(282)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.283} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}2 & 1 \\{- 1} & 2\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(283)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.284} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 2} & {\beta \times 1} \\{{- \beta} \times 1} & {\beta \times 2}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(284)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.285} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{- 1} & 2 \\2 & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(285)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.286} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}{- 1} & 2 \\2 & 1\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(286)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.287} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{{- \beta} \times 1} & {\beta \times 2} \\{\beta \times 2} & {\beta \times 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(287)}\end{matrix}$ $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.288} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}2 & {- 1} \\1 & 2\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(288)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.289} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{5}}\begin{pmatrix}2 & {- 1} \\1 & 2\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(289)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.290} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 2} & {{- \beta} \times 1} \\{\beta \times 1} & {\beta \times 2}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(290)}\end{matrix}$

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.However, β is not 0 (zero).

When weighting synthesis using either of the matrices illustrated inEquation (267) or Equation (290) for weighting synthesis is performed inweighting synthesizer 203 illustrated in FIG. 91 , the signal points inthe in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of weighting synthesized signal 204Ado not overlap and are widely spread apart. Accordingly, when the basestation or AP transmits transmission signal 108_A and in the terminal,which is the communication partner, the reception power of either ofz1(2i−1) or z1(2i) is low, taking into consideration the state of thesignal points described above, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality by theterminal.

When the matrices for weighting synthesis are set as described above, itis possible to achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality in the terminal, which is the communication partner ofthe base station or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined withother embodiments.

Embodiment D2

Next, a variation of Embodiment D1 will be described. A weightingsynthesis method used in weighting synthesizer 203 in FIG. 91 whenmapped signal 201A (s1(t)) is QPSK (or π/2 shift QPSK) will be described(note that in Embodiment D1, π/2 shift QPSK may be used instead ofQPSK).

When signal processor 106 in FIG. 90 has the configuration illustratedin FIG. 91 , in one example of matrix F for weighting synthesis to beused by weighting synthesizer 203, the following may be applied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.291} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}1 & e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}} \\1 & {- e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(291)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.292} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}1 & e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}} \\1 & {- e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(292)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.293} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times 1} & {\beta \times e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}}} \\{\beta \times 1} & {{- \beta} \times e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(293)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.294} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & e^{j({\theta_{11} + \frac{\pi}{3}})} \\e^{j\theta_{21}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \frac{\pi}{3}})}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(294)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.295} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{2}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & e^{j({\theta_{11} + \frac{\pi}{3}})} \\e^{j\theta_{21}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \frac{\pi}{3}})}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(295)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.296} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \frac{\pi}{3}})}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \frac{\pi}{3}})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(296)}\end{matrix}$

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.However, β is not 0 (zero). Moreover, 011 and 021 are real numbers.

When weighting synthesis using either of the matrices illustrated inEquation (291) or Equation (296) for weighting synthesis is performed inweighting synthesizer 203 illustrated in FIG. 91 , the signal points inthe in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of weighting synthesized signal 204Ado not overlap and are widely spread apart. Accordingly, when the basestation or AP transmits transmission signal 108_A and in the terminal,which is the communication partner, the reception power of either ofz1(2i−1) or z1(2i) is low, taking into consideration the state of thesignal points described above, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality by theterminal.

Matrix F for weighting synthesis is applied as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.297} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(297)}\end{matrix}$

Note that a, b, c, and d can be defined by imaginary numbers (and thusmay be real numbers). Here, in Equation (291) through Equation (296),since the absolute values of a, b, c, and d are equal, it is possible toachieve the advantageous effect that it is highly possible to achievediversity gain.

When the matrices for weighting synthesis are set as described above, itis possible to achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality in the terminal, which is the communication partner ofthe base station or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined withother embodiments.

Embodiment D3

Next, a variation of Embodiment D1 will be described. A weightingsynthesis method used in weighting synthesizer 203 in FIG. 91 whenmapped signal 201A (s1(t)) is 16QAM (or π/2 shift 16QAM) will bedescribed.

When signal processor 106 in FIG. 90 has the configuration illustratedin FIG. 91 , in one example of matrix F for weighting synthesis to beused by weighting synthesizer 203, the following may be applied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.298} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(298)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.299} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(299)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.300} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(300)}\end{matrix}$

As a first method, in Equation (298), Equation (299), and Equation(300), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 301]α=5/4  Equation (301)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

As a second method, in Equation (298), Equation (299), and Equation(300), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 302]α=⅘  Equation (302)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

In weighting synthesizer 203, when precoding using any one of theprecoding matrices according to the first method using Equation (227),the first method using Equation (228), the first method using Equation(229), the second method using Equation (227), the second method usingEquation (228), and the second method using Equation (229) is performed,the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of weightingsynthesized signal 204A do not overlap and are widely spread apart.Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmits transmission signal108_A and in the terminal, which is the communication partner, thereception power of either of z1(2i−1) or z1(2i) is low, taking intoconsideration the state of the signal points described above, it ispossible to achieve the advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality by the terminal.

Matrix F for weighting synthesis is expressed as shown in Equation(297). Here, in the first method using Equation (298), the first methodusing Equation (299), the first method using Equation (300), the secondmethod using Equation (298), the second method using Equation (299), andthe second method using Equation (300), since there is no big differencebetween the absolute values of a, b, c, and d, it is possible to achievethe advantageous effect that it is highly possible to achieve diversitygain.

When the matrices for weighting synthesis are set as described above, itis possible to achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality in the terminal, which is the communication partner ofthe base station or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined withother embodiments.

Embodiment D4

Next, a variation of Embodiment D1 will be described. A weightingsynthesis method used in weighting synthesizer 203 in FIG. 91 whenmapped signal 201A (s1(t)) is 64QAM (or π/2 shift 64QAM) will bedescribed.

When signal processor 106 in FIG. 90 has the configuration illustratedin FIG. 91 , in one example of matrix F for weighting synthesis to beused by weighting synthesizer 203, the following may be applied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.303} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(303)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.304} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\alpha^{2} \times 1}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(304)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.305} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(305)}\end{matrix}$

As a first method, in Equation (303), Equation (304), and Equation(305), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 306]α9/8  Equation (306)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

As a second method, in Equation (303), Equation (304), and Equation(305), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 307]α= 8/9  Equation (307)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

In weighting synthesizer 203, when weighting synthesis using any one ofthe matrices for weighting synthesis according to the first method usingEquation (303), the first method using Equation (304), the first methodusing Equation (305), the second method using Equation (303), the secondmethod using Equation (304), and the second method using Equation (305)is performed, the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane ofweighting synthesized signal 204A do not overlap and are widely spreadapart. Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmits transmissionsignal 108_A and in the terminal, which is the communication partner,the reception power of either of z1(2i−1) or z1(2i) is low, taking intoconsideration the state of the signal points described above, it ispossible to achieve the advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality by the terminal.

Matrix F for weighting synthesis is expressed as shown in Equation(297). Here, in the first method using Equation (303), the first methodusing Equation (304), the first method using Equation (305), the secondmethod using Equation (303), the second method using Equation (304), andthe second method using Equation (305), since there is no big differencebetween the absolute values of a, b, c, and d, it is possible to achievethe advantageous effect that it is highly possible to achieve diversitygain.

When the matrices for weighting synthesis are set as described above, itis possible to achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality in the terminal, which is the communication partner ofthe base station or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined withother embodiments.

Embodiment D5

Next, a variation of Embodiment D1 will be described. A weightingsynthesis method used in weighting synthesizer 203 when mapped signal201A (s1(t)) is 16QAM (or π/2 shift 16QAM) will be described.

When signal processor 106 in FIG. 90 has the configuration illustratedin FIG. 91 , in one example of matrix F for weighting synthesis to beused by weighting synthesizer 203, the following may be applied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.308} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(308)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.309} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(309)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.310} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(310)}\end{matrix}$

As a first method, in Equation (308), Equation (309), and Equation(310), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 311]α=4  Equation (311)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

As a second method, in Equation (308), Equation (309), and Equation(310), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 312]α=¼  Equation (312)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

In weighting synthesizer 203, when weighting synthesis using any one ofthe matrices for weighting synthesis according to the first method usingEquation (308), the first method using Equation (309), the first methodusing Equation (310), the second method using Equation (308), the secondmethod using Equation (309), and the second method using Equation (310)is performed, the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane ofweighting synthesized signal 204A do not overlap and are widely spreadapart. Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmits transmissionsignal 108_A and in the terminal, which is the communication partner,the reception power of either of z1(2i−1) or z1(2i) is low, taking intoconsideration the state of the signal points described above, it ispossible to achieve the advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality by the terminal.

When the matrices for weighting synthesis are set as described above, itis possible to achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality in the terminal, which is the communication partner ofthe base station or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined withother embodiments.

Embodiment D6

Next, a variation of Embodiment D1 will be described. A weightingsynthesis method used in weighting synthesizer 203 in FIG. 91 whenmapped signal 201A (s1(t)) is 64QAM (or π/2 shift 64QAM) will bedescribed.

When signal processor 106 in FIG. 90 has the configuration illustratedin FIG. 91 , in one example of matrix F for weighting synthesis to beused by weighting synthesizer 203, the following may be applied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.313} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(313)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.314} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = {\frac{\beta}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(314)}\end{matrix}$ or $\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.315} \right\rbrack &  \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j({\theta_{11} + \delta})}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j({\theta_{21} + \pi + \delta})}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}(315)}\end{matrix}$

As a first method, in Equation (313), Equation (314), and Equation(315), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 316]α=8  Equation (316)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

As a second method, in Equation (313), Equation (314), and Equation(315), α is defined as follows.[MATH. 317]α=⅛  Equation (317)

β may be a real number, and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number.θ11 is a real number, θ21 is a real number, and δ is a real number.

In weighting synthesizer 203, when weighting synthesis using any one ofthe matrices for weighting synthesis according to the first method usingEquation (313), the first method using Equation (314), the first methodusing Equation (315), the second method using Equation (313), the secondmethod using Equation (314), and the second method using Equation (315)is performed, the signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane ofweighting synthesized signal 204A do not overlap and are widely spreadapart. Accordingly, when the base station or AP transmits transmissionsignal 108_A and in the terminal, which is the communication partner,the reception power of either of z1(2i−1) or z1(2i) is low, taking intoconsideration the state of the signal points described above, it ispossible to achieve the advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality by the terminal.

When the matrices for weighting synthesis are set as described above, itis possible to achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality in the terminal, which is the communication partner ofthe base station or AP. Note that this embodiment may be combined withother embodiments.

Embodiment E1

In this embodiment, the configuration of a transmission device thatsupports both the transmission method described in the presentspecification of transmitting a plurality of signals generated byprecoding a plurality of modulated signal from a plurality of antennasat the same time and frequency and the transmission method describedfrom Embodiments D1 through D6 of differing at least one of frequencyand time of a plurality of weighting synthesized signals generated byperforming weighting synthesis on a plurality of modulated signal andtransmitting the signals from at least one antenna.

As described in Embodiment A8, the configuration of the transmissiondevice in the base station or AP is the configuration illustrated inFIG. 1 or FIG. 44 . Note that the transmission device in the basestation may be configured to be capable of implementing both the methodof generating a plurality of signals from data encoded by the singleerror correction encoder illustrated in FIG. 1 and the method ofgenerating a plurality of signals from data encoded by the plurality oferror correction encoders illustrated in FIG. 44 .

Radio unit 107_A and radio unit 107_B in FIG. 1 and FIG. 44 include, forexample, the configurations illustrated in FIG. 3 or FIG. 55 . Whenradio unit 107_A and radio unit 107_B have the configuration illustratedin FIG. 55 , they can selectively switch between a single-carrier schemeand an OFDM scheme. Note that since operations pertaining to FIG. 3 havealready been described in an embodiment in detail and operationspertaining to FIG. 55 have already been described in Embodiment A8 indetail, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

The transmission device in the base station or AP switches betweentransmission using the transmission method described in the presentspecification of transmitting a plurality of signals generated byprecoding a plurality of modulated signal from a plurality of antennasat the same time and frequency and the transmission method describedfrom Embodiments D1 through D6 of differing at least one of frequencyand time of a plurality of weighting synthesized signals generated byperforming weighting synthesis on a plurality of modulated signal andtransmitting the signals from at least one antenna.

For example, upon single stream modulated signal transmission describedin Embodiment A8, the transmission device in the base station or APperforms transmission using the transmission method described fromEmbodiments D1 through D6 of differing at least one of frequency andtime of a plurality of weighting synthesized signals generated byperforming weighting synthesis on a plurality of modulated signal andtransmitting the signals from at least one antenna.

Since operations performed by the transmission device in the basestation or AP for transmitting a plurality of modulated signals for aplurality of streams have already been described in Embodiment A8,description will be omitted from this embodiment.

The transmission device in the base station or AP may use, as precodingprocesses to be implemented in transmission of a plurality of modulatedsignals for a plurality of streams, the precoding processes expressed bythe matrix F that represents the weighting synthesis processesimplemented in single stream modulated signal transmission. For example,the transmission device in the base station or AP performs the precodingprocesses illustrated in Equation (248) in transmission of a pluralityof modulated signals for a plurality of streams, and performs theweighting synthesis processes illustrated in Equation (248) in singlestream modulated signal transmission.

With such a configuration, since the precoding processes implemented intransmission of a plurality of modulated signals for a plurality ofstreams and the weighting synthesis processes implemented in singlestream modulated signal transmission are the same, the transmissiondevice in the base station or AP reduce the scale of circuitry usedcompared to when different matrices F are used for the precodingprocesses and the weighting synthesis.

Moreover, in the above description, an example is given in which thematrix F representing the precoding processes and the weightingsynthesis processes is exemplified as the matrix F illustrated inEquation (248), but even if the matrix F representing the precodingprocesses and the weighting synthesis processes is another matrix Fdescribed in the present disclosure, it can be implemented in the samemanner, as a matter of course.

Moreover, operations performed by the transmission device in the basestation or AP in transmission of a plurality of modulated signals for aplurality of streams are not limited to the examples in Embodiment A8.The transmission device included in the base station or AP can implementtransmission of a plurality of modulated signals for a plurality ofstreams using arbitrary configurations and operations described in otherembodiments for transmitting a plurality of transmission signalsgenerated from the plurality of modulated signals from a plurality ofantennas at the same frequency and time. For example, the transmissiondevice in the base station or AP may include the configurationillustrated in FIG. 73 and described in Embodiment A10.

Next, the reception device included in the terminal will be described.

The reception device in the terminal that receives the signaltransmitted by the transmission device in the base station or AP usingtransmission of a plurality of modulated signals for a plurality ofstreams performs operations for reception and demodulation of receivedsignals that support the method of transmission of a plurality ofmodulated signals for a plurality of streams described in otherembodiments, and obtains the transmitted data.

The reception device in the terminal that receives the signaltransmitted by the transmission device in the base station or AP usingsingle stream modulated signal transmission includes, for example, theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 41 . Signal processor 4109 uses bothor at least one of the received plurality of weighting synthesizedsignals, performs demodulation and error correction decoding accordingto the weighting synthesis processed implemented on the signal(s), andobtains the transmitted data. As operations have already been describedin Embodiment A4 in detail, description will be omitted from thisembodiment. The reception device in the terminal described here can beapplied in the same manner as described in Embodiments D1 through D6.

Note that the transmission device in the base station or AP may use, asprecoding processes to be implemented in transmission of a plurality ofmodulated signals for a plurality of streams, a single precoding methodselected from among a plurality of precoding methods expressed bymutually different matrices F. Similarly, the transmission device in thebase station or AP may us, as weighting synthesis processes to beimplemented in single stream modulated signal transmission, a singleweighting synthesis method selected from among a plurality of weightingsynthesis methods expressed by mutually different matrices F. Here, ifthe matrix F expressing at least one of the precoding methods selectableby the transmission device in the base station or AP is the same as thematrix F expressing a weighting synthesis method selectable by thetransmission device in the base station or AP, the transmission devicein the base station or AP can reduce the scale of the circuitry used.

A first transmission device according to one aspect of the presentembodiment described above performs transmission in a transmission modeselected from among a plurality of transmission modes including a firsttransmission mode and a second transmission mode. In the firsttransmission mode, a first transmission signal and a second transmissionsignal generated by implementing first signal processing on a firstmodulated signal and a second modulated signal are transmitted from aplurality of antennas at the same frequency and same time. In the secondtransmission mode, a third transmission signal and a fourth transmissionsignal generated by implementing second signal processing on a thirdmodulated signal and a fourth modulated signal are transmitted from atleast one antenna at different frequencies, different times, ordifferent frequencies and times. The first signal processing and thesecond signal processing include weighting synthesis defined by the samematrix F.

A second transmission device according to another aspect of the presentembodiment generates a first transmission signal and a secondtransmission signal by implementing predetermined signal processingincluding weighting synthesis defined by a matrix F on a first modulatedsignal and a second modulated signal. In a first transmission mode, thefirst transmission signal and the second transmission signal aretransmitted from a plurality of antennas at the same frequency and thesame time, and in a second transmission mode, the first transmissionsignal and the second transmission signal are transmitted from at leastone antenna at different frequencies, different times, or differentfrequencies and times.

Embodiment F1

In this embodiment, using the examples described in Embodiment A1,Embodiment A2, Embodiment A4, and Embodiment A11, another implementationmethod for operations performed by the terminal will be given.

FIG. 23 illustrates one example of a configuration of the base stationor AP. As this example has already been described, repeated descriptionwill be omitted.

FIG. 24 illustrates one example of a configuration of a terminal, whichis the communication partner of the base station or AP. As this examplehas already been described, repeated description will be omitted.

FIG. 34 illustrates one example of a system configuration in a state inwhich base station or AP 3401 and terminal 3402 are communicating. Asthis example has already been described in Embodiment A1, Embodiment A2,Embodiment A4, and Embodiment A11, repeated description will be omitted.

FIG. 35 illustrates an example of communication between the base stationor AP 3401 and terminal 3402 illustrated in FIG. 34 . As this examplehas already been described in Embodiment A1, Embodiment A2, EmbodimentA4, and Embodiment A11, repeated description will be omitted

FIG. 94 illustrates a specific example of a configuration of receptioncapability notification symbol 3502 transmitted by the terminalillustrated in FIG. 35 .

Before moving onto the description of FIG. 94 , first, a configurationin which the terminal is provided as a terminal that communicates withthe base station or AP will be described.

In this embodiment, there is a possibility that the following types ofterminals exist.

Terminal Type #1:

Terminal Type #1 can demodulate single-carrier scheme and single streamtransmission modulated signals.

Terminal Type #2:

Terminal Type #2 can demodulate single-carrier scheme and single streamtransmission modulated signals. Additionally, Terminal Type #2 canreceive and demodulate single-carrier scheme modulated signalstransmitted from a plurality of antennas by the communication partner.

Terminal Type #3:

Terminal Type #3 can demodulate single-carrier scheme and single streamtransmission modulated signals.

Additionally, Terminal Type #3 can demodulate OFDM scheme and singlestream transmission modulated signals.

Terminal Type #4:

Terminal Type #4 can demodulate single-carrier scheme and single streamtransmission modulated signals. Additionally, Terminal Type #4 canreceive and demodulate single-carrier scheme modulated signalstransmitted from a plurality of antennas by the communication partner.

Additionally, Terminal Type #4 can demodulate OFDM scheme and singlestream transmission modulated signals. Additionally, Terminal Type #4can receive and demodulate OFDM scheme modulated signals transmittedfrom a plurality of antennas by the communication partner.

Terminal Type #5:

Terminal Type #5 can demodulate OFDM scheme and single streamtransmission modulated signals.

Terminal Type #6:

Terminal Type #6 can demodulate OFDM scheme and single streamtransmission modulated signals. Additionally, Terminal Type #6 canreceive and demodulate OFDM scheme modulated signals transmitted from aplurality of antennas by the communication partner.

In this embodiment, for example, Terminal Type #1 through Terminal Type#6 are capable of communicating with the base station or AP and viceversa. However, the base station or AP may communicate with a type ofterminal other than Terminal Type #1 through Terminal Type #6.

In view of this, disclosed is a reception capability notification symbolsuch as the one illustrated in FIG. 94 .

FIG. 94 illustrates a specific example of a configuration of receptioncapability notification symbol 3502 transmitted by the terminalillustrated in FIG. 35 .

As illustrated in FIG. 94 , reception capability notification symbolsinclude reception capability notification symbol 9401 related tosingle-carrier scheme and OFDM scheme, reception capability notificationsymbol 9402 related to single-carrier scheme, and reception capabilitynotification symbol 9403 related to OFDM scheme. Note that receptioncapability notification symbols other than those illustrated in FIG. 94may be included.

Reception capability notification symbol 9401 related to single-carrierscheme and OFDM scheme includes data for notifying the communicationpartner (in this case, for example, the base station or AP) of thereception capability of both the single-carrier scheme modulated signaland the OFDM scheme modulated signal.

Reception capability notification symbol 9402 related to single-carrierscheme includes data for notifying the communication partner (in thiscase, for example, the base station or AP) of the reception capabilityof the single-carrier scheme modulated signal.

Reception capability notification symbol 9403 related to OFDM schemeincludes data for notifying the communication partner (in this case, forexample, the base station or AP) of the reception capability of the OFDMscheme modulated signal.

FIG. 95 illustrates an example of reception capability notificationsymbol 9401 related to single-carrier scheme and OFDM scheme illustratedin FIG. 94 .

Reception capability notification symbol 9401 related to single-carrierscheme and OFDM scheme illustrated in FIG. 94 includes data related toSISO or MIMO (MISO) support 9501, data related to supported errorcorrection encoding scheme 9502, and data related to single-carrierscheme and OFDM scheme support status 9503.

When data related to SISO or MIMO (MISO) support 9501 is indicated by g0and g1, for example, when the communication partner of the terminaltransmits a single stream modulated signal and the terminal candemodulate such a modulated signal, the terminal sets g0 to 1 (g0=1) andsets g1 to 0 (g1=0), and transmits a reception capability notificationsymbol including g0 and g1.

When the communication partner of the terminal transmits a plurality ofdifferent modulated signals from a plurality of antennas and theterminal can demodulate such modulated signals, the terminal sets g0 to0 (g0=0) and sets g1 to 1 (g1=1), and transmits a reception capabilitynotification symbol including g0 and g1.

When the communication partner of the terminal transmits a single streammodulated signal and the terminal can demodulate such a modulated signaland when the communication partner of the terminal transmits a pluralityof different modulated signal from a plurality of antennas and theterminal can demodulate such modulated signals, the terminal sets g0 to1 (g0=1) and sets g1 to 1 (g1=1), and transmits a reception capabilitynotification symbol including g0 and g1.

When data related to supported error correction encoding scheme 9502 isg2, for example, when the terminal is capable of error correctiondecoding first error correction encoding scheme data, the terminal setsg2 to 0 (g2=0), and transmits a reception capability notification symbolincluding g2.

When the terminal is capable of error correction decoding first errorcorrection encoding scheme data and capable of error correction decodingsecond error correction encoding scheme data, the terminal sets g2 to 1(g2=1), and transmits a reception capability notification symbolincluding g2.

As another example, assume that each of the terminals is capable oferror correction decoding first error correction encoding scheme data.Furthermore, when the terminal is capable of error correction decodingsecond error correction encoding scheme data, the terminal sets g2 to 1(g2=1), and when the terminal is not capable of error correctiondecoding second error correction encoding scheme data, the terminal setsg2 to 0 (g2=0). Note that the terminal transmits a reception capabilitynotification symbol including g2.

Note that the first error correction encoding scheme and the seconderror correction encoding scheme are different schemes. For example,assume that the block length (code length) of the first error correctionencoding scheme is A bits (A is an integer that is greater than or equalto 2) and the block length (code length) of the second error correctionencoding scheme is B bits (B is an integer that is greater than or equalto 2), and that A B. However, the example of different schemes i notlimited to this example; it is sufficient if the error correction codeused in the first error correction encoding scheme and the errorcorrection code used in the second error correction encoding scheme aredifferent.

When the data related to single-carrier scheme and OFDM scheme supportstatus 9503 is expressed as g3 and g4, for example, when the terminal iscapable of demodulating a single-carrier scheme modulated signal, theterminal sets g3 to 1 (g3=1) and sets g4 to 0 (g4=0) (here, the terminaldoes not support demodulation of an OFDM modulated signal), and theterminal transmits a reception capability notification symbol includingg3 and g4.

When the terminal is capable of demodulating an OFDM scheme modulatedsignal, the terminal sets g3 to 0 (g3=0) and sets g4 to 1 (g4=1) (inthis case, the terminal does not support demodulation of asingle-carrier scheme modulated signal), and the terminal transmits areception capability notification symbol including g3 and g4.

When the terminal is capable of demodulating a single-carrier schememodulated signal and capable of demodulating an OFDM scheme modulatedsignal, the terminal sets g3 to 1 (g3=1) and sets g4 to 1 (g4=1), andtransmits a reception capability notification symbol including g3 andg4.

FIG. 96 illustrates an example of a configuration of receptioncapability notification symbol 9402 related to a single-carrier schemeillustrated in FIG. 94 .

Reception capability notification symbol 9402 related to asingle-carrier scheme illustrated in FIG. 94 includes data related toscheme 9601 supported by a single-carrier scheme.

When data related to scheme 9601 supported by a single-carrier scheme isexpressed as h0 and h1, for example, when the communication partner ofthe terminal performs channel bonding and transmits a modulated signal,if the terminal is capable of demodulating such a modulated signal, theterminal sets h0 to 1 (h0=1) and if the terminal does not supportdemodulation of such a modulated signal, the terminal sets h0 to 0(110=0), and then the terminal transmits a reception capabilitynotification symbol including h0.

When the communication partner of the terminal performs channelaggregation and transmits a modulated signal, if the terminal is capableof demodulating such a modulated signal, the terminal sets h1 to 1(h1=1) and if the terminal does not support demodulation of such amodulated signal, the terminal sets h1 to 0 (h1=0), and then theterminal transmits a reception capability notification symbol includingh1.

Note that when the terminal sets g3 described above to 0 and sets g4described above to 1, since the terminal does not support demodulationof a single-carrier scheme modulated signal, the bit (field) indicatedby h0 becomes a null bit (field), and the bit (field) indicated by h1becomes a null bit (field).

Note that when the terminal sets g3 to 0 and sets g4 to 1, h0 and h1described above may be predefined as reserved (held for future use) bits(fields), and the terminal may determine h0 and h1 described above to benull bits (fields) (may determine h0 or h1 described above to be nullbits (fields)), and the base station or AP may obtain h0 and h1described above but determine h0 and h1 to be null bits (fields)(determine h0 or h1 to be null bits (fields)).

In the above description, it is described that the terminal may set g3to 0 and set g4 to 1, in other words, the terminal may not supportdemodulation of a single-carrier scheme modulated signal, but anembodiment in which each of the terminals supports single-carrier schemedemodulation is possible. In such cases, the bit (field) expressed by g3described above is not required.

FIG. 97 illustrates an example of a configuration of receptioncapability notification symbol 9403 related to OFDM scheme illustratedin FIG. 94 .

Reception capability notification symbol 9403 related to an OFDM schemeillustrated in FIG. 94 includes data related to scheme 9701 supported byan OFDM scheme.

Data related to scheme 9701 supported by an OFDM scheme includes data3601 related to support for demodulation of modulated signals with phasechanges illustrated in, for example, FIG. 36 , FIG. 38 , and FIG. 79 .Note that since data 3601 related to support for demodulation ofmodulated signals with phase changes has already been described inEmbodiments A1, A2, A4, A11, etc., repeated description herein will beomitted.

When data 3601 related to support for demodulation of modulated signalswith phase changes is expressed as k0, for example, when thecommunication partner of the terminal generates modulated signals,implements phase change processing, and transmits the generatedmodulated signals from a plurality of antennas, if the terminal iscapable of demodulating such modulated signals, the terminal sets k0 to1 (k0=1), and if the terminal does not support demodulation of suchmodulated signal, the terminal sets k0 to 0 (k0=0), and then theterminal transmits a reception capability notification symbol includingk0.

Note that when the terminal sets g3 described above to 1 and sets g4described above to 0, since the terminal does not support demodulationof an OFDM scheme modulated signal, the bit (field) indicated by k0becomes a null bit (field).

When the terminal sets g3 to 1 and sets g4 to 0, k0 described above maybe predefined as a reserved (held for future use) bit (field), and theterminal may determine k0 described above to be a null bit (field), andthe base station or AP may obtain k0 described above but determine k0 tobe a null bit (field).

In the above description, an embodiment is possible in which each of theterminals supports single-carrier scheme demodulation. In such cases,the bit (field) expressed by g3 described above is not required.

The base station that receives the reception capability notificationsymbol transmitted by the terminal in the above description generatesand transmits modulated signals based on the received receptioncapability notification symbol so that the terminal can receive atransmission signal that can be demodulated. Note that specific examplesof operations performed by the base station can be found in, forexample, Embodiment A1, Embodiment A2, Embodiment A4, and EmbodimentA11.

If the above is implemented, the following exemplary features can beachieved.

-   -   Feature #1:        -   A first reception device, characterized in that:        -   the first reception device generates control information            indicating a signal that is receivable by the first            reception device and including first, second, third, and            fourth regions;        -   the first region is configured to store information            indicating whether a signal for transmitting data generated            using a single-carrier scheme is receivable or not, and            information indicating whether a signal generated using a            multi-carrier scheme is receivable or not;        -   the second region is configured to store information for            each of one or more schemes that can be used when the signal            is generated using the single-carrier scheme, can be used            when the signal is generated using the multi-carrier scheme,            or can be used in both cases, the information indicating            whether the signal generated using said scheme is            receivable;        -   the third region:            -   is configured to, when the first region stores                information indicating that the signal for transmitting                data generated using the single-carrier scheme is                receivable, store information for each of one or more                schemes that can be used when the signal is generated                using the single-carrier scheme, the information                indicating whether the signal generated using said                scheme is receivable; and            -   is configured to be a null or reserved region when the                first region stores information indicating that the                signal for transmitting data generated using the                single-carrier scheme is not receivable,        -   the fourth region:            -   is configured to, when the first region stores                information indicating that the signal for transmitting                data generated using the multi-carrier scheme is                receivable, store information for each of one or more                schemes that can be used when the signal is generated                using the multi-carrier scheme, the information                indicating whether the signal generated using said                scheme is receivable; and            -   is configured to be a null or reserved region when the                first region stores information indicating that the                signal for transmitting data generated using the                multi-carrier scheme is not receivable; and        -   the first reception device is configured to generate a            control signal based on the control information and transmit            the control signal to a transmission device.        -   The first reception device described above, characterized in            that:        -   the second region includes a fifth region configured to            store information indicating whether a signal generated            using a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) scheme is            receivable or not;        -   the second or fourth region includes a sixth region            configured to store information indicating whether a signal            generated using a phase change scheme that implements a            phase change while regularly changing a phase change value            is receivable or not, for at least one of transmission            system signals that transmit data; and        -   the first reception device is configured to set a bit in the            sixth region to a predetermined value when (i) the first            region stores information indicating that the signal for            transmitting data generated using the multi-carrier scheme            is not receivable or when (ii) the first region stores            information indicating that the signal for transmitting data            generated using the multi-carrier scheme is receivable and            the fifth region stores information indicating that the            signal generated using the MIMO scheme is not receivable.        -   A first transmission device, configured to:        -   receive the control signal from the first reception device            described above;        -   demodulate the received control signal to obtain the control            signal; and        -   based on the control signal, determine a scheme to be used            to generate a signal to be transmitted to the reception            device.        -   The first transmission device described above, characterized            in that:        -   the second region includes a fifth region configured to            store information indicating whether a signal generated            using a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) scheme is            receivable or not;        -   the second or fourth region includes a sixth region            configured to store information indicating whether a signal            generated using a phase change scheme that implements a            phase change while regularly changing a phase change value            is receivable or not, for at least one of transmission            system signals that transmit data; and        -   the first transmission device is configured to determine a            scheme to be used to generate a signal to be transmitted to            the reception device, without using a value of a bit in the            sixth region, when (i) the first region includes information            indicating that the signal for transmitting data generated            using the multi-carrier scheme is not receivable or            when (ii) the first region includes information indicating            that the signal for transmitting data generated using the            multi-carrier scheme is receivable and the fifth region            includes information indicating that the signal generated            using the MIMO scheme is not receivable.    -   Feature #2:        -   A second reception device, characterized in that:        -   the second reception device generates control information            indicating a signal that is receivable by the first            reception device and including first, second, third, and            fourth regions;        -   the first region is configured to store information            indicating whether a signal for transmitting data generated            using a multi-carrier scheme is receivable or not;        -   the second region is configured to store information for            each of one or more schemes that can be used when the signal            is generated using the single-carrier scheme, can be used            when the signal is generated using the multi-carrier scheme,            or can be used in both cases, the information indicating            whether the signal generated using said scheme is            receivable;        -   the third region is configured to store information for each            of one or more schemes that can be used when the signal is            generated using the single-carrier scheme, the information            indicating whether the signal generated using said scheme is            receivable;        -   the fourth region:            -   is configured to, when the first region stores                information indicating that the signal for transmitting                data generated using the multi-carrier scheme is                receivable, store information for each of one or more                schemes that can be used when the signal is generated                using the multi-carrier scheme, the information                indicating whether the signal generated using said                scheme is receivable; and            -   is configured to be a null or reserved region when the                first region stores information indicating that the                signal for transmitting data generated using the                multi-carrier scheme is not receivable; and        -   the second reception device is configured to generate a            control signal based on the control information and transmit            the control signal to a transmission device.        -   The second reception device described above, characterized            in that:        -   the second region includes a fifth region configured to            store information indicating whether a signal generated            using a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) scheme is            receivable or not;        -   the second or fourth region includes a sixth region            configured to store information indicating whether a signal            generated using a phase change scheme that implements a            phase change while regularly changing a phase change value            is receivable or not, for at least one of transmission            system signals that transmit data; and        -   the second reception device is configured to set a bit in            the sixth region to a predetermined value when (i) the first            region stores information indicating that the signal for            transmitting data generated using the multi-carrier scheme            is not receivable or when (ii) the first region stores            information indicating that the signal for transmitting data            generated using the multi-carrier scheme is receivable and            the fifth region stores information indicating that the            signal generated using the MIMO scheme is not receivable.        -   A second transmission device, configured to:        -   receive the control signal from the first reception device            described above;        -   demodulate the received control signal to obtain the control            signal; and        -   based on the control signal, determine a scheme to be used            to generate a signal to be transmitted to the reception            device.        -   The second transmission device described above,            characterized in that:        -   the second region includes a fifth region configured to            store information indicating whether a signal generated            using a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) scheme is            receivable or not;        -   the second or fourth region includes a sixth region            configured to store information indicating whether a signal            generated using a phase change scheme that implements a            phase change while regularly changing a phase change value            is receivable or not, for at least one of transmission            system signals that transmit data; and        -   the second transmission device is configured to determine a            scheme to be used to generate a signal to be transmitted to            the second reception device, without using a value of a bit            in the sixth region, when (i) the first region includes            information indicating that the signal for transmitting data            generated using the multi-carrier scheme is not receivable            or when (ii) the first region includes information            indicating that the signal for transmitting data generated            using the multi-carrier scheme is receivable and the fifth            region includes information indicating that the signal            generated using the MIMO scheme is not receivable.

Note that in this embodiment, the configuration of reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502 in FIG. 35 is exemplified as the configurationillustrated in FIG. 94 , but the configuration is not limited to thisexample; for example, a different reception capability notificationsymbol may be included in FIG. 94 . For example, the configuration maybe the one illustrated in FIG. 98 .

In FIG. 98 , components that operate the same as in FIG. 94 share likereference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereof will beomitted. In FIG. 98 , other reception capability notification symbol9801 is added as a reception capability notification symbol.

Other reception capability notification symbol 9801 is, for example, areception capability notification symbol that does not correspond toreception capability notification symbol 9401 related to asingle-carrier scheme and an OFDM scheme, does not correspond toreception capability notification symbol 9402 related to asingle-carrier scheme, and does not correspond to reception capabilitynotification symbol 9403 related to an OFDM scheme.

Even such a reception capability notification symbol can be implementedin the same manner as described above.

Moreover, in FIG. 94 , the order of the reception capabilitynotification symbols is exemplified as: reception capabilitynotification symbol 9401 related to a single-carrier scheme and an OFDMscheme, reception capability notification symbol 9402 related to asingle-carrier scheme, and reception capability notification symbol 9403related to an OFDM scheme, but the order is not limited to this example.An alternative example will be given next.

In FIG. 94 , suppose bits r0, r1, r2, and r3 are provided as receptioncapability notification symbol 9401 related to a single-carrier schemeand an OFDM scheme. In FIG. 94 , suppose bits r4, r5, r6, and r7 areprovided as reception capability notification symbol 9402 related to asingle-carrier scheme. In FIG. 94 , suppose bits r8, r9, r10, and r11are provided as reception capability notification symbol 9403 related toan OFDM scheme.

In this example, in FIG. 94 , assume bits r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, r7,r8, r9, r10, and r11 are arranged in the stated order, and, for example,are arranged in the stated order in a frame.

As one alternative example, bits r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, r7, r8, r9,r10, and r11 may be reorganized, such as in the order of bits r7, r2,r4, r6, r1, r8, r9, r5, r10, r3, and r11, and arranged in the statedorder in a frame. Note that the order in which the bits are arranged isnot limited to these arrangements.

Moreover, in FIG. 94 , suppose fields s0, s1, s2, and s3 are provided asreception capability notification symbol 9401 related to asingle-carrier scheme and an OFDM scheme. In FIG. 94 , suppose fieldss4, s5, s6, and s7 are provided as reception capability notificationsymbol 9402 related to a single-carrier scheme. In FIG. 94 , supposefields s8, s9, s10, and s11 are provided as reception capabilitynotification symbol 9403 related to an OFDM scheme. Note that a field isconfigured of one or more bits.

In this example, in FIG. 94 , assume fields s1, s2, s3, s4, s5, s6, s7,s8, s9, s10, and s11 are arranged in the stated order, and, for example,are arranged in the stated order in a frame.

As one alternative example, fields s1, s2, s3, s4, s5, s6, s7, s8, s9,s10, and s11 may be reorganized, such as in the order of fields s7, s2,s4, s6, s1, s8, s9, s5, s10, s3, and s11, and arranged in the statedorder in a frame. Note that the order in which the fields are arrangedis not limited to these arrangements.

Moreover, in FIG. 98 , the order of the reception capabilitynotification symbols is exemplified as: reception capabilitynotification symbol 9401 related to a single-carrier scheme and an OFDMscheme, reception capability notification symbol 9402 related to asingle-carrier scheme, reception capability notification symbol 9403related to an OFDM scheme, and other reception capability notificationsymbol 9801, but the order is not limited to this example. Analternative example will be given next.

In FIG. 98 , suppose bits r0, r1, r2, and r3 are provided as receptioncapability notification symbol 9401 related to a single-carrier schemeand an OFDM scheme. In FIG. 98 , suppose bits r4, r5, r6, and r7 areprovided as reception capability notification symbol 9402 related to asingle-carrier scheme. In FIG. 98 , suppose bits r8, r9, r10, and r11are provided as reception capability notification symbol 9403 related toan OFDM scheme, and suppose bits r12, r13, r14, and r15 are provided asother reception capability notification symbol 9801.

In this example, in FIG. 98 assume bits r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, r7, r8,r9, r10, r11, r12, r13, r14, and r15 are arranged in the stated order,and, for example, are arranged in the stated order in a frame

As one alternative example, bits r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, r7, r8, r9,r10, r11, r12, r13, r14, and r15 may be reorganized, such as in theorder of bits r7, r2, r4, r6, r13, r1, r8, r12, r9, r5, r10, r3, r15,r11, and r14, and arranged in the stated order in a frame. Note that theorder in which the bits are arranged is not limited to thesearrangements.

Moreover, in FIG. 98 , suppose fields s0, s1, s2, and s3 are provided asreception capability notification symbol 9401 related to asingle-carrier scheme and an OFDM scheme. In FIG. 98 , suppose fieldss4, s5, s6, and s7 are provided as reception capability notificationsymbol 9402 related to a single-carrier scheme. In FIG. 98 , supposefields s8, s9, s10, and s11 are provided as reception capabilitynotification symbol 9403 related to an OFDM scheme, and suppose fieldss12, s13, s14, and s15 are provided as other reception capabilitynotification symbol 9801. Note that a field is configured of one or morebits.

In this example, in FIG. 98 , assume fields s1, s2, s3, s4, s5, s6, s7,s8, s9, s10, s11, s12, s13, s14, and s15 are arranged in the statedorder, and, for example, are arranged in the stated order in a frame.

As one alternative example, fields s1, s2, s3, s4, s5, s6, s7, s8, s9,s10, s11, s12, s13, s14, and s15 may be reorganized, such as in theorder of fields s7, s2, s4, s6, s13, s1, s8, s12, s9, s5, s10, s3, s15,s11, and s14, and arranged in the stated order in a frame. Note that theorder in which the fields are arranged is not limited to thesearrangements.

Note that information transmitted in a reception capability notificationsymbol related to a single-carrier scheme may not be explicitlyindicated as information for a single-carrier scheme. The informationtransmitted in a reception capability notification symbol related to asingle-carrier scheme described in this embodiment is, for example,information for notifying a selectable scheme when the transmissiondevice transmits a signal via a single-carrier scheme. In anotherexample, the information transmitted in a reception capabilitynotification symbol related to a single-carrier scheme described in thisembodiment is, in the case that the transmission device transmitssignals using a scheme other than a single-carrier scheme, such as anOFDM scheme, not used (i.e., ignored) in the selection of a scheme to beused for signal transmission. In yet another example, the informationtransmitted in a reception capability notification symbol related to asingle-carrier scheme described in this embodiment is, in the case that,for example, the reception device does not support reception of asingle-carrier scheme signal (in the case that the transmission deviceis notified that the reception device does not support such reception),information that is transmitted in a region determined to be a null orreserved region by the transmission device or the reception device. Asdescribed above, although such a reception capability notificationsymbol is referred to as reception capability notification symbol 9402related to a single-carrier scheme, this is merely one non-limitingexample; such a reception capability notification symbol may be referredto as something else. For example, such a symbol may be referred to as asymbol for indicating reception ability of a (first) terminal. Moreover,reception capability notification symbol 9402 related to asingle-carrier scheme may include information other than information fornotifying of a receivable signal.

Similarly, information transmitted in a reception capabilitynotification symbol related to an OFDM scheme may not be explicitlyindicated as information for an OFDM scheme. The information transmittedin a reception capability notification symbol related to an OFDM schemedescribed in this embodiment is, for example, information for notifyinga selectable scheme when the transmission device transmits a signal viaan OFDM scheme. In another example, the information transmitted in areception capability notification symbol related to an OFDM schemedescribed in this embodiment is, in the case that the transmissiondevice transmits signals using a scheme other than an OFDM scheme, suchas a single-carrier scheme, not used (i.e., ignored) in the selection ofa scheme to be used for signal transmission. In yet another example, theinformation transmitted in a reception capability notification symbolrelated to an OFDM scheme described in this embodiment is, in the casethat, for example, the reception device does not support reception of anOFDM scheme signal, information that is transmitted in a regiondetermined to be a null or reserved region by the transmission device orthe reception device. As described above, although such a receptioncapability notification symbol is referred to as reception capabilitynotification symbol 9403 related to an OFDM scheme, this is merely onenon-limiting example; such a reception capability notification symbolmay be referred to as something else. For example, such a symbol may bereferred to as a symbol for indicating reception ability of a (second)terminal. Moreover, reception capability notification symbol 9403related to an OFDM scheme may include information other than informationfor notifying of a receivable signal.

Although reception capability notification symbol 9401 related to asingle-carrier scheme and an OFDM scheme is referred to as such, this ismerely one non-limiting example; such a reception capabilitynotification symbol may be referred to as something else. For example,such a symbol may be referred to as a symbol for indicating receptionability of a (third) terminal. Moreover, reception capabilitynotification symbol 9401 related to a single-carrier scheme and an OFDMscheme may include information other than information for notifying of areceivable signal.

As described above, by forming a reception capability notificationsymbol, transmitting the reception capability notification symbol via aterminal, the base station receiving the reception capabilitynotification symbol, referring to the validity indicated by the value ofthe reception capability notification symbol, generating andtransmitting a modulated signal, the terminal can receive a modulatedsignal that can be demodulated, making it possible to accurately obtaindata and thus achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality. Moreover, the terminal can determine the validityindicated by each of the bits (fields) of the reception capabilitynotification symbol while generating data for each of the bits (fields),thus making it possible to transmit the reception capabilitynotification symbol to the base station with certainty, thus making itpossible to achieve the advantageous effect of an improvement incommunication quality.

Embodiment G1

In this embodiment, additional information pertaining to Embodiment A1,Embodiment A2, Embodiment A4, and Embodiment A11 will be given.

As illustrated in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 , the terminal transmits, to thebase station or AP, which is the communication partner of the terminal,data related to information 3702 related to support for reception of aplurality of streams, as a part of the reception capability notificationsymbol.

In Embodiments A1, A2, A4, A11, etc., the terminology “data related toinformation 3702 related to support for reception of a plurality ofstreams” is used, but this is merely a non-limiting example; anyreception capability notification symbol that can identify whether thereis support for reception of a plurality of streams or not can beimplemented in the same manner. This will be discussed below.

For example, consider a modulation and coding scheme (MCS), such as theones described below.

-   -   MCS #1:        -   Data symbol transmission via error correction encoding            scheme #A, modulation scheme QPSK, and single stream            transmission. This makes it possible to realize transmission            speeds of 10 Mbps (bps: bits per second).    -   MCS #2:        -   Data symbol transmission via error correction encoding            scheme #A, modulation scheme 16QAM, and single stream            transmission. This makes it possible to realize transmission            speeds of 20 Mbps.    -   MCS #3:        -   Data symbol transmission via error correction encoding            scheme #B, modulation scheme QPSK, and single stream            transmission. This makes it possible to realize transmission            speeds of 15 Mbps.    -   MCS #4:        -   Data symbol transmission via error correction encoding            scheme #B, modulation scheme 16QAM, and single stream            transmission. This makes it possible to realize transmission            speeds of 30 Mbps.    -   MCS #5:        -   Data symbol transmission via error correction encoding            scheme #A, modulation scheme QPSK, and transmission of a            plurality of streams from a plurality of antennas. This            makes it possible to realize transmission speeds of 20 Mbps            (bps: bits per second).    -   MCS #6:        -   Data symbol transmission via error correction encoding            scheme #A, modulation scheme 16QAM, and transmission of a            plurality of streams from a plurality of antennas. This            makes it possible to realize transmission speeds of 40 Mbps.    -   MCS #7:        -   Data symbol transmission via error correction encoding            scheme #B, modulation scheme QPSK, and transmission of a            plurality of streams from a plurality of antennas. This            makes it possible to realize transmission speeds of 30 Mbps.    -   MCS #8:        -   Data symbol transmission via error correction encoding            scheme #B, modulation scheme 16QAM, and transmission of a            plurality of streams from a plurality of antennas. This            makes it possible to realize transmission speeds of 60 Mbps.

Here, the terminal transmits information, via the reception capabilitynotification symbol, to the base station or AP, which is thecommunication partner, indicating that demodulation for MCS #1, MCS #2,MCS #3, and MCS #4 is possible, or that demodulation for MCS #1, MCS #2,MCS #3, MCS #4, MCS #5, MCS #6, MCS #7, and MCS #8 is possible. In suchcases, the communication partner is notified that demodulation forsingle stream transmission is possible or the communication partner isnotified that demodulation for single stream is possible anddemodulation for transmission of a plurality of streams from a pluralityof antennas is possible, which achieves the same function as thenotification via information 3702 related to support for reception of aplurality of streams.

However, when the terminal notifies, via a reception capabilitynotification symbol, the base station or AP, which is the communicationpartner, of an MCS set that the terminal can demodulate, there is anadvantage that the terminal can notify the base station or AP, which isthe communication partner, of details regarding the MCS set that theterminal can demodulate.

Moreover, in FIG. 35 , an example of communication between base stationor AP 3401 and terminal 3402 in FIG. 34 is illustrated, but theconfiguration of communication between base station or AP 3401 andterminal 3402 is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 35 . Forexample, in Embodiments A1, A2, A4, A11, F1, etc., the transmission of areception capability notification symbol by a terminal to acommunication partner (for example, a base station or AP) is a criticalaspect of the present disclosure, and it is this that allows for theadvantageous effects described in the embodiments to be achieved. Here,communication between the terminal and the communication partner of theterminal before transmission of the reception capability notificationsymbol by the terminal to the communication partner is not limited tothe example illustrated in FIG. 35 .

Other Variations, Etc.

Note that in the present specification, processed signal 106_Aillustrated in, for example, FIG. 1 , FIG. 44 , and FIG. 73 may betransmitted from a plurality of antennas, and processed signal 106_Billustrated in, for example, FIG. 1 , FIG. 44 , and FIG. 73 may betransmitted from a plurality of antennas. Note that a configuration inwhich processed signal 106_A includes any one of, for example, signals204A, 206A, 208A, and 210A is conceivable. Moreover, a configuration inwhich processed signal 106_B includes any one of, for example, signals204B, 206B, 208B, and 210B is conceivable.

For example, assume there are N transmitting antennas, i.e.,transmitting antennas 1 through N are provided. Note that N is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2. Here, the modulated signaltransmitted from transmitting antenna k is expressed as ck. Note that kis an integer that is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equalto N. Moreover, assume that vector C including c1 through cN isexpressed as C=(c1, c2 . . . cN)^(T). Note that transposed vector A isexpressed as AT. Here, when the precoding matrix (weighting matrix) isG, the following expression holds true.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.318} \right\rbrack &  \\{C = {G\begin{pmatrix}{d_{a}(i)} \\{d_{b}(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}(318)}\end{matrix}$

Note that da(i) is processed signal 106_A, db(i) is processed signal106_B, and i is a symbol number. Moreover, G is a matrix having N rowsand 2 columns, and may be a function of i. Moreover, G may be switchedat some given timing (i.e., may be a function of frequency or time).

Moreover, “processed signal 106_A is transmitted from a plurality oftransmitting antennas and processed signal 106_B is also transmittedfrom a plurality of transmitting antennas” and “processed signal 106_Ais transmitted from a single transmitting antenna and processed signal106_B is also transmitted from a single transmitting antenna” may beswitched in the transmission device. Regarding the timing of theswitching, the switching may be performed per frame, and the switchingmay be performed in accordance with the decision to transmit a modulatedsignal (may be any arbitrary timing).

Although only some exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure havebeen described in detail above, those skilled in the art will readilyappreciate that many modifications are possible in the exemplaryembodiments without materially departing from the novel teachings andadvantages of the present disclosure. Accordingly, all suchmodifications are intended to be included within the scope of thepresent disclosure.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY

The present disclosure can be widely applied to communications systemsthat transmit modulated signals from a plurality of antennas.

What is claimed is:
 1. A receiving method comprising: transmitting, to acommunication apparatus, first control information indicating whether aDiscrete Fourier Transform-spread-Orthogonal Frequency DivisionMultiplexing (DFT-s-OFDM) transmission scheme or an OFDM transmissionscheme is to be performed; receiving modulated symbols from thecommunication apparatus, the modulated symbols having been precoded witha precoding matrix selected from among precoding matrices if the firstcontrol information indicates that the DFT-s-OFDM is to be performed,the precoding matrices including a first matrix according to which phaseshift is performed on at least one symbol of the modulated symbols; andperforming signal processing on the modulated symbols according to thefirst control information.
 2. The receiving method according to claim 1,further comprising: selecting a demodulation scheme from amongdemodulation schemes, the demodulation schemes including a π/2-shiftBinary Phase-Shift Keying (BPSK) scheme; and demodulating the modulatingsymbols to generate encoded information according to the demodulationscheme selected.
 3. A receiving device comprising: a transmitterconfigured to transmit, to a communication apparatus, first controlinformation indicating whether a Discrete FourierTransform-spread-Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (DFT-s-OFDM)transmission scheme or an OFDM transmission scheme is to be performed; areceiver configured to receive modulated symbols from the communicationapparatus, the modulated symbols having been precoded with a precodingmatrix selected from among precoding matrices if the first controlinformation indicates that the DFT-s-OFDM is to be performed, theprecoding matrices including a first matrix according to which phaseshift is performed on at least one symbol of the modulated symbols; anda processor configured to demodulate the modulated symbols according tothe first control information.
 4. The receiving device according toclaim 3, wherein the processor is further configured to: select ademodulation scheme from among demodulation schemes, the demodulationschemes including a π/2-shift Binary Phase-Shift Keying (BPSK) scheme;and demodulate the modulated symbols to generate encoded informationaccording to the demodulation scheme selected.
 5. A receiving devicecomprising: communication circuitry configured to: transmit, to acommunication apparatus, first control information indicating whether aDiscrete Fourier Transform-spread-Orthogonal Frequency DivisionMultiplexing (DFT-s-OFDM) transmission scheme or an OFDM transmissionscheme is to be performed; and receive modulated symbols from thecommunication apparatus, the modulated symbols having been precoded witha precoding matrix selected from among precoding matrices if the firstcontrol information indicates that the DFT-s-OFDM is to be performed,the precoding matrices including a first matrix according to which phaseshift is performed on at least one symbol of the modulated symbols; anda processor configured to: perform signal processing on the modulatedsymbols according to the first control information; select ademodulation scheme from among demodulation schemes, the demodulationschemes including π/2-shift Binary Phase-Shift Keying (BPSK) scheme; anddemodulate the modulated symbols to generate encoded informationaccording to the demodulation scheme selected.
 6. A non-transitorycomputer readable medium storing a program configured to cause areceiving device to perform: transmitting, to a communication apparatus,first control information indicating whether a Discrete FourierTransform-spread-Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (DFT-s-OFDM)transmission scheme or an OFDM transmission scheme is to be performed;receiving modulated symbols from the communication apparatus, themodulated symbols having been precoded with a precoding matrix selectedfrom among precoding matrices if the first control information indicatesthat the DFT-s-OFDM is to be performed, the precoding matrices includinga first matrix according to which phase shift is performed on at leastone symbol of the modulated symbols; and performing signal processing onthe modulated symbols according to the first control information.